Home

ENGINEERING & CONSTRUCTION Bulletin

Contents

1. 2 X 8 5 Hydraulic Elevator Gompon entS u a uuu Sapa 2 X 8 6 Performance Testing and 115510 119 2 X 8 7 Elevator Supporting Documentation cc ceseeeceseeeceseeeeeseceeeceeeeecaeeeeeaesareeeeneens 2 X APPENDIX A REFBREBNCBS LS S uha E ma a a A 1 APPENDIX B NAVFAC VTE PROGRAM CONTACTS B 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Purpose Elevator installations are complex multi disciplined systems that interface with many aspects of the facility design Design considerations require coordination with architectural structural mechanical electrical and fire protection disciplines This document was developed to assist and direct architects engineers and project managers in the development of project request for proposal RFP design and specification documents related to the procurement of elevator systems in Navy Facilities NFPA 101 Life Safety Code mandates compliance with ASME A17 1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators International Building Code IBC and other non governmental safety standards These standards identify minimum design and performance requirements for elevator systems and for building systems that interface with the elevator installation The performance language used in th
2. I na 2 2 2 7 Window Restrictions Training Room n nn 3 2 2 8 Environmental Requirements Training Room a 3 2 2 9 Sound Insulation Requirements Training 3 2 2 10 Power Requirements Training Room nn 3 2 2 11 Telephone Line Requirements Training Room aaa 4 2 2 12 Lighting Requirements Training Room I nn 4 2 2 13 Furniture Requirements Training u u uu 4 2 2 14 Flow Specifications Training Room I n 4 2 2 15 Cable Routing Requirements Training Room 5 23 WEAPONS STORAGE ROON ULU asas aaa awan waaaawuaaaawayxnawaawan 5 2 3 1 Size Requirements Storage Room a aaa asassaaaasasasassasasssssasessssaasasasa 5 2 3 2 Power Requirements Storage Room uuu 5 2 3 3 Environmental Requirements Storage ROOM 5 2 3 4 Lighting Requirements Storage u uuu 5 2 3 5 ACCESS Storage Ro u RA eset des dagen ested eileen ded 5 2 4 COMPRESSOR ROOM FOR TETHERED WEAPONS U 5 2 4 1 Size Requirements Compressor Roo
3. A written statement entitled Software Upgrades stating software and firmware patches and updates will be provided upon request at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from contract acceptance Include a table of all DDC system software and firmware provided under this contract listing the original release dates version numbers part numbers and serial numbers Storage Cabinets In one project mechanical room provide a wall mounted metal storage cabinet with hinged doors Provide cabinets large enough to hold the entire set of Controls System Operators Manuals and the HVAC operation and maintenance manuals provided under Division 23 HVAC Locate cabinets adjacent to DDC control panels where applicable Have each cabinet s proposed installation site approved in advance by the Contracting Officer and the BAS Owner Prominently label each cabinet with the wording OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Place one of the three hard copies of the Operators Manual in this cabinet Prominently label each binder with SECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 41 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 3 3 the wording MECHANICAL ROOM COPY DO NOT REMOVE 5 T ERFORMANC T VERIFICATION TESTING PVT Bul Gen
4. Led REFERENCES SECTION 23 09 23 13 22 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 05 11 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the xtent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL AMCA AMCA 500 D 2007 Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ERS ASHRAE ASHRAE 135 WARNING Text in tags exceeds the maximum length of 300 characters ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B16 34 EL ASM GI B16 5 ASM bu B31 1 2009 Supp 2010 Valves Flanged Threaded and Welding End 2009 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1 2 Through NPS 24 Metric Inch Standard 2010 Power Piping ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 126 ASTM B 117 2004 R 2009 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves Flanges and Pipe Fittings 2009 Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE C62 41 1 IEEE C62 41 2 IEEE C62 45 2002 R 2008 Guide on the Surges Environment in Lov Voltage 1
5. Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsio dq Jo siseg P SO O lEQ p ulelqo ajeq 19470 xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg uonnilod E P SO O 3q p ulelqo yeq yuowobeuew ABJEMULIOIS 1lINM4d SJUBWAIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 61099 Aouaby Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg uonnilod 197eM P SO O lEQ P SO O p ulelqo 9120 poule qO leq 104uo2 JUBUUIPAS 9 40150 11NMAd xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI eads Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg ul 3sAS nd s LINYAd H3 VNV N LO4FOdd LNAWNYAAO9 uonnilod NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM JILIL 1 uonnilod 4 EM xog 42949 qad nosu A IN 1dd 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 610904 m Aov y Buinss s ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg 0 0 led p UlelqO led ul 3sAS uonnq ns q 1 JEA LIN213d Bupluuq x SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoid 61090 n Aov y Buinss s ON S A uolsioc dq 10 siseg p solo aed p uleqo 3eq 49430 1IINM4d h u d 10 9 pue suolsiAoid 1099 Aov y Sulnssi s ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg Suequnlsid p solo 4120 PSUle qO 3eq pue 15V Lz SAGdN 1
6. T The controls contractor shall coordinate with and provide on site support to the test and balance TAB personnel specified under Section 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC This support shall include a On site operation and manipulation of control systems during the testing and balancing b Control setpoint adjustments for balancing all relevant mechanical systems including VAV boxes c Tuning control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB personnel 4 CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS Provide five electronic and three printed copies of a Controls System Operators Manual The manual shall be specific to the project written to actual project conditions and provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed work Provide information in detail to clearly explain all operation requirements for the control system Provide with each manual CDs of the project s control system drawings control programs data bases graphics and all items listed below Include gateway back up data and configuration tools where applicable Provide CDs in jewel case with printed and dated project specific labels on both the CD and the case For text and drawings use Adobe Acrobat or MS Office file types When approved by the Government AutoCAD and Visio files are allowed Give files descriptive English names and organize in folders Provide printed manuals in sturdy 3 r
7. 2 10 AUXILIARY INSTANT ON QUARTZ SYSTEM UL listed automatically switched instant on 15011 250 watt quartz lamp Quartz lamp shall come on when the luminaire is initially energized and immediately after a momentary power outage and remain on until HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output Wiring for quartz lamp shall be internal to ballast and independent of incoming line voltage to the ballast Provide instant on quartz system for each HID fixture Provide instant on quartz system as indicated 2 11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2 11 1 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 2 11 2 Labels Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format Use Only ta a Lamp diameter code T 4 T 5 T 8 T 12 tube configuration twin quad triple base type and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires b Lamp type wattage bulb type ED17 BD56 etc and coating clear or coated for HID luminaires c Start type preheat rapid start instant start for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lum
8. Naval Facilities Engineering Command NAVFAC MID ATLANTIC MIDLANT BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR TIGHTNESS CRITERIA PURPOSE Provide a building envelope continuous air sealing barrier to reduce infiltration BUILDING ENVELOPE SEALING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT Design and construct the building envelope with a continuous air seal barrier to control air leakage into or out of the conditioned space A DESIGN Clearly identify all air barrier components of each envelope assembly on construction documents detail the joints interconnections and penetrations of the air barrier components Clearly identify the boundary limits of the building air barriers and of the zone or zones to be tested for building air tightness on the drawings Trace a continuous plane of air tightness throughout the building envelope and make flexible and seal all joints B CONSTRUCTION The air seal barrier material s must have an air permeance not to exceed 0 004 CFM SF at 0 3 WG 0 02 L s m2 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178 2003 1 Join and seal the air barrier material of each assembly to the air barrier material of adjacent assemblies in a flexible manner allowing for the relative movement of these assemblies and components 2 Support the air seal barrier in a method to withstand the maximum positive and negative air pressure to be placed on the building without displacement or damage and transfer the load to the structure 3 Seal
9. 12 5 14 Hydropneumatic Tank Provide Tank specifically designed for use on potable vater systems vith size and acceptance volume shall be as indicated on the dravings Construct of steel for minimum vorking pressure of125 psig Tank shall have polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the water Provide ASME code stamped tank in accordance with ASME BPVC 2 6 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METERS Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700 Cold water meters 2 1 2 inches and larger shall be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701 Meter register may be round or straight reading type indicating with totalizer Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories The water meters shall be connected to the DDC system for remote reading of all water usage Provide water meters for the make up water to the rainwater harvesting system and the rainwater supply to the water distribution system in the locations as shown on the Plumbing drawings 227 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors motor starters and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 13 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Provide internal viring for components of packaged equipment as an int
10. 2010a Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications 2010a Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service or Both 2008 Standard Specification for Steel Castings Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High Temperature Service 2010 Standard Specification for Castings Austenitic for Pressure Containing Parts 2010 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet 55 Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process 2008 Standard Specification for Solder Metal 2008a Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Application 2009 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube 2009 Self Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection 1998 R 2010 Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 2005 Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 1995 R 2003 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Air Pressure Difference 1995 R 2003 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems 2001 R 2009 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Water Pressure Head 2004 De
11. Number of air changes may be reduced when the room is unoccupied if provi sions are made to ensure that the number of air changes indicated is reastab lishad any time the space is being utilized Adjustments shall include provisions so that the direction of air movement shall emain the same when the number of air changes is reduced Areas not indicated as having continu ous directional control may hava ventilation systams shut down when space is unoccupied and ventilation is not otherwise naa dad if the maximum innitra tion or axflitration pamnittad in Note 2 is not exceeded and if adjacent prssure balancing Plationships are not compromisad Air quantity calculations must account for Miter loading such that the indicatad air change rates are provided Up until the time of fiiter changa out The minimum total air change mquir m nts for Table 2 1 2 shall b basad on the supply air quantity in positive possum rooms and the exhaust air quantity in negative ppssun rooms Air change requirements indicated ar minimum valuas Higher valuas should b used when required to maintain indicated room conditions temperature and humidity based on the cooling load of the space lights equipment peopl exterior walls and windows ate 2009 Table 2 1 2 continued Ventilation Requirements for Areas Affecting Patient Care in Hospitals and Outpatient Facilities Airfrom areas with contamination and or odor problems shall be axhaustad to
12. 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 system manufacturer s specifications and in agreement with BACnet standards found in ASHRAE 135 Annex L The software shall permit complete monitoring modification and troubleshooting interface with the DDC system The operator interface with the software shall be menu driven with appropriate displays and menu commands to manipulate the DDC system s objects point data operating schedules control routines system configuration trends alarms messages graphics and reports Trends shall be capable of graphic display in real time with variables plotted as functions of time Each alarmed point shall be capable of displaying its alarm history showing when it went into alarm if and when it was acknowledged and when it went out of alarm The modification of DDC system parameters and object properties shall be accomplished with fill in the blank and or point and drag methods Modifications shall download to the appropriate controllers at the operator s request 2 1 4 16 Graphics Software Provide web based system graphics viewable on browsers compatible with MS Internet Explorer 6 X or greater using an industry standard file format such as HTML BMP JPEG or GIF Graphics for new projects must be consistent with base standards including layout and device naming Contractor shall install this grap
13. 8 7 1 O amp M Data Package For all elevator construction and modernization all shop drawings and product data material must be assembled into O amp M Data Packages Two complete hard copy data packages and two complete electronic data packages on separate CDs must be provided Comprehensive computer diagnostic documentation and software shall be included in the electronic data packages 8 7 2 Wiring Diagrams For each controller two complete sets of full size as built wiring diagrams must be provided One set must be laminated and mounted in the elevator MR In addition two complete electronic sets of as built wiring diagrams must be provided on separate CDs in PDF format Coded wiring diagrams are not acceptable unless fully identified 8 7 3 Component Submittals For each hydraulic component that is subject to hydraulic oil pressure the product submittal package must include the component manufacturer s product data identifying the working pressure for hydraulic elevator use factor of safety and ultimate strength APPENDIX A Design Reference Documents Design elevator hoistway and machine room in accordance with this ITG and with the current versions of the following reference documents The elevator design shall comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award This listing of references is not exclusive If there are government or non government standards codes or criteria documents that apply they are applica
14. 82 Feet o Inhabited 33 Feet e Trash Containers o Primary Gathering 82 Feet o Billeting 82 Feet o Inhabited 33 Feet e Parking of Emergency Command and Operations Support Vehicles s parking of vehicles required o Have the conditions for parking vehicles been met e Parking of Vehicles Undergoing Maintenance Is parking of vehicles required o Have the conditions for parking vehicles been met e New Parking and Roadway projects o Does new parking and road location meet minimum standoff distance requirements from existing buildings 2 Standard 2 Unobstructed Space Appendix B 1 2 Are there any obstructions within 33 Feet of the building that is 6 inches or greater in height Are packages within the 33 foot distance observable by building occupants s Electrical and Mechanical Equipment 33 Feet or greater from the building e Equipment Enclosures o Are walls or screening devices more than two sides o If yes has a four sided enclosure w a top been provided Standard 3 Drive Up Drop Off Areas Appendix B 1 3 Are drive up or drop off areas or drive through lanes near building required o If yes are the areas or lanes clearly defined and marked to to prevent parking in those areas o Are drive up or drop off areas or drive through lanes not located under inhabited portion of bldg Standard 4 Access Roads Appendix B 1 4 e Have access contr
15. Brace all fuel oil natural gas medical gas and compressed air piping in accordance with local codes Brace all piping located in boiler mechanical equipment and refrigeration mechanical rooms that is 32 mm 172 nominal diameter and greater Brace all pipes 65 mm 272 nominal diameter and greater Piping suspended by individual hangers 305 mm 12 or le ss in length as measured from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached need not be braced For pipes on a trapeze the 305 mm 12 exception is measured from the upper face of the horizontal structure member or th e bottom of the pipe Transverse bracing must be at 12 meter 40 ft minimum intervals except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the tables for pipe bracing Longitudinal bracing must be at 24 meter 80 ft minimum intervals except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the tables For gas piping the bracing details schedules and notes may be used except that transverse and longitudinal bracing will be at one half the spacing shown in the tables in Chapter 5 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition Provide seismic automatic shut off valves vvhere required by NAVFAC Specifications 15195N Natural Gas Piping and 02556a Gas Distribution Systems Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as the longitudinal brace for a pipe section of the same size at a 90 turn if the bracing is installed
16. CONTACT INTERIOR DESIGNER NAVFACENGCOM Phone DESCRIPTION QTY UNIT COST TOTAL COST file name FURNITURE PROCUREMENT DATA SHEET continued DIVISION NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND MANUFACTURER ITEM NO photo of item here representative finish here file name NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND MID ATLANTIC PROJECT ITEM CODE BASE CITY STATE ITEM BPA CONTRACT EXPIRATION DATE GSA CONTRACT MANUFACTURER ORDERING ADDRESS LOCAL REP CONTACT INFO ANY VARIANCE OR MODIFICATION OF THIS SPECIFICATION WILL BE COORDINATED THROUGH NAVFAC MID ATLANTIC NAVFAC ID CONTACT PROJECT ID CONTACT DESCRIPTION UNIT COST TOTAL COST ROOM LOCATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL CERTIFICATIONS QTY ROOM NUMBER REMARKS ITEM PHOTO FINISH SAMPLES x SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoiqd 61299 Aov y Buinss s ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg P SO O lEQ poule qO aed 19470 LIINYAd xx SJUBWAIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 61099 Aov y Buinss ux ON S8A UOISIN9G Jo siseg Ajeno sry P SO O 160 p ulelqo ajeq IEAOUl M 8 4011 04 so s qsv LIINYAd xx SJUBWAIINDEY pue SUOISIAOIY 1099 Aou y Buinss xx ON S A uolsio q Jo siseg Ayyend sry P SO O poule qoO aed Bunei do LIINNAd x SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoiq 61299 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A
17. IEC 60068 2 30 2009 Environmental testing Part 2 14 Tests Test N Change of temperature Edition 6 0 2005 Environmental Testing Part 2 30 Tests Test Db Damp Heat Cyclic 12 H 12 H Cycle Ed 3 0 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI ANSLG C78 41 ANSI ANSLG C78 42 ANSI 136 10 ANSI 136 13 ANSI 136 21 ANSI C136 3 NEMA C136 31 ANSI 78 1381 ANSI 82 4 ANSI ANSLG C78 43 NEMA ANSLG C78 377 2006 For Electric Lamps Guidelines for Lov Pressure Sodium Lamps 2009 For Electric Lamps High Pressure Sodium Lamps 2006 American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Locking Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing 2004 R 2009 American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment Metal Brackets for Wood Poles 2004 R 2009 American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Vertical Tenons Used with Post Top Mounted Luminaires 2005 R 2009 American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Attachments 2010 For Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Luminaire Vibration 1998 American National Standard for Electric Lamps 250 Watt 70 Watt M85 Metal Halide Lamps 2002 American National Standard for Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium LPS Lamps Multiple Supply Type 2
18. NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC IEC 60687 1992 Alternating Current Static Watt Hour Meters for Active Energy Classes 0 2 S and 0 5 S TEC 62053 22 2003 Electricity Metering Equipment a c Particular Requirements Part 22 Static Meters for Active Energy Classes 0 2 S and 0 5 S Ed 1 0 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI C12 1 2008 Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering ANSI C12 18 2006 Protocol Specification for ANSI Type 2 Optical Port Page 1 ANSI C12 20 2010 Electricity Meters 0 2 and 0 5 Accuracy Classes ANSI 12 7 2005 Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets NEMA 12 19 2008 Utility Industry End Device Data Tables NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code 2 DEFINITIONS Unless othervise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the dravings shall be as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval information only When used a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government Technical data packages consisting o
19. Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 foot above finished grade Minimum footcandle level Maximum footcandle level Average maintained footcandle level Maximum and minimum ratio Horizontal Warranty G LED Luminaire Warranty G SD 02 Shop Drawings Luminaire drawings G Poles G SD 03 Product Data Local Regional Materials Page 5 Submit documentation indicating distance betveen manufacturing facility and the project site Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site Indicate relative dollar value of local regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project Environmental Data Energy Efficiency Luminaires G L zi D Luminaires G 1 L zi D Luminaire Daylighting Controls G Es 13 Luminaire Photocell Svitch G ET 13 Luminaire Time Svitch G ET 13 Luminaire Curfev Control G L zi D Luminaire Occupancy Sensor Controls G Lamps G 1 Ballasts G Lighting contactor G 1 Time switch G Photocell switch G Concrete poles G Aluminum poles G Steel poles G Fiberglass poles G Brackets Auxiliary instant on quartz system G Il SD 04 Samples Luminaires G 1 LED Luminaires G 1 Submit one sample of each luminaire typel complete vith lamp and ballast Submit one sample for each item other than luminaires Sample vill be returned
20. for more information 6 1 3 3 Provide roof ceiling insulation systems complying with the following principles 6 1 3 3 1 Install the continuous air barrier vapor retarder in accordance with guidance in the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual fifth edition 6 1 3 3 2 Ventilate spaces created outside the roof ceiling continuous air barrier vapor retarder For sloped roofs ventilation must comply with the International Building Code 2003 IBC Section 1202 2 Ensure that moisture transfer from ventilated attics into the building is minimized the same as for walls 6 1 3 3 3 Prohibit entry of unconditioned outside air into all spaces inside the thermal envelope Ventilation of such spaces if required must use air from conditioned spaces Exception Mechanical Electrical Elevator Machine and similar rooms provided with louvers or other intended means of outside air entry shall have all the interior surfaces provided with a continuous air barrier except the interior face of the exterior walls Walls and ceilings may be painted with vapor retardant paint and above grade floors may be seal coated concrete 6 1 3 3 4 On the interior face of exterior walls use only interior wall finishes that allow water vapor within the wall to escape into the conditioned space such as latex paint Vinyl wall coverings oil based paint and other vapor resistant materials will not be used as interior finishes for exterior walls 6 1 3 4 Envelop
21. 1 Insulation Class All 600 volt and below current transformers shall be rated 10 KV BIL Current transformers for 2400 and 4160 volt service shall be rated 25 KV BIL 2 Frequency Nominal 60 Hz 3 Burden Burden class shall be selected for the load 4 Phase Angle Range 0 to 60 degrees Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers 5A secondary current transformers Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE 57 13 Provide one single ratio current transformer for each phase per power transformer with characteristics listed in the following table Single Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics Page 7 Single Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics kVA Sec Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc Class kVA Sec Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc Class 500 208Y 120 1200 5 1 33 0 3 thru BO 05 750 480Y 277 800 5 1 33 0 3 thru BO 05 2 1 4 Meter Requirements Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract meters shall be no other product will be acceptable Electricity meters shall include the following features a Meter shall comply with ANSI C12 1 NEMA C12 19 and ANSI 12 20 b Meter sockets shall comply with ANSI C12 7 c Meter shall comply with IEC 62053 22 certified by a qualified third party test laboratory d Meter shall comply with IEC 60687 certified by a qualified 3rd party test laboratory l e Provide socket
22. operational and energy information During the site visit the PE must verify that all information listed on the Data Checklist and SEP is true and accurate In addition to stamping that all information listed on the SEP is true and accurate the PE must also sign and date the Data Checklist for purposes of applying for the ENERGY STAR label effective October 25 2008 A complete data checklist will include a check and or notation in the box provided by each item Belovv are a fevv examples of physical characteristics that must be verified by the PE Building Name Type of Office Location Single Structure Gross Floor Area Module 2 Operating Characteristics 2 1 Obiective All recorded operating characteristics displayed on a building s Statement of Energy Performance must be verified when applying for the ENERGY STAR label 2 2 Background and Expectations of PE To assess the energy performance of a building all building operating characteristics must be accurately portrayed by the user Operating characteristics include rates of occupancy and vacancy among other pertinent characteristics specific to each building type The PE is expected to verify the accuracy of the building s recorded operating characteristics displayed on the Statement of Energy Performance and verify that the building meets the eligibility requirements for the ENERGY STAR label A checklist of the items to be verified is provided at the end this module 2
23. 0 017 f Air Permeability ASTM E 283 lt 0 007 g Miami Dade Approved 2 3 PHOTOVOLTAIC PONER SYSTEM Photovoltaic modules shall be certified to meet UL 1703 All inverters shall be certified as meeting the requirements of UL 1741 The manufacturer of photovoltaic panels shall have a minimum of 10 years of successful experience continuously manufacturing solar electric panels of the type specified herein Building Integrated Photovoltaic Generating System The complete BIPV T system shall be designed and supplied by the BIPV T manufacturer for compatible integration of system components and for optimum system performance a Photovoltaic Modules b The PV laminates shall be lightweight and flexible with an adhesive factory applied to back for direct installation on flat standing seam metal pans the PV laminates must be designed to fit securely within the metal roofing pans without penetrating roofing material The photovoltaic laminates shall have a high tolerance for shading from obstructions and debris This specification is written with the United Solar Ovonic LLC as the basis of acceptable performance and appearance Like products of other manufacturers may be approved providing that they meet the entire requirement specified herein Contractors are encouraged to submit both specified product and alternatives c Balance of System Components SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 15 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE CO
24. 1 Type Dry type of two winding construction 2 Weather Outdoor or indoor rated for the application 3 Frequency Nominal 60 Hz 4 Accuracy Plus or minus 0 3 percent at 60 Hz Potential transformers installed inside switchgear and panels shall be rated for interior use Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts wye connected 3 phase 4 wire 60 Hz insulation class 600 volts Potential transformers BIL shall be a minimum of 10 kV and have an insulation class and BIL rating that equals or exceeds the ratings of the associated switchgear Potential transformers shall have an accuracy class of 0 3 at burdens w x and y Thermal rating shall be 500 VA Potential transformers shall be accessed from the front and mounted in a metering section Current Transformer Requirements Current transformer shall be installed with a rating as shown in the schedule Current transformers shall have an Accuracy Class of 0 3 witha maximum error of plus minus 0 3 percent at 5 0 amperes when operating within the specified rating factor Current transformers shall be solid core bracket mounted for new installations using ring tongue lugs for electrical connections Current transformers shall be accessible and the associated wiring shall be installed in an organized and neat workmanship arrangement Current transformers that are retrofitted onto existing switchgear busbar can be a busbar split core design Current transformers shall have
25. 104 SEMA P SO O 180 peuleygo ejeq uonebaibby uol lloS HO b sn LIINNA3d sSnopiezeH pue pijos SJUBWAIINDEY pue suolsiAoid 1099 Aov y 01159 ux ON S A 401910 Jo siseg SPAA P SOIO leq 4 leq IlUpue 11 NM4d4 snopiezeH pue pijos M49VNV N 1247OMd LN3INN I3dAOS xog y u NOLLVOO1 q s noau 1138INDN AYOM 421113 1247OMd LINM4d 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aov y Buinss ux ON S A 401910 Jo siseg P SO O lEQ p ule qO 9120 lQEBIAEN Ul WOM LINYAd xx SJUSUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg 18410 P SO O 10 P SO O ajeq p ule qo yeq pauleiqo leq 19470 xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 1090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg j u uui BeueIN uleldpool i LIW33d xx SJUQWOIINDEY pue suolsiAoiqd 61090 Aov y Sulnssi xx ON S A uolsi5 q JO siseg yuowabeuew 6 568020 Li yuowabeuew 58020 P SO O 10 poule qoO aed J eg 235802 LINYAd H3 VNV N LN3INNzI3AO S NOLLVOOT HASINRN NYOM 1111 1 yuowabeuew 58020 xog 49049 qad nosu LIINYAd 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINY
26. 20 244 x SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoiq 61299 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg P SO O 0 614 ajeq 494 0 LINYAd xx SJUGWAIINDEY pue suolsiAoid 61099 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsio q Jo siseg SJjluu d 3943 P SO O p ulelqo ajeq ye iqeH Ie2IUO s 5 ds p J Buepu3 11 1434 1 3 1 NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM 1111 1 syw d 19470 xog 49949 aayinoay LINYAd 404 NOISIOAG 4O 04 23 SLINYAd May 2002 Seismic Design for Mechanical Systems The forces exerted by an earthquake on a structure or more specifically the mechanical systems vvithin a building can be in any direction Hovvever since every building and mechanical system support is designed to take care of the vertical or gravity loads the main emphasis for seismic design is in the control of horizontal forces exerted during a seismic event The vertical load component for equipment is its operating vveight For ducts and pipes the vertical load component includes the vveight of the duct or pipe and the contained fluid The design of structural seismic restraints for mechanical systems assumes the building is designed to respond safely during earthquake events The restraints primary function is to insure the mechanical systems do not br
27. 3 2 5 Initial Runoff Filter Install the debris filter in accordance with the filter manufacturer s written instructions Install such that the top cover shall be flush with finish grade after installation is complete SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 21 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 2 6 Rainvater Filter Purification and Controls Follov the dravings and the manufacturer s vritten instructions for installation of the rainvater filters purification system and controls 3 2 7 Dye and Chlorine Injection System Follow the drawings and the manufacturer s written instructions for installation of the dye and chlorine Jinjection system 3 2 8 Booster Pump Follow the drawings and the manufacturer s written instructions for installation of the booster pump Connect the pump controls to the rainwater control system 3 2 9 Packaged Pump System Follow the drawings and the manufacturer s written instructions for installation of the packaged pump system Connect the pump controls to the rainwater control system 1325 10 Hydropneumatic Tank Follow the drawings and the manufacturer s written instructions for installation of the rainwater filters purification system and controls s FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS Polished chromium plated pipe valves and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view Angle stops straight stops stops integral with the faucets or concealed type
28. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 27 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems End of Section SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 28 EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune 521 B 3 StemB lr 800 O 6 Closed Circuit Tower 0h 81 8 Condenser Water Pump 0 hk O 9 CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioner 6 0hkx0 17 DPR Damper _ 80 O EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune 60 20 Zone Mixing Damper I 1 EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune POINTS Ii POINTS 85hN ALM SIL AlamSienee 65 BLR C BoilerCommnq 0 69 BRs Boersen 0 j 0 cHs T cniller Supply Temperature 66 CLG NITE Cooling Night SetPon j CLGVLV Chiled Water Valve Operalon 90 CONDIS Condenser Stats 8 C 96 tnilled Water R tum Temperature 0 C s CVVS T Cnilled Water Supply Temperature 99 DHiV S
29. Dry Bulb Temperature T Design Value F and the Mean Coincident Average Values Wet Bulb Temperature F for the Design Cooling Day Also design for Maximum Humidity conditions using the 1 0 Occurrence value of outside air Humidity Ratio HR Design Value gr lb and the Mean Coincident Average Values Dry Bulb Temperature F For Mission Critical Facilities in Humid Areas use the 0 4 Occurrence values instead of the 1 Occurrence values above Mission Critical Facilities not HA where equipment failure due to high heat would be unacceptable For design use the 0 4 Occurrence value for outside air Dry Bulb Temperature T Design Value F and the Mean Coincident Average Values Wet Bulb Temperature F for the Design Cooling Day Other Typical Facilities and Systems not HA For design use the 1 Occurrence value of outside air Dry Bulb Temperature T Design Value F and the Mean Coincident Average Values Wet Bulb Temperature F for the Design Cooling Day Cooling Towers or Evaporative Cooling Equipment For sizing use the 0 4 Occurrence for Mission Critical Facilities or the 1 0 Occurrence for Other Typical Facilities value for outside air VVet Bulb Temperature T Design Value F and the Mean Coincident Average Values Dry Bulb Temperature T for t
30. High Efficiency DX Air Conditioning Units 7 Solar Water Heating 8 Solar Walls 9 Daylighting 10 High Performance Windows 11 High Albedo Cool Roof 12 Radiant Heating 13 Photovoltaic systems amp 14 Green roof Appropriate to the climate zone where the project is located the use of the listed technologies will vary The project design team will determine the appropriate technology and any others as would be applied to the facility and climate zone Note that there are many design features and technologies that will help the project meet the LEED Silver requirements but normally do not add cost Those line items do not need to be listed in the BESS but may be specifically identified in Block 10 Review blocks 10 11 and 12 for any identified sustainable features List only the major line items Block 10 should include the standard Sustainability statement in every project 1 Attachment 3 Attachment 3 Budget Cost for Energy Policy Act 2005 EPAct and LEED Silver Compliance To check the total cost of the programmed Inhabited Building against cost to comply with EPAct 2005 and LEEDe Silver confirm that the total cost delta is less than 3 of the Primary Facility Cost 2 Attachment 3 CAPITAL MPROVEMENTS Naval Facilities Engineering Command ENGINEERING amp CONSTRUCTION Bulletin Issue No 2008 02 11 April 2008 Type Policy Subject NAVFAC Red Zone Policy for Construction Contracts 1 P
31. Pole shall bel direct set anchor bolt mounted type Poles shall have tapered tubular members either round in cross section or polygonal Pole shafts shall be one piece Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts rivets or other means of fastening except as specifically approved Pole markings shall be approximately 900 to 1270 mm 3 to 4 feet above grade and shall include manufacturer year of manufacture top and bottom diameters and length Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum yield of 248 MPa 36 000 psi l 7 4 Wood Poles ATIS ANSI 05 1 and RUS Bull 1728F 700 of Southern Yellow Pine Douglas Fir Poles shall be gained bored and roofed before treatment Poles shall be treated full length with chromated copper arsenate CCA or ammoniacal copper arsenate ACA according to AWPA C1 and AWPA C4 as referenced in RUS Bull 1728F 700 Poles shall be branded by manufacturer with manufacturer s mark and date of treatment height and class of pole wood species preservation code and retention Place the brand so that the bottom of the brand or disc is 3050 mm 10 feet from the pole butt for poles up to 15250 mm 50 feet long and 4270 mm 14 feet from the butt for poles over 15250 mm 50 feet long Pad Fiberglass Poles ANSI C136 20 Designed specifically for supporting luminaires and having factory formed cable entrance and handhole Resin color shall bel dark b
32. The disconnecting means must be numbered to correspond to the identifying number of the driving machine that it controls 6 1 2 1 Ensure that each elevator disconnecting means has the following signs permanently attached a Permanent sign to identify the location of the supply side overcurrent protective device b WARNING PARTS OF THE CONTROLLER ARE NOT DE ENERGIZED BY THIS SWITCH 6 1 2 2 For all elevators with fire protection sprinklers in the elevator MR or top of hoistway provide a shunt trip circuit breaker in the elevator MR for each individual elevator main power and emergency power if provided Circuit breaker must be capable of being locked in the open position only Each shunt trip circuit breaker must be served by a dedicated breaker in the main distribution electrical panel Shunt trip breaker s must be designed to be operated both manually and by actuation of the sprinkler flow switch s designed to automatically open the power supply to the elevator Power must be restored manually 6 1 2 3 A sprinkler line flow switch must be provided according to the design requirements of Chapter 7 Fire Protection The flow switch must be equipped with an electrical circuit that will actuate the elevator main line shunt trip disconnect The sprinkler line flow switch 14 control circuit must be monitored for the presence of operation voltage Loss of voltage shall cause actuation of a supervisory signal and alarm at the building fire pr
33. and bridges gateways controllers workstations and field interface devices If applicable show connection to existing networks 1 5 S BMITTALS Submit detailed and annotated manufacturer s data dravings and specification sheets for each item listed that clearly shov compliance with the project specifications Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control Approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESO1 33 00 05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Include the following in the project s control system drawing set Control system drawings title sheet G List of I O Points G 0 ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 11 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T Control System Components List G Control system schematics G HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder diagrams G Component wiring diagrams G Terminal strip diagrams G BACnet communication architecture schematic G SD 03 Product Data Direct Digital Controllers G Include BACnet PICS for each controller device type including smart sensors B SS and smart actuators B SA BACnet Gateways G Include BACnet and workstatio
34. contract criteria Include the following SECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 10 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T a Location of each input and output device b Flow diagram for each piece of HVAC equipment c Name or symbol for each control system component such as V 1 for a valve d Setpoints with differential or proportional band values e Written sequence of operation for the HVAC equipment f Valve and Damper Schedules with normal power fail position 1 4 1 5 HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams Provide HVAC equipment electrical ladder diagrams Indicate required electrical interlocks 1 4 1 6 Component Wiring Diagrams Provide a wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device Indicate how each device is wired and powered showing typical connections at the digital controller and power supply Show for all field connected devices such as control relays motor starters actuators sensors and transmitters 1 4 1 7 Terminal Strip Diagrams Provide a diagram of each terminal strip Indicate the terminal strip location termination numbers and associated point names 1 4 1 8 BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic Provide a schematic showing the project s entire BACnet communication network including addressing used for LANs LAN devices including routers
35. inserts supports anchors guides sleeves and accessories System materials shall conform to manufacturer s requirements The piping from the manifold to hot water heaters will be copper 1 2 1 PEX AL PEX Piping Crosslinked Polyethylene Aluminum Crosslinked Polyethylene PEX AL PEX SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 8 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 piping used for collector array Piping and fittings shall conform to ASTM F 876 and ASTM F 877 Make all mechanical joints visible 2 1 2 2 Copper Tubing ASTM B 88 minimum Type L hard dravn copper tubing except that the connection tubes of collectors may be soft dravn Make all mechanical joints visible 2 1 2 3 Hangers and Supports MSS SP 58 as required by MSS SP 69 2 1 2 4 Unions CID A A 59617 solder joint 2 1 2 5 Strainers ASTM F 1199 removable basket and screen Y pattern cast bronze strainer vith pressures to 125 psig simplex type or a combination elbov strainer vith straightening vanes and strainer arranged for horizontal flov 2 1 2 6 Pressure Gauges ASME B40 100 Pressure gauges shall be provided with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve Minimum dial size shall be 3 1 2 inch 2 1 2 7 Thermostats The system shall include temperature gauges so that an observer can determine if the system is operating properly and is providing solar heated water 2 1 2 8 Dielectric Union Provide insulated
36. provided For packaged equipment the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 2 8 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS 2 8 1 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors walls and ceilings in exposed spaces Provide chromium plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces 2 8 2 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes entirely through walls ceilings roofs and floors 2 8 2 1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Provide schedule 40 steel or PVC plastic pipe sleeves Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core drilled hole are completely grouted smooth 2 8 2 2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves 2 8 3 Pipe Hangers Supports Provide MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 14 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 rods except as specified or indicated otherwise Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21 28 29 or 30 clamps A
37. temperature actual 2 Hot Water System supply temperature actual return temperature actual supply temperature set point 3 Air Handling Unit discharge air temperature set point return air temperature set point discharge air temperature actual return air temperature actual valve command position 4 VAV Box 10 percent of VAV s room temperature set point room temperature actual associated AHU discharge air temperature actual n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 43 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 r Verify each controller works properly in stand alone mode s Verify all safety controls and devices function properly including freeze protection and interfaces with building fire alarm systems t Verify all electrical interlocks work properly u Verify all workstations notebooks and maintenance personnel interfac tools are delivered all system and database software is installed and graphic pages are created for each device controlled by the DDC system v Verify the as built shop control drawings are completed w Verify all required alarms are identified at the EMCS server and proper notification is setup for each alarm condition 3 55 Conducting Performance Verification Testing a Provide trend report for each HVAC syst
38. the butt welds may be ultrasonically tested The report shall be similar to that of the radiographic exam i e examiner shall sign and date report defects and location shall be noted weld shall be graded acceptable or unacceptable etc Welded connections shall not be covered until the government selects 10 of the connections to be tested 5 26 09 Use externally pressurized bellows expansion joints when inline expansion in steam lines is required and where loops cannot be utilized Slip tube expansion joints are acceptable but not preferred over externally pressurized bellows joints Provide check valves and test valves at all steam condensate drip stations Base operating steam pressures are as follows 10 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Steam Plant Steam Pressure Plant 1700 150 psi 1034 kPa Plant AS4151 150 psi 1034 kPa Plant G650 100 psi 690 kPa Plant M625 100 psi 690 kPa Plant RR15 50 psi 345 kPa Plant PP2615 50 psi 345 kPa Plant M230 50 6 345 4 Plant 9 100 psi 690 kPa Plant NH100 100 psi 690 kPa Specify steam control valve actuators that can vvithstand heat conducted from steam lines and equipment Do not specify or approve hydraulic powered actuators in steam applications Install blow down valves on all strainers It is preferred to distribute hot water thru out building or building complex for heating in lieu of dire
39. 24 ER waiting rooms In 2 12 Yes 70 75 21 24 Procedure room Out 3 15 No 30 60 70 75 21 24 Laser eye room Out 3 15 No 30 60 70 75 21 24 X ray surgical critical care and catheterization Out 3 15 _ No 30 60 70 75 21 24 Anesthesia gas storage n 8 Yes _ _ SUPPORT AREAS Medication room Out _ 4 _ _ Clean workroom or ckan holding Out _ 4 _ _ _ _ Soiled workroom or soiled holding In _ 10 Yes No _ _ DIAGNOSTIC AND TREATMENT AREAS Examination room _ 6 _ 75 24 Treatme nt room _ _ 6 _ _ _ 75 24 Physical therapy and hydrotherapy In 6 75 24 Gastrointestinal endoscopy room 2 6 No 30 60 68 73 20 23 Endoscopic instrument processing In 10 Yes No _ _ Imagjng X ray diagnostic amp treatment 6 75 24 Darkroom n _ 10 Yes No Imaging waiting rooms In 2 12 Yes 15 70 75 21 24 Laboratory General 6 75 24 Biochemistry In 6 Yes No 75 24 Cytology n 6 Yes No 75 24 Glass washing In 10 Yes US EPA ENERGY STAR Professional Engineer s Guide 2009 27 Table 2 1 2 continued Ventilation Requirements for Areas Affecting Patient Care in Hospitals and Outpatient Facilities US EPA ENERGY STAR Airmovement Minimum Minimum All air relationship airchanges _totalair exhausted Redrculated Relative Design to adjacent of outdoor changes per directiyto by means of humidit temperature Area designation area air per hou hour
40. 3 2 Hoistway Pit GFCI Receptacles Provide a separate branch circuit supplying the hoistway pit lighting and a minimum of two duplex GFCI receptacles in the pit Locate one receptacle on each side wall of the hoistway at 54 mm above pit floor For hydraulic elevators provide one additional receptacle on the rear wall of the hoistway at a height of 3 above the pit floor for scavenger pump power 6 3 3 NEMA 4 Electrical Equipment All electrical equipment located less than 4 0 1219 mm above the pit floor shall be weatherproof NEMA4 and wiring shall be identified for use in wet locations in accordance with the requirements in NFPA 70 17 CHAPTER 7 FIRE PROTECTION Design and installation of the fire alarm and fire protection systems and components related to elevator function and control must be in accordance with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design must comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 7 1 Fire Alarm System 7 1 1 Fire Alarm Initiating Devices In accordance with the current NAVFAC Fire Protection UFC smoke detectors must be provided at the following locations for the actuation of elevator Firefighters Emergency Operation FEO a All elevator lobbies b All elevator machine rooms c Top of the elevator hoistway if sprinklers are provided at the top of the hoist
41. 380 degrees F d Fluid stability of ten years e Maximum acute oral toxicity of 5000 ppm SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 12 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 J 15 Control and Instrumentation Subsystem 221 5 T Solar Differential Control Equipment A differential controller will operate the solar circulator based on a difference in temperature between the roof collector and the bottom of the solar storage tank This temperature differential will be adjustable in the field This unit will be furnished by the manufacturer as part of the balance of system and include an Energy Monitoring System Differential temperature control equipment shall include a switching relay or solid state output device for pump control Thermostat shall operate in the on off mode Controller accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 degree F Controller shall be compatible with manufacturer supplied thermistor temperature sensors Differential control shall provide direct digital temperature readings of all temperatures sensed Control shall indicate visually when pumps are energized Control ambient operating range shall be indicated by solar thermal collector system manufacturer 2 1 15 2 Solar Energy Monitoring System The solar energy monitoring system consist of a large graphic display vith backlight that accommodates several languages temperature sensors variable speed pump control manual test mode easy to use interface with 1 GB S
42. 75 or higher across the 12 month period being assessed Does this SEP represent a single structure SEPs cannot be submitted for multiple building campuses with the exception of acute care or children s hospitals nor can they be submitted as representing only a portion of a building VERIFICATION QUESTIONS Does this square footage include all supporting functions such as kitchens and break rooms used by staff storage areas administrative areas elevators stairwells atria vent shafts etc Also note that existing atriums should only include the base floor area that it occupies Interstitial plenum space between floors should not be included in the total Finally gross floor area is not the same as leasable space Leasable space is a subset of gross floor area Is this the total number of hours per week that the Office space is 75 occupied This number should exclude hours when the facility is occupied only by maintenance security or other support personnel For facilities with a schedule that varies during the year operating hours week refers to the total weekly hours for the schedule most often followed Is this the number of employees present during the main shift Note this is not the total number of employees or visitors who are in a building during an entire 24 hour period For example if there are two daily 8 hour shifts of 100 workers each the Workers on Main Shift value is 100 The normal worker density ranges
43. Chapter 8 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition that corresponds to your connection type and to your type of supporting structural system Install transverse and longitudinal seismic braces at the intervals specified in the general requirements for ducts in Chapter 3 or the t ables for pipes in Chapters 5 6 or 7 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual e Seismic Bracing for HVAC Equipment As with the design of seismic bracing of pipe and duct the initial step to design restraints for HVAC equipment is to consult the appropriate code Here the same code references apply specifically Chapter 16 of the Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc BOCA National Building Code 1996 The BOCA Code provides a seismic force formula to determine the horizontal seismic static force acting at the center of gravity of HVAC equipment That formula takes the form of Fp Av Cc P Ac Wc where Av Figure 1610 1 3 1 Cc Figure 1610 6 4 1 P Figure 1610 6 4 1 requires determination of SHEG SHEG Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Table 1610 1 5 Ac Figure 1610 6 4 2 Once the seismic force Fp is determine d the seismic loads at the connection between the equipment and the building must be resolved Static load calculations will be required and examples showing how to compute the loads may be found in the ASHRAE Handbook HVAC Applications and the ASHRAE A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint Seismic re
44. Coordinate sensor types with the BAS Owner to keep them consistent with existing installations Z2 Z l Field Installed Temperature Sensors Where feasible provide the same sensor type throughout the project Avoid using transmitters unless absolutely necessary 2 2 1 1 Thermistors Precision thermistors may be used in applications belov 200 degrees F Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0 36 degree F or less betveen 32 to 150 degrees F Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0 25 degrees F cumulative A D conversion n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 22 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 T resolution error shall be kept to 0 1 degrees F Total error for a thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0 5 degrees F 2 2 1 2 Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Provide RTD sensors vith platinum elements compatible vith the digital controllers Encapsulate sensors in epoxy series 300 stainless steel anodized aluminum or copper Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0 1 percent 1 ohm of expected ohms 1000 ohms at 32 degrees F Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0 25 degrees F cumulative Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without transmitters is preferred When RTDs are connected directly lead resistance error shall be les
45. DDC systems Orient training to the specific systems installed Coordinate training times with the Contracting Officer and BAS Owner after receiving approval of the training course documentation Training shall n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 46 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T take place at the job site and or a nearby Government furnished location A training day shall occur during normal working hours last no longer than 8 hours and include a one hour break for lunch and two additional 15 minute breaks The project s approved Controls System Operators Manual shall be used as the training text The Contractor shall ensure the manuals are submitted approved and available to hand out to the trainees before th start of training 3216 1 Training Documentation Submit training documentation for review 30 days minimum before training Documentation shall include an agenda for each training day objectives a synopses of each lesson and the instructor s background and qualifications The training documentation can be submitted at the same time as the project s Controls System Operators Manual 3 6 2 Phase I Training Fundamentals The Phase I training session shall last one day and be conducted in a classroom environment with complete audio visual aids provided by the contractor Provide each tr
46. DESCRIPTION Provide new BACnetand merge with existing BACnet DDC systems including associated equipment and accessories DDC control panel shall be placeq in Mechanical Room G178 The existing DDC system is manufactured by Johnson Controls Metasys in the original HM2 Charles Luke Milam Aid Station building mechanical room room G 119 Provide a networked DDC system for stand alone control in compliance with the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard Include all programming objects and service required to meet the sequence of control Provide BACnet communication between the DDC system and the native BACnet devices furnished with HVAC equipment and plant equipment including boilers chillers and variable frequency drives Devices provided shall be BACnet Testing Laboratories BTL product listing certified Interface the new DDC system with Camp Lejeunes existing EMCS Provide a Supervisory Building Controller SBC that shall communicate with the field DDC controllers via the MS TP bus using BACnet and with the EMCS via the Marine Air Ground Task Force Regional Area Network MRAM Ethernet network using TCP IP Provide interface with the existing EMCS including graphic creation n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 9 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T
47. Division of Water Quality has a web site that gives the Classification and index numbers of streams http h2o enr state nc us bims reports reportsVV B html To identify which section of the waterbody the project site drains to it helps to sort the waterbodies hydrologically instead of alphabetically 4 New projects that increase the amount of built upon area BUA within the project area are considered to be either a high density project or a low density project High density projects are those projects that drain to surface waters classified as non SA and have over 24 BUA or projects that are within 2 mile of and drain to waters classified as SA and have over 12 BUA All stormwater runoff from high density projects must be treated using an engineered stormwater treatment measure BMP designed to remove at least 85 of total suspended solids 5 At Camp Lejeune a permit boundary must be established in order to determine density That permit boundary must be identified on the plans and include bearing and distances Note since the base is thousands of acres in size property lines are not used for the purpose of determining density 6 Detailed guidance for designing BMPs can be found on the extremely useful Division of Water Quality BMP web site http h2o enr state nc us su bmp forms htm The BMP manual includes the requirements from Section 1008 of the Stormwater Rules in the Major Design Elements table provided in the individual BM
48. Guide to the ENERGY STAR Label for Buildings is intended to assist the PE community in understanding the requirements of the Statement of Energy Performance the Data Checklist and the expectations and limitations of the PE s role in the ENERGY STAR labeling process Each module covers a single topic and contains a purpose background expectations hints and tips and questions and answers Where needed industry standards are referenced and detailed tables are provided to illustrate the relevant standard requirements However this document is not intended to take the place of the referenced standards the PE should refer to the standards for more complete information about standard requirements EPA is committed to continually improving the content of this document and welcomes all comments that may help us do so All applicable contact information is provided in Appendix A EPA thanks you for choosing to take part in the ENERGY STAR labeling process We hope you find this experience professionally rewarding and are able to forge new or expand existing business relationships In so doing you can be assured that you are helping to mitigate society s impact on the environment and climate change 2 For additional guidance on indoor air quality outside the scope of this document please visit EPA s Indoor Environments Division IED website http Awww epa gov iaq i Table of Contents 1116 sssr s du ii Mo
49. LAKES IL NAVFAC EFA NORTHEAST PHILADELPHIA PA NAVFAC EFA NORTHWEST POULSBO WA ENGFLDACT WEST PWC GUAM PWC JACKSONVILLE NAVFAC MIDLANT NORFOLK VA PWC PENSACOLA PWC SAN DIEGO PWC YOKOSUKA 01 March 2005 NAVFAC HUMID AREA HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA 1 1 Purpose This guide provides design criteria for preventing mold inside Navy facilities 1 2 Humidity Control Basics Successful control of humidity within Naval facilities in order to prevent mold requires the efforts of the several entities involved in the life cycle of the facility The User must Define the purpose of the project The Architect must Design a tight building The HVAC designer must Control the outdoor air The Contractor must Build low leakage building and tight duct work And the Building Operations Staff must Maintain correct internal air pressure Only then may the building meet the needs throughout the life cycle at minimum life cycle costs The quotes courtesy of ASHRAE Humidity Control Design Guide for Commercial and Institutional Buildings Chapter 2 see paragraph 3 1 4 below 2 1 Application This guide applies to new or renovated Navy facility projects that start design 90 days after the effective date of the ITG Projects currently under design shall be revised to comply where schedule and funds permit 3 1 Referenced Publications 3 1 2 Unified Facilities Criteria UFC e UFC 3 400 02 Design Engineering Weather Data e
50. LL Page 2 of3 ENERGY STAR Data Checklist for Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Power Generation Plant or Distribution Utility Duke Energy Carolinas LLC Fuel Type Electricity Meter Meter A kWh Space s Entire Facility Start Date End Date Energy Use kWh 07 01 2008 07 31 2008 12 034 00 06 01 2008 06 30 2008 11 500 00 05 01 2008 05 31 2008 11 000 00 04 01 2008 04 30 2008 11 600 00 03 01 2008 03 31 2008 11 970 00 02 01 2008 02 29 2008 11 800 00 01 01 2008 01 31 2008 11 752 00 12 01 2007 12 31 2007 12 003 00 11 01 2007 11 30 2007 11 702 00 10 01 2007 10 31 2007 11 800 00 09 01 2007 09 30 2007 12 054 00 08 01 2007 08 31 2007 11 023 00 Meter A Consumption kWh 140 238 00 Meter A Consumption kBtu 478 492 06 Total Electricity Consumption kBtu 478 492 06 Is this the total Electricity consumption at this building including all Electricity meters Additional Fuels Do the fuel consumption totals shown above represent the total energy use of this building Please confirm there are no additional fuels district energy generator fuel oil used in this facility Certifying Professional When applying for the ENERGY STAR this must be the same PE that signed and stamped the SEP Name Date Signature Signature is required when applying for the ENERGY STAR 23 Page 3 of 3 Appendix E List of Building Type Definitions Bank Financial Institution Bank Financial Institution applies to facility spac
51. Mr Scott Houldsworth Energy Program Manager Facilities Branch HQMC LFF 703 695 6158 x3252 DSN 225 For NAVFAC Energy and Sustainability Policy and Guidance Mr Scott Mauro P E NAVFAC HQ CI Chief Engineer s Office 202 685 9280 DSN 325 This document has been reviewed by Headquarters U S Marine Corps and is fully and immediately applicable to all USMC installations Engineer and Director Capital Improvements 2 of 2 Issue No 2010 05 8 July 2010 Type Policy a sr Design Guidance Instructions for filling out DD1391 Criteria and Best Management Practices for Roof Top Solar Thermal Photovoltaic and other Energy Saving Features A Solar thermal hot water systems where appropriate shall be the first priority Reference c establishes a minimum of 30 of the hot water demand in new buildings be met using solar hot water provided it is life cycle cost effective Solar thermal systems will be designed in accordance with UFC 3 440 04N Solar Heating of Buildings and Domestic Hot Water B Rack Mounted Photovoltaic Systems Maximize the generation of renewable electricity through available photovoltaic technology The following is provided as integration guidance Use a rack mounting system designed to allow ease of access for roof maintenance and repair personnel Install systems with a southern orientation to the maximum extent practicable Install flash penetrations
52. Officer Prominently label the cabinet VFD OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Clearly label each manual with the wording MECHANICAL ROOM COPY DO NOT REMOVE c Technical Support Provide the VFDs with manufacturer s technical telephone support in English readily available during normal working hours and free of charge for the life of the equipment d Initial Start Up Provide the VFDs with factory trained personnel for the on site start up of the HVAC equipment and associated VFD The personnel shall be competent in the complete start up operation and repair of the particular model VFD installed The factory start up representative shall perform the factory s complete recommended start up procedures and check out tests on the VFD Include a copy of the start up test documentation with the VFD on site service manuals e Provide the VFDs with on site hands on training for the user and maintenance personnel Provide a capable and qualified instructor with minimum two years field experience with the operation and maintenance of similar VFDs The training shall occur during normal working hours and last not less than 2 hours Coordinate the training time with the Contracting Officer and the end user The VFD service manuals shall be used during the training The contractor shall ensure the manuals are on site before the start of training The training shall cover all operational
53. PENTAGON WASHINGTON D C 20350 1000 KOV 6 2007 MEMORANDUM FOR DEPUTY CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS FLEET READINESS AND LOGISTICS DEPUTY COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS INSTALLATIONS AND LOGISTICS SUBJECT Department of the Navy Low Impact Development LID Policy for Storm Water Management References a 33 United States Code 1251 Clean Water Act b Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations 122 130 c Department of Defense Unified Facilities Criteria 3 210 10 Design for Low Impact Development October 2004 d Executive Order 13423 Strengthening Federal Environmental Energy and Transportation Management January 2007 e OPNAVINST 5090 1C Clean Water Ashore Requirement October 2007 f MCO P5090 2A Water Quality Management July 1998 BRAC 05 implementation Department of Defense DoD Grow the Force Initiatives and ongoing installation sustainment and modernization have resulted in significant construction activity on Department of the Navy DON installations New construction results in loss of natural vegetation cover and drainage capacity and increased storm water runoff Conventional storm water collection and conveyance systems and storm water treatment options do not and can not replicate natural systems thus increasing the volume and flow of storm water as well as sediment and nutrient loadings to streams wetlands and other receiving water bodies Because of continuing water quality problems States and the U
54. Provide all programming programming softvare tools and programming hardware tools to configure and program all controllers If the laptop computer provided elsewhere is used as a programming tool provide all necessary accessories for full functionality All software shall be licensed to Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune Complex for unrestricted use on Camp Lejeune Complex and reproduction for use on Camp Lejeune Complex Software keys and dongles are not permitted Provide sequence of operation routines in simple easy to follow logic with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to the project s written sequence of operation a Graphic based programming shall use a library of function blocks made from pre programmed code designed for BAS control Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnecting lines depicting the control sequence ina flowchart If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the project graphic programs shall be viewable in real time showing present values and logical results from each function block b Menu based programming shall be done by entering parameters definitions conditions requirements and constraints c For line by line and text based programming declare variable types local global real integer etc at the beginning of the program Use descriptive comments frequently to describe the programming d If prov
55. STAR Label The A E shall obtain an Energy Star labeled design for each facility What it means A 90 rating means this in the top 10 of all similar facilities having energy saving features National Recognition with a DOE posting A building with an Energy Star Label Requires all equipment and systems to have the Energy Star Label Design shall be an Energy Start Label design Requires 12 months of energy monitoring Using Enhanced LEED Commissioning for 12 months the contractor CA and A E shall monitor the building to make sure it keeps on the Energy Target If the building is off Target the Contractor A E and the CA shall resolve issues to bring the facility back on Target o o 4 ASHRAE 90 1 2007 Incorporate the latest ASHRAE 90 1 standard Why The project scope may have been previously defined to meet ASHRAE 90 1 2004 The new standard raises the energy savings requirement Design the facility to have energy usage of 40 less than ASHRAE 90 1 2007 This is the current requirement that NAVFAC MIDLANT is incorporating on current design projects The 30 standard was changed to 40 Provide facility envelope improvements interior and exterior lighting improvements HVAC system and equipment efficiency improvements building control system improvements and other energy saving improvements to reduce annual energy consumption to 40 minimum below ASHRAE 90 1 2007 The 40 shall be calculated using the
56. Shedding 12 User Defined 13 User Defined 14 User Defined 15 User Defined 16 User Defined Alarming 1 Alarm Priorities Coordinate alarm and event notification with the BAS Owner 2 Notification Class Enable writeable Priority Ack Required and Recipient List properties of Notification Class objects 3 Event Notification Message Texts Use condition specific narrative text and numerical references for alarm and event notification Updating Displayed Property Values Allow workstations to display property values at discrete polled intervals or based on receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services and polled intervals shall be adjustable at the operator workstation n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 36 ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T 1 24 Local Area Networks Obtain Government approval before connecting new networks with existing networks Network numbers and device instance numbers shall remain unique when joining networks Do not change existing network addressing without Government approval See also BACnet Naming and Addressing 3 L 5 BACnet Routers Bridges and Switches Provide
57. a designation of A B or C that combines s everal building codes seismic zones and other factors into a single system for determining appropriate restraints SHL s are established by prescribed limits of resistive force as a percentage of weight of the ducts and pipes and correlate to the percent horizontal seismic factors F determined by building code formulas The prescribed limits for the SHL s are with A being the most stringent and C the least e Most stringent covers buildings most vulnerable due to the strength of seismic events The bracing for SHL A is designed to resist 48 of the weight of the ducts or pipes If F is 48 then use SHL A If F is gt 48 the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition cannot be used e The bracing for SHL B is designed to resist 30 of th e weight of the ducts or pipes If F is 30 then use SHL B e Least stringent covers buildings least vulnerable due to the strength of seismic events The bracing for SHL C is designed to resist 15 of the weight of the ducts or pipes If F is 15 then use SHL C Determination of the SHL for a specific project is fundamental and indeed the first step in the use of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition The bracing detailed in the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition provides for the additional members needed to resist horizontal forces in pipe and duct systems It does not
58. access controls are not acceptable 8 1 2 1 6 The elevator controller manufacturer must provide a technical support phone service with live technical support available during standard working hours The service must be accessible to any licensed elevator contractor at an industry competitive price The hot line must provide technical support for installation adjustment maintenance and troubleshooting of the elevator controller and elevator components 8 1 2 2 The controller must be designed to automatically reestablish normal elevator operation upon any temporary loss of power regardless of duration 8 1 3 Elevator Motor Drive 8 1 3 1 For all elevators electrical output from the elevator drive and controller must limit Total Harmonic Distortion to a maximum of 5 No single harmonic may exceed 3 8 1 3 2 All gearless traction elevators must be equipped with regenerative motor drive units 21 8 1 3 3 Electrical supply wiring between the elevator controller and the elevator drive motor must be run in a dedicated conduit that is separate from elevator control wiring i e encoder and tachometer wiring 8 1 3 Machine Room Sound Level The acoustic output of any equipment in elevator machine room must not exceed 80 dBA measured at any point in the elevator machine room 8 1 4 Machine Room Cabinet For storage of O amp M Documentation and Wiring Diagrams a locking metal cabinet must be provided and secured to the wall of the MR Cabine
59. all penetrations of the air seal barrier If any unavoidable penetrations of the air barrier by electrical boxes plumbing fixture boxes and other assemblies are not airtight make them airtight by sealing the assembly and the interface between the assembly and the air barrier or by extending the air barrier over the assembly The air seal barrier must be durable to last the anticipated service life of the assembly 4 Do not install lighting fixtures with ventilation holes through the air barrier 5 Provide a motorized damper in the closed position and connected to the fire alarm system to open on call and fail in the open position for any fixed open louvers such as at elevator shafts 6 Damper and control to close all ventilation or make up air intakes and exhausts atrium smoke exhausts and intakes etc when leakage can occur during inactive periods 7 Compartmentalize garages under buildings by providing airtight vestibules at building access points 8 Compartmentalize spaces under negative pressure such as boiler mechanical rooms and provide make up air for combustion PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND SUBSTANTIATION Submit the qualifications and experience of the testing entity for approval Demonstrate performance of the continuous air barrier for the opaque building envelope by the following tests A Test the completed building and demonstrate that the air leakage rate of the building envelope does not exceed 0 25 CFM SF at a pre
60. and because outdoor air brought into the building may be unacceptable or may not be adequately cleaned Furthermore the standard does not prescribe specific ventilation rate requirements for spaces that contain smoking or that do not meet the requirements in the standard for separation from spaces that contain smoking The standard describes two different compliance paths one based on ventilation rates Ventilation Rate Procedure and the other based on analysis of contaminant sources IAQ Procedure Most designers use the ventilation rate procedure The standard includes additional requirements related to certain sources including outdoor air construction processes moisture and biological growth regardless of which compliance path is selected for determining minimum ventilation rates Given proper measurements and observations the PE is expected to give a professional opinion about the capability of the building to supply adequate ventilation rates for the maintenance of acceptable indoor air quality Ultimately it is the responsibility of the PE to determine based on his her professional opinion whether the building meets the letter and spirit of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 considering all measured data and observations at the time of the site visit 6 4 Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and Ventilation Rates As mentioned above ASHRAE Standard 62 1 provides details on two ventilation system design paths Section 1 1 1 of ANSI ASHRAE Sta
61. and equipment access and therefore stairways shall be provided to roof top equipment Avoid HVAC systems that modulate cooling supply air temperatures unless outside air is separately conditioned Avoid use of chilled water fan coil FCU systems due the high maintenance associated with them Coil condensate drain pans are especially problematic If FCU s are used ensure adequacy of the drain system 10 11 12 13 14 15 Provide aluminum fins on copper tubes vvith coating that passes the ASTM B117 90 3000 hour salt spray resistance test for all outdoor coils larger than 10 tons The heat transfer rating of phenolic coated coils should be as installed ie after coating Air cooled chillers are preferred to water cooled equipment for individual equipment smaller than 150 tons Camp Lejeune weather is mild and humid which only gives slight efficiency advantage to water cooled equipment Larger plants such as multiple 400 ton chillers should be water cooled The efficiency advantage overcomes the additional maintenance of cooling towers Do not use steam absorption chillers Helical screw compressors are desirable Reciprocating and scroll compressors are acceptable Where applicable on large installations centrifugal equipment is acceptable greater than 150 tons Oiless centrifugal is acceptable for water cooled applications 1 25 10 Provide adequate thermal mass in chilled water systems to ensure proper contr
62. and reservoir must be anchored to the pit floor 8 5 6 In Ground Hydraulic Cylinder Protection The exterior surface of in ground hydraulic eylinders must be factory finished vvith a minimum 50 mils coating of either Applied Extruded Coating or Epoxy Resin 8 5 6 1 In Ground Hydraulic Cylinder Well Casing A dry plumb steel well casing must be provided for every in ground cylinder assembly The well casing must be located according to the elevator manufacturer s design The well casing must have a minimum 6 mm 1 4 wall and a welded 10 mm 1 2 steel bottom 8 5 6 2 In Ground Hydraulic Cylinder PVC or HDPE Liner A Schedule 40 PVC or HDPE hydraulic cylinder liner must be provided for corrosion protection of the hydraulic cylinder and for containment of hydraulic fluid in the event of cylinder failure The liner design and installation must comply with the following criteria a The liner must be sealed to the cylinder mounting flange The connection of the liner to the cylinder must be designed to support the combined weight of the liner and any accumulated hydraulic fluid to the full capacity of the installed liner b A 19 mm 1 4 copper evacuation tube must be installed inside the liner from the bottom of the liner to the cylinder mounting plate The evacuation tube must be run through the cylinder mounting plate and extend a minimum of 6 above the plate The evacuation tube must be fitted with a plastic dust cap c A metal pres
63. and where required for the proper functioning of the system Valves shall be installed with their stems horizontal or above Ball valves shall be installed in flow and return in combination with check valves to prevent gravity and thermo circulation Safety relief valves will be used to prevent over pressure 3 2 3 7 Foundations Concrete foundations or pads for storage tanks heat exchangers pumps and other equipment covered by this specification shall be constructed in accordance vith manufacturer s recommendations and be a minimum of 6 inches high vith chamfered edges 3 2 4 Control Subsystem 3 2 4 1 Differential Temperature Controller Automatic control equipment shall be installed at the location shovn in accordance vith the solar energy collecting system manufacturer instructions Control wiring and sensor wiring shall be installed in conduit Unless otherwise indicated operators controllers sensors indicators and like devices when installed on equipment casings and pipe lines shall be provided with stand off mounting brackets bases nipples adapters or extended tubes to provide clearance not less than the thickness of the insulation between the surface and the device These stand off mounting items shall be integral with the devices or standard accessories of the controls manufacturer unless otherwise approved Clamp on devices or instruments where direct contact with pipe surface is required shall be exempted from the use of t
64. applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer Replace damaged or defective items SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 7 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 1 5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Unless otherwise required herein all work shall be in accordance with Icc IPC Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109 58 and ASHRAE 90 1 IP In addition energy consuming equipment shall have the Energy Star label 1 6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work verify dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work 1 7 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL When specified in other sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance including pertinent safety requirements of the specified equipment or system Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction sh
65. are available on the Whole Building Design Guide Any editing of non bracketed paragraphs within the specification must be specifically approved by the responsible NAVFAC Elevator Program FEC LCO 2 4 3 Design Coordination and Support Coordinate project RFP elevator requirements with the NAVFAC FEC VTE Lead Certifying Official A contact listing of NAVFAC VTE Program Managers and Lead Certifying Officials is provided as Appendix B 2 4 4 NAVFAC VTE Program Design Comments or Questions For elevator design questions and comments contact the NAVFAC Elevator Program Manager Deputy Program Manager or the NAVFAC FEC Lead Certifying Official for your geographic area 2 5 Application of Elevator Types to Facility Design This section identifies and describes the types of elevators that may be installed in Navy Facilities and the application of each type to the size and function of the facility This section also identifies speed and travel requirements for each type and application 2 5 1 Hydraulic Elevators Hydraulic elevators may be used for low rise facilities of 2 to 4 stories Direct plunger hydraulic elevator design must be used for hydraulic elevators in Navy Facilities EXCEPTION In the event of compelling design conditions approval for use of a roped hydraulic elevator design may be requested on an individual project by submission of a written Request for Approval to the NAVFAC VTE Program FEC Lead Certifying Official Telescopic pl
66. at each end of the duct run with a minimum of one brace at each end Longitudinal bracing must occur at the interval specified in tables in Chapters 5 6 and 7 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition with at least one brace per duct run Transverse bracing for one du ct section may also act a s a longitudinal brace for a duct section at 90 turns if the bracing is installed within two times the duct width of the intersection of both ducts and the bracing is sized for the larger duct see Figure 4 1 Chapter 4 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selec ted Example To brace a 760 mm x 760 mm 30 x30 duct adjacent to a 1370 mm x 710 mm 54 x28 duct select bracing for an 2134 mm x 1067mm 84 x42 duct The horizontal dimension of the 2134 mm x 1067 mm 84 x42 duct is equal to that of the combined ducts and its weight is greater than their combined weights Walls including gypsum board non load bearing partitions that have ducts running through them may replace a typical transverse brace Provide solid blocking around duct penetrations at all stud wall construction Unbraced ducts must be installed with a 150 mm 6 minimum clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires Pipe Bracing
67. between 0 3 and 10 workers per 1000 square feet 92 8 square meters Is this the number of personal computers in the Office s this the percentage of the total floor space within the facility that is served by mechanical cooling equipment Is this the percentage of the total floor space within the facility that is served by mechanical heating equipment 21 NOTES NOTES D L L L L R R 2 Page 1 of 3 CRITERION Gross Floor Area Enclosed Floor Area Non Enclosed Floor Area w roof Open Floor Area w o roof Weekly Hours of Access VALUE AS ENTERED IN PORTFOLIO MANAGER 12 321 Sq Ft 0 Sq Ft 0 Sq Ft 12 321 Sq Ft 168 Hours VERIFICATION QUESTIONS NOTES Is this the total square footage of the entire parking area enclosed nonenclosed open floor area Is this the total square footage of the enclosed garage space An enclosed garage is defined as having both sides and a roof Is this the total square footage of the nonenclosed garage space This is typically defined as the portion of the garage above ground contains no sides but is under a roof Is this the total square footage of the nonenclosed parking area without a roof This is typically defined as open parking lots or the very top level of an above ground parking garage Is this the total number of hours per week when it is possible for a vehicle to enter or exit 22 R L
68. boilers are better able to match the current load with boiler capacity and cycle on and off less frequently Utilize controls to stage the boilers on as required to match the load Utilize boilers with powered or forced draft burners instead of atmospheric burners Consider re circulating flue gases for optimal combustion with minimal excess air Utilize electronic control systems that monitor flue gas components and adjust fuel and air as needed Provide greatly improved turndown ratios to improve efficiency at less than peak load Review flue gas temperatures may require stainless steel flues 27 Provide Renewable sources Provide Photovoltaic power See CNRMA Energy Instruction for minimum requirements Provide Solar Hot Water Heating See item 15 on EISA 2007 above Get half the power at Navy shore installations from alternative energy sources including wind or solar by 2020 and where possible supply energy back to the grid 28 Provide high efficiency motors 29 Consider ultra high efficiency motors These motors have very high efficiency with power unloading very close to the centrifugal blower s power and speed cubic relationship lowering operating costs significantly at reduced speeds These motors are called Electronically Commutated Motors ECM and are DC motors with a permanent magnet rotor and ball bearings and an internal microcontroller 30 Provide digital ballast for light fixtures 7 of 8 31 Ensure the project
69. bulb temperature at a constant humidity ratio 5 1 2 Latent Cooling Load The portion of the cooling load attributed to a change in the humidity ratio at a constant dry bulb temperature 5 1 3 Humidity Ratio The ratio of the mass of vvater vapor to the mass of dry air contained in a given moist air sample 5 1 4 Humid Area HA Geographic location where UFC 3 400 02 Data Table Page 1 of 18 Other Site Data entry titled Ventilation Cooling Load Index indicates the annual latent cooling load Ton hr cfm yr of outside ventilation air equals or exceeds three times the outside ventilation sensible cooling load AND the monthly latent load exceeds the monthly sensible load as evaluated by inspection of the graph Page 14 of 18 titled Average Ventilation and Infiltration Loads for two or more consecutive months of the year 6 1 Requirements 6 1 1 Introduction Navy facilities have experienced damage from moisture and or mold especially in locations within humid areas The high ambient moisture and temperature common in high humidity areas reverses vapor flow through building components and increases the latent cooling load on HVAC equipment when compared to the design conditions for most other continental United States locations These unique conditions require design criteria differing from the conventional wisdom used in other areas 6 1 2 Site Drainage Grade slope building sites to drain away from buildings 6 1 3 B
70. concentration limit and corresponding exposure period should be specified Section 6 1 2 of ASHRAE Standards 62 1 outlines what design approaches can be used to determine or validate the acceptability of minimum space and system outdoor airflow rates and other relevant design parameters Other specifics on the IAQ Procedure can be referenced in Section 6 3 of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Furthermore guidelines for contaminant concentrations can be found in Appendix B of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Sample calculations for determining the required outdoor air supply rates can be found in the 62 1 User s Manual ASHRAE For healthcare facilities using the AIA 2006 Guideline in place of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 see Appendix F for outdoor air supply rates of various healthcare space functions Additionally the PE should document any spaces failing to meet the following criteria Microbiological Sources The building should be free of visible signs of microbiological sources such as mold and mildew Water Intrusion Water intrusion or accumulation in ventilation system components such as ducts plenums and air handlers should be investigated and rectified 6 5 Hints amp Tips Reviewing the most current written preventative maintenance plan can provide useful insight about the level of concern placed upon the control of indoor air pollutants A well written preventive maintenance plan should document the procedures used in the building to monitor insp
71. conformity with the design intent UFGS 15950N will be used to develop the contract requirements for TAB 8 1 Point of Contact Recommendations for improvements to this ITG are encouraged and should be furnished to Commander Naval Facilities Atlantic Engineering and Criteria Office Code CD 6506 Hampton Blvd Norfolk Virginia 23508 1278 Attn Mr Thomas J Harris Or contact Mr Harris at DSN 262 4206 757 322 4206 Fax 757 322 4416 Or email to thomas j harris navy mil 10 of 14 Enclosure 1 BACHELOR HOUSING 1 1E Apt Example Design Space Conditions 76 Fdb 50 RH 56 Fdpt 67 grHR Design values underlined Occupancy 2 2 persons per UFC 4 721 10 Chap 4 6 and 10 33 Minimum Outside Air 4 persons X 15 CFM person 60 CFM per ASHRAE STD 62 Exhaust Air EA Reqmts Bathroom 20 CFM continuous per ASHRAE Fund C26 Table 3 Or Bathroom 50 CFM intermittent per ASHRAE Fund C26 Table 4 And Clothes Dryer 150 CFM intermittent per ASHRAE Fund C26 18 Ventilation Air Supply VAS greater of Minimum Outside Air for occupants 60 CFM Or 115 of Exhaust Air 20 CFM X 115 23 CFM per UFC 4 721 10 Chap 6 4 5 Or 115 of Exhaust Air 50 CFM X 115 57 5 CFM per UFC 4 721 10 Chap 6 4 5 Choose VAS 60 CFM and Continuous Bathroom Exhaust 20 CFM This leaves 40 CFM available for pressurization to reduce infiltration and to dissipate during 23 hours per day of exfiltration the moisture infiltr
72. cover seismic restraints for equipment All in line equipment must be braced independently of all the ducts or pipes and in conformance vvith all applicable buildi ng codes Additionally SMACNA does not consider forces due to thermal expansion seismic bracing referenced here is not intended to handle forces imposed by thermal expansion Steps in the Use of SMACNA Sizing Tables Step 1 Determine the Seismic Hazard Level SHL The determination of the SHL requires familiarity with the earthquake design portion of the building codes and shall not be left up to a contactor to establish the design engineer must specify the SHL in the contract documents The SHL for each Seismic Hazard Exposure Group see Table 1610 1 5 National Building Code 1996 Chapter 16 within a specific geographic location in the LANTNAVFACENGCOM jurisdiction are presented in Table 1 entitled SHL Factors Table 1 Seismic Hazard Level SHL Factors Seismic Seismic Hazard Level Geographic Hazard SHL Exposure Duct Gas amp Location Group amp Non Hazardous SHEG Hazardous Pipe Note 1 Pipe Tidewater Virginia MCAS Cherry Point MCB Camp Lejeune MCAS New River Sugar Grove WVA B B B B B B B B B Puerto Rico Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 p C C C C C C C C C C C B C C B C B A C C B C B A Notes 1 See Table 1610 1 5 the BOCA Natio
73. densities Optimize the lighting power densities Must exceed ASHRAE 90 1 2007 requirements Provide daylighting strategy 19 Demand Control Ventilation Provide Demand Control Ventilation utilizing either CO2 or infrared room sensors If room infrared sensors are used they can reduce the outside air demand to rooms when rooms are unoccupied With demand control ventilation utilize variable speed controls on outside air fan exhaust air fan and heat wheel to vary outside air in accordance to demand and still meet ASHRAE 62 requirements 20 Ventilation Provide ventilation that meets ASHRAE 62 Calculate the ventilation effectiveness Strive for 100 effectiveness by requiring ducted exhaust from each room 20 Room Sensor Along with demand control ventilation consider utilizing a room sensor that will engage the room lights room power exhaust increase the room supply from minimum HVAC etc The room sensor can be infrared 21 Room Card Reader System In lieu of a room sensor consider a room card or CAC card for use rooms such as quarters As ina BEQ or BOQ when the occupant is in the room the room energy 6 of 8 systems vvould be engage by the card reader system VVhen the occupant leaves the quarters the room energy would be reduced to a minimum value when the card is removed 22 UFC 3 400 01 Energy Conservation Use the latest edition Except utilize 40 less than ASHRAE 90 1 2007 23 Duct Seal Class Increase the duc
74. detector vith an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct and an integral perforated sampling tube extending across the vidth of the duct The n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 29 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 2 detector housing shall have indicator lamps that light vhen the detector is powered and when the detector is activated Each detector shall have an integral test port and test switch Connect new detectors to the building s existing fire alarm control panel Provide control and power modules required for the operation of the detectors in their own new control unit or integral with the existing fire alarm panel A ground fault break or open condition in the electrical circuitry to any detector or its control or power unit shall cause activation of a trouble signal at the building fire alarm panel Electrical supervision of wiring used exclusively for air handling unit shutdown is not required provided a break in the wiring would cause shutdown of the associated unit Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable in all respects with and shall in no way impair the reliability or operational functions of the existing fire alarm system The building s existing fire alarm control panel was manufactured by Johnson Controls Provide descripti
75. ductless split systems for conference rooms Consider the use of Package Terminal Heat Pumps for high internal heat spaces such as server rooms The use of ceiling return air plenums is discouraged and shall not be used in new construction 2 10 10 GAS PIPING 44 When installing LP or natural gas fired equipment if the total load is less 1 2 million btu input specify multiple boilers water heaters that each have an input of less than 400 000 btu hr At 400 000 btu hr input the boiler or water heater becomes a utility boiler that entails increased surveillance inspection and maintenance Under 400 000 btu hr input the equipment is simply a heating appliance with no maintenance requirements 45 46 47 48 The design for LP gas tanks shall be as follovvs a i ii iii iv V V1 b c d construction contractor to provide 6 thick concrete slab 6 x8 for 500 gallon tank 6 x16 for 1000 gallon tank 6 10 9 Underground gas line to stub up through oversized sleeve in slab 3 from edge 1 stage regulator Protective bollards 7 long 4 schedule 40 galvanized steel concrete filled 3 bury with concrete encased paint bright yellow black with 4 stripes Make tank hook up Purchase at construction contractor s expense LP gas for start up and construction period Camp Lejeune will arrange rental including placement but not hook up of the tank Camp Lejeune will cont
76. during the cooling season if required Provide a separate and dedicated 100 outdoor air conditioning system feeding neutral air to each individual zone space using GSHP hot water heating pre heat and reheat using hot water and energy recovery from exhaust air using total enthalpy heat wheel d Water Source Heat Pumps WSHPs Closed circuit cooling tower s with condenser water loop serving water source heat pumps WSHP located throughout the facility Supplemental heating to condenser loop will be from the available energy supply using hot water Dedicated 100 outdoor air conditioning system feeding neutral air to the individual WSHP units using direct expansion DX cooling hot water heating and energy recovery from exhaust air using total enthalpy heat wheel Hot water heating will be from the available energy supply Ground source heat pumps and associated systems shall meet Unified Facilities Guide Specifications UFGS Section 23 81 47 WATER LOOP AND GROUND LOOP HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS The geothermal well field and GSHP systems is suggested to be designed 15 oversized using software specifically designed to simulate this system type The contractor shall follow the requirements of UFGC specification UFGS 23 81 47 Water Loop and Ground Loop Heat Pump Systems for geothermal well field and the ground source heat pump system The contractor shall perform tests at the site to evaluate the conductivity and performance of the soil for geothermal
77. government acceptance nl POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for piping identification codes and diagrams of solar thermal system and diagrams of the photovoltaic power system including operating instructions control matrix and trouble shooting instructions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTING SYSTEM Provide the necessary materials to fabricate solar thermal collecting system in accordance vith this section This specification is vritten vith the Davn Solar Thermal Collection System Model 3004L as manufactured by Dawn Solar Systems Inc as the basis of acceptable performance Provide factory prefabricated solar thermal equipment packages which include heat exchanger storage tanks pumps and controls and which meet the requirements of this section The solar thermal collecting system shall be valved to provide for shut off from the service water supply without interrupting normal cold water service to the facility 220 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment vhich are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is in the opinion of the Contracting Officer reasonably convenient to the site 122 Piping System Piping system shall be complete vith pipe pipe fittings valves hangers
78. heat exchange The contractor shall determine the general geothermal well field size and location that best meet the site requirements and shall come up with their own estimates of well field size for the purpose of bidding The well field shall fit within the site and not impede on adjacent sites or future development planned for those sites As a minimum the ground source heat pump well shall meet the local and state well requirements and shall be fully permitted Each well shall have its own Local and or State well permit as required Each well shall be full grout from top to bottom in accordance with local and or State requirements and the well depth shall be of a depth that is no deeper than allowed by State regulation for example 150 feet or less in North Carolina depending on the local and State well requirements Verify depth with the local and State requirements Each well shall have a minimum thermal diameter influence of 20 feet meaning the well spacing between wells shall be a minimum of 20 feet Each well shall not exceed one ton of cooling Contractor shall provide in Situ testing to determine heat transfer characteristics of the soil and potential well output Provide a minimum of 4 in situ test locations per building Suggest to provide a separate and dedicated outdoor air system to each space and room 17 Provide heat recovery from shower drains Provide this strategy where there are a large number of showers 18 Lighting Power
79. housing and the duct vall Seal the duct penetration air tight Seal the duct insulation penetration vapor tight b Averaging Type and coil freeze protection thermostats Weave the capillary tube sensing element in a serpentine fashion perpendicular to the flow across the duct or air handler cross section using durable non metal supports Prevent contact between the capillary and the duct or air handler internals Provide a duct access door at the sensor location The access door shall be hinged on the side factory insulated have cam type locks and be as large as the duct will permit maximum 18 by 18 inches For sensors inside air handlers the sensors shall be fully accessible through the air handler s access doors without removing any of the air handler s internals n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 38 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 3 1 1053 Immersion Temperature Sensors Provide thermowells for sensors measuring piping tank or pressure vessel temperatures Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions Do not install wells using extension couplings Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells provide wells in piping at elbows to sense flow across entire area of well Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of pipe area Increase piping size as required to
80. important to keep the Bluefire weapons like with any battery powered device charging when not in use to ensure the weapons are operational at a moments notice 2 3 3 Environmental Requirements Storage Room Since system equipment will be stored in the Storage Room this room should be heated and cooled in a similar manner as the rest of the facility 2 3 4 Lighting Requirements Storage Room General purpose lighting should be provided for the storage room 2 3 5 Access Storage Room The Storage Room should easily accessible from the Training Room Double doors identical to the ones used for the training room are recommended to facilitate easy movement of equipment in and out of the Weapon Storage Room The room s doors and windows if present should be compliant with customer s standards for storage of simulated weapons 2 4 COMPRESSOR ROOM FOR TETHERED WEAPONS 2 4 1 Size Requirements Compressor Room The size of the Compressor Room should be sufficient to house the compressor skid mounted assembly if purchased by the customer Training Facility Design Document 2 4 2 Povver Requirements Compressor Room There are no special povver requirements for the Compressor Room Hovvever it is recommended to add a couple of power outlets to this room for future use easier and cheaper to add now than later If the customer purchases a separate air compressor the proper power requirements will need to be adhered to in a
81. in accordance with National Roofing Contractors Association NRCA guidance Minimize shading from foliage vent pipes or adjacent structures Minimize electrical losses wiring over current switches inverters Properly ground systems to reduce the threat of shock hazards and induced surges Design and manage battery housing as a roof system component if applicable Interconnect with the utility company following accepted procedures Produce utility quality electrical output Incorporate an insulated 3 ply modified bitumen roof membrane with factory applied light colored mineral granular surfacing to address increased maintenance foot traffic for low sloped roofs less than 3 inches per foot to 0 5 inches per foot minimum e Use self ballasted rack systems where practicable to avoid damage to the roof s watertight membrane e Use rack mounted photovoltaic systems in lieu of thin film laminate systems on low slope roof applications Thin film TF laminate systems are not recommended at this time While the future of TF laminate systems is promising they are currently experiencing operational problems which include ponding sediment accumulation incomplete UL fire rating classifications single ply membrane delamination and advanced deterioration If a Marine Corps installation does desire to use thin film solar PV material then NAVFAC HQ CI shall be consulted Use rack mounted systems on steep slope roofs slope gt 3 inches
82. includes Rainwater harvesting Goal to save the use of domestic water Provide water usage reduction 2 per year with a total reduction of 16 by 2015 This is also covered in CNRMA Energy Instruction 32 Meet the requirements of the MOU Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings Memorandum of Understanding MOU dated 24 January 2006 33 Metering All incoming utilities shall be metered and monitored via the DDC All utilities shall be metered is required by EISA 2007 and EPACT 2005 Metering shall be used for the purposes of efficient energy use and reduction in the cost of the utility Provide utility grade meters that data at least daily and measure the consumption of electricity at least hourly Utilize advanced metering which consists of sub metering The metering will be part of the EMCS DDC controls Consider meter data transfer to GIS via EMCS DDC 34 Minimize Energy usage maximize efficiency consider life cycle costs and utilize the referenced criteria requirements when acquiring new equipment or systems as well as vendors efficiency or energy policies 35 EMCS DDC Consider utilizing Energy Monitoring Control System EMCS and Direct Digital Control DDC EMCS and DDC can provide energy savings by monitoring and control of utilities advanced metering such as sub metering HVAC etc See attached Energy Monitoring Control System Direct Digital Control Systems EMCS DDC Strategy First Draft 8 o
83. incorporates permanent magnets to increase the energy efficiency of the drive machine The machine is located in the elevator machine room This type may be used for low rise to high rise applications Car speed must be a minimum of 350 fpm for mid rise and 500 fpm for high rise applications CHAPTER 3 ARCHITECTURAL Design and installation of elevator system must be in accordance with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design must comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 3 1 Elevator Machine Room An elevator machine room must be provided for every elevator The elevator machine and elevator controller must be located in the elevator machine room 3 1 1 Elevator Machine Room Location The elevator machine room MR must be located directly adjacent to the elevator hoistway For facilities that are not located in a flood zone locate hydraulic elevator MR on the lowest landing served by the elevator 3 1 1 1 For facilities located in a flood zone locate MR on the next highest floor level that is above flood zone elevations as determined by ASCE 24 05 Flood Resistant Design and Construction 3 1 2 Elevator Machine Room Plans Develop detailed plans and sections for elevator machine room Show roof top machine room on elevations and plans for electric traction elevators Provide all layout drawing in
84. integral to the device controller and shall be by differential pressure sensor The air flow shall measure flows down to 300 fpm with an accuracy of 5 percent of reading 2 3 OUTPUT HARDVAR Gl Control Dampers Provide factory manufactured aluminum blade galvanized steel frame dampers vhere indicated Control dampers shall comply vith SMACNA 1966 except as modified or supplemented by this specification Published damper leakage rates and respective pressure drops shall have been verified by tests in compliance with AMCA 500 D requirements Provide damper assembly frames constructed of 13 gauge minimum thickness galvanized steel channels with mitered and welded corners Damper axles shall be 0 5 inches minimum diameter plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings Dampers shall be rated for not less than 2000 fpm air velocity The pressure drop through each damper when full open shall not exceed 0 04 inches water gage at 1000 fpm face velocity Damper assemblies in ductwork subject to above 3 inch water gauge static air pressure shall be constructed to meet SMACNA Seal Class A construction requirements Provide the damper operating linkages outside of the air stream including crank arms connecting rods and other hardware that transmits motion from the damper actuators to the dampers shall be adjust
85. is used for a meter that is different than the existing meters in use at the Activity turn the software over to the Contracting Officer at completion of the project 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following acceptance checks and tests on a random sample of 10 percent of the installed meters as designated by the Contracting Officer all installed meters saa Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS a Meter Assembly 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings b Inspect physical and mechanical condition Confirm the meter is firmly seated in the socket the socket is not abnormally heated the display is visible and the ring and seal on the cover are intact c Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight For Class 200 services verify tightness of the service conductor terminations for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter or by verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method da Record model number serial number firmware revision software revision and rated control voltage e Verify operation of display and indicating devices Record password and user log in for each
86. locations and an internal ventilating fan in locations exposed to direct sunlight Cabinets shall have a hinged lockable door and an offset removable metal back plate except controllers integral with terminal units like those mounted on VAV boxes Provide like keyed locks for all hinged panels provided and a set of two keys at each panel with one key inserted in the lock 2 1 2 11 Main Power Switch and Receptacle Provide each control cabinet with a main external power on off switch located inside the cabinet Also provide each cabinet with a separate 120 VAC duplex receptacl 2 2 L2 DSL Modems DSL modems and Rate Adaptive Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line RADSL modems are provided by the government Telephone modems are not permitted for any other communication with the DDC system 2 1 2 13 BACnet Gateways Provide gatevays to connect BACnet to legacy systems existing non BACnet devices and existing non BACnet DDC controlled plant equipment only when specifically requested and approved by the Government and shown on the Government approved BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic Communication shall be MS TP Communication using IP is not permitted Provide with each gateway an interoperability schedule Use gateway interoperability schedules shown on design dravings or other project documents showing each point or event on the legacy side that the BACnet client will read and each parameter that
87. material and equipment that are standard manufacturer s products currently in production and supported by a local service organization 1 6 2 Delivery Storage and Handling Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation according to manufacturer s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer Replace damaged or defective items 1 63 Operating Environment Protect components from humidity and temperature variation dust and contaminants If components are stored before installation keep them within the manufacturer s limits 1 6 4 Finish of New Equipment New equipment finishing shall be factory provided Manufacturer s standard factory finishing shall be proven to withstand 125 hours in a salt spray fog test Equipment located outdoors shall be proven to withstand 500 hours in a salt spray fog test Salt spray fog test shall be according to ASTM B 117 with acceptance criteria as follows immediately after completion of the test the finish shall show no signs of degradation or loss of adhesion beyond 0 125 inch on either side of the scratch mark 1 6 5 Verification of Dimensions The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work 1 6 6 Contractor s Qualifications Submit documentation certifying the controls Contractor performing the work has completed at lea
88. meter g Verify grounding of metering enclosure h Set all required parameters including instrument transformer ratios system type frequency power demand methods intervals and communications requirements Verify that the CT ratio and the PT ratio are properly included in the meter multiplier or the programming of the meter Confirm that the multiplier is provided on the meter face or on the meter Page 13 b i Provide building meter installation sheet per building for each facility See example Graphic 81 j Provide the completed meter installation schedule for the installation See example Graphic E S2 k Provide the completed meter data schedule for the installation See example Graphic E S3 2 Electrical tests a Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication b Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input output feature including mechanical relay digital and analog c After initial system energization confirm measurements and indications are consistent with loads present d Make note of and report any Error Code or Caution Code on the meter s display 3 Provide meter configuration report Current Transformers 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved shop drawings b Inspect physical and mechanical condition c Verify correct c
89. mounted or panel mounted meters as indicated on the meter schedule 1 Panel mounted meters shall be semi flush back connected dustproof drav out svitchboard type Cases shall have vindov removable covers capable of being sealed against tampering Meters shall be of a type that can be withdrawn through approved sliding contacts from fronts of panels or doors vithout opening current transformer secondary circuits disturbing external circuits or requiring disconnection of any meter leads Necessary test devices shall be incorporated vithin each meter and shall provide means for testing either from an external source of electric pover or from associated instrument transformers or bus voltage l 2 For meter replacement projects meter shall match the existing installation f Meter shall be a Class 20 transformer rated design g Use Class 200 meters for direct current reading without current transformers for applications with an expected load less than 200 amperes where indicated l h Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from minus 40 degrees Centigrade to plus 70 degrees Centigrade i The meters shall have an electronic demand recording register and shall be secondary reading as indicated The register shall be used to Page 8 indicate maximum kilovatt demand as vell as cumulative or continuously cumulative demand Demand shall be measured on a block interval basis and shall be capable of a 5 to 60 minu
90. off peak kWh and phase angles Self monitoring to provide for Unprogrammed register RAM checksum error ROM checksum error Hardware failure Memory failure EPROM error Battery status fault condition or time in service 1 OY 1 HS Q N HM Liquid crystal alphanumeric displays 9 digits blinking squares confirm register operation 6 Large digits for data and smaller digits for display identifier Display operations programmable sequence vith display identifiers Display identifiers shall be selectable for each item Continually sequence with time selectable for each item The meters shall support three modes of registers Normal Mode Alternate Mode and Test Mode The meter also shall support a Toolbox or Service Information accessible in the field through an optocom port to a separate computer using the supplied software to allow access to instantaneous service information such as voltage current power factor load demand and the phase angle for individual phases Meter shall have a standard 4 1 year warranty Disconnect Method Provide a 10 pole safety disconnect complete with isolation devices for the voltage and current transformer inputs including a shorting means for the current transformers Disconnecting wiring blocks shall be provided between the current Page 10 2 2 transformer and the meter A shorting mechanism shall be built into the wiring block to allow the curren
91. or on call at the activity s option to witness the activity s condition inspection and load test in accordance with reference b In either case the contractor shall provide a representative to perform a receipt inspection and initial setup of the crane after delivery to the activity Navy Crane Center NAVCRANECEN assistance is available for this inspection and testing 4 Background Reference a assigns to the Commander Naval Facilities Engineering Command NAVFAC responsibility for all matters pertaining to the Navy s weight handling program at Navy shore activities Reference a further states that these NAVCRANECEN INSTRUCTION 11450 1A responsibilities shall be accomplished through NAVCRANECEN directly reporting to the Commander NAVFAC In accordance with reference a NAVCRANECEN is responsible for a Establishing acquisition policy b Acquiring WHE in accordance with NAVCRANECEN Navy Shore Based WHE Acquisition Policy and c Assisting Navy shore activities and NAVFAC FECs in programming WHE projects NAVCRANECEN is available to assist Navy shore activities and NAVFAC FECs in self procurement of WHE where such self procurement is authorized in accordance with this instruction In accordance with reference a Navy Crane Center acquisition services are funded on a cost reimbursable basis 5 Navy Shore Based WHE Acquisition Policy a Except for exclusions noted in paragraph 3 NAVCRANECEN is the required Pr
92. outdoors room units degrees F C Histology In _ 6 Yes No _ 75 24 Microbiology In _ 6 Yes No _ 75 24 Nuclear medicine n 6 Yes No 75 024 Pathology In 6 Yes No 75 24 Serology In 6 Yes No 75 24 Sterilizing In 10 Yes Autopsy room In 12 Yes No Nonrefrige rated body holding room In _ 10 Yes _ _ 70 21 SERVICEAREAS Pharmacy Out 4 Food preparation center _ 10 _ No _ _ Warewashing n 10 Yes No Dietary day storage In 2 Laundry general _ 10 Yes _ _ _ Soiled linen sorting and storage n 10 Yes No Clean linen storage Out _ 2 _ _ _ _ Soiled linen and trash chute room n 10 Yes No Bedpan room n 10 Yes Bathroom In 10 _ _ _ 75 24 House kee ping room n _ 10 Yes No _ _ STERILIZING AND SUPPLY ETO sterilzer room In 10 Yes No 30 60 75 024 Sterilizer equipmernt room n 10 Yes Central medical and surgical supply Soild or decontamination mom In _ 6 Yes No _ 68 73 20 23 Clean workroom Out 4 No 30 60 75 24 Sierile storage Out 4 _ _ Max 70 _ m ventilation ratas in this table cover ventilation for comfort as wall as Tor as psis and odor control in areas of acuta car hospitals that di ctly affect patient care and are determined basad on healthcar facilities baing predomi nantly No Smoking facilities Wham smoking may be allowed ventilation ratas will need adjustment Arsaswher specific ventilation ratas ar not given
93. pages if used Include plain English narratives of application programs flowcharts and source code Printouts of all physical input and output object properties including tuning values alarm limits calibration factors and set points A table entitled AC Power Table listing the electrical power source for each controller Include the building electrical panel number panel location and circuit breaker number The DDC manufacturer s hardware and software manuals in both print and CD format with printed project specific labels Include installation and technical manuals for all controller hardware operator manuals for all controllers programming manuals for all controllers operator manuals for all workstation software installation and technical manuals for the workstation and notebook and programming manuals for the workstation and notebook software A list of qualified control system service organizations for the work provided under this contract Include their addresses and telephone numbers A written statement entitled Technical Support stating the control system manufacturer or authorized representative will provide toll free telephone technical support at no additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from project acceptance will be furnished by xperienced service technicians and will be available during normal weekday working hours Include the toll free technical support telephone number
94. parking garage parking lot c The combined floor area of any space classified as Other cannot exceed 10 of the total gross floor area of the building where gross floor area of the building excludes the parking garage parking lot d The combined floor area of all Multifamily Housing space cannot exceed 10 of the total gross floor area of the building where gross floor area of the building excludes the parking garage parking lot If the peer group of comparison is Hospital i e if Hospital accounts for more than 50 of your space no other unique spaces should be entered except for parking garages parking lots and raised floor computer data centers The building being evaluated must be a single structure and not a campus or plaza except if the building is identified as a hospital The Retail Store designation for buildings does not include enclosed malls entire strip malls or electronic stores This building designation does however include anchor stores in enclosed malls separately metered single stores within a strip mall big box stores etc Specific building types have additional physical characteristic requirements that must also be met and they are as follows Hospitals This is limited to only Acute Care and Children s Hospitals Specifically excluded are all hospitals primarily used as out patient facilities cancer centers skilled nursing centers psychiatric care hospitals rehabilitation centers or veterina
95. period of 25 years from the date of complete installation and government acceptance 1 6 2 Field Seam Metal Roof Panels Provide manufacturer s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official Provide warranties as Follows a Warranty covering the metal substrate against rupture perforation and structural failure due to normal atmospheric corrosion b Warranty on paint finish against cracking peeling blistering chalk and color change c Provide 35 year Kynar 500 Hylar 5000 limited finish warranty SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 7 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 d Provide 20 year varranty for substrate against corrosion and perforation Manufacturer s Weathertightness Warranty Provide the manufacturers NDL roofing warranties for workmanship and material covering a period of 35 years from date of substantial completion and Government acceptance 6 3 Photovoltaic Pover System Provide written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of the entire building integrated photovoltaic system against defects in materials and or manufacturing workmanship for a period of five years from the date of complete installation and government acceptance Provide written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace laminates that exhibit power output of less than 80 for a period of 20 years from the date of complete installation and
96. proprietary system marketed by Dawn Solar Systems Inc 183 Route 125 Suite A 7 Brentwood NH 03833 Phone 866 338 2018 email info dawnsolar com Webb site www dawnsolar com k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ik k k kk k k ik k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k ik k k k k k k ik k k k k k k k ik k k k k k k k k k Provide an Integrated PV Thermal System arranged for preheating of service domestic and or process water using solar thermal collectors hidden from view mounted beneath the standing seam roof and photovoltaic PV power system attached directly to the roofing panels Include in the system all components required for the complete operation of the system The system must not add to wind profile and the total weight must not exceed five 5 pounds per square foot SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Section 01 33 00 05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 4 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 SD 02 Shop Dravings Integrated PV Thermal System Solar thermal collecting system Field Seam Metal Roof Panels Shop drawings prepared specifically for this project showing dimensions of metal roofing and accessories fastening details and co
97. protection in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Guards shall shield exposed moving parts 2 5 13 Packaged Pump System The package pump system for the rainwater harvesting shall be a dual vertical multistage pump system with variable frequency drives VFD electronic controller to maintain a constant discharge pressure pump control valves and pressure reducing valves The pumps shall be selected for maximum energy efficiency The electronic controller shall be a programmable controller with keypad and LCD display Programmable functions shall include but not limited to Pump status Standby designation elapsed running hours system pressure set point actual system pressure VFD pump speed percent VFD pump min and max speed system faults pump priority pump rotation order friction loss compensation high and low discharge pressure shut down limits and alarms low suction pressure shut down limit and alarm clock program DDC control input and output for connection into the DDC system Pump package shall be UL listed Components shall be certified with manufacturer certified ratings All electrical components devices and accessories of the pump package shall be listed and labeled as given in NFPA 70 Pump motors shall be high efficiency type and totally enclosed fan cooled The pump shall be rated for potable water and shall have the required certifications and and shall be NSF listed for the service intended
98. receipt of contractor s proposal Block 3 Enter the Project Name and the LID technique or storm water Management feature Block 3a Enter the contract number Block 3b Enter the contract modification number Block 4 Enter the names and addresses of the engineering design firm and the construction contractor Block 4a 4b Enter the responsible performing organizations point of contact and position title Lead Engineer Manager President etc and office phone number This information is especially important to ensure any questions related to the project and site design can be quickly directed to the appropriate point of contact avoiding delays in processing the action Block 5 Enter the Contract Agent Name and address Block 5a Enter the project number Block 5b Enter the task number if applicable Block 5c 5d Enter the responsible Contract Agent Action officer s name rank and or position title and office phone number This information is especially important to ensure any questions related to the project and site design can be quickly directed to the appropriate point of contact avoiding delays in processing the action Block 6 Provide a fact filled background and summary of the project Be sure to included details such as the project location size issues and the requirements This discussion should tell the story of the planned project without begging questions The final approval authority should fully underst
99. scheduling alarming load management scheduling and trending c Authority to Operate Authority to Connect Prior approval to communicate on the base MRAN is a requirement on this project Supervisory Building Controllers SBC and any other device communicating on the MRAN without being DADMS listed and approved and approval from the Designated Approving Authority based on DITSCAP or DIACAP efforts will not be permitted d Only technicians authorized by the Camp Lejeune utilities department and factory trained on Metasys extended architecture are approved to add manage or revise data in the EMCS Authorization shall require a unique username and password managed by the Utilities Department All equipment listed as being part of the DDC system shall have a defined energy load value and be entered into the base load rolling program Graphics naming trending and overall user views shall be added to the EMCS All points added shall be consistent with previously installed buildings 1 4 1 Design Requirements 1 4 1 1 Control System Drawings Title Sheet Provide a title sheet for the control system drawing set Include the project title project location contract number the controls contractor preparing the drawings an index of the control drawings in the set and a legend of the symbols and abbreviations used throughout the control system drawings 1 4 1 2 List of 1 0 Points Also knovn as a Point Schedule provi
100. service of the manufacturer s trained certifier vho shall visit the job site and verify the following a Component Level Check voltages and polarities at selected locations Array strings are checked at the last module of the string Combiner boxes main array junction boxes inverter and transformer are checked for physical damage b Array Level Check voltages polarities and short circuit currents at combiner boxes Module wiring is inspected and module output is tested at the combiner box The combiner box is checked to ensure that it is mounted properly and fasteners are tight Check voltages polarities and short circuit currents at main combiner boxes Check that inverter input voltage levels and polarities are correct Sub array wiring is inspected and sub array output V and polarity is tested at the main array junction boxes Main array junction boxes are checked to ensure that they are mounted properly and fasteners are tight Test balance of system housing ventilation systems c Electrical Inspection and Approval using a post installation checklist and the maintenance checklist included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual the entire system is physically inspected and electrically tested b INSPECTION AND TESTING Bisel Inspection Make system available for inspection at all times S22 Testing Prior to Concealment s5241 Hydrostatic Test Demonstrate to Contracting Officer that all piping has been hydrostati
101. shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation whichever is SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 20 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 greater n Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress distort cut or abrade the piping and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion contraction 3 1 6 4 Structural Attachments Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast in concrete inserts built in anchors or masonry anchor devices Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5 Supports shall not be attached to metal decking Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only 3 2 RAINWATER HARVESTING SYSTEM Follow the drawings and manufacturer s written instructions for installation of the rainwater harvesting system All a
102. socket type plug into a fixed base and replaceable without tools or removing wiring Encapsulated PAM type relays may be used for terminal control applications 2 4 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION 2 4 1 Transformers Transformers shall conform to UL 506 For control power other than terminal level equipment provide a fuse or circuit breaker on the secondary side of each transformer 2 42 Surge and Transient Protection Provide each digital controller with surge and transient power protection Surge and transient protection shall consist of the following devices installed externally to the controllers 2 4 2 1 Power Line Surge Protection Provide surge suppressors on the incoming power at each controller or grouped terminal controllers Surge suppressors shall be rated in accordance with UL 1449 have a fault indicating light and conform to the following a The device shall be a transient voltage surge suppressor hard wire type individual equipment protector for 120 VAC 1 phase 2 wire plus ground b The device shall react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset c The voltage protection threshold line to neutral shall be no more than 211 volts d The device shall have an independent secondary stage equal to or greater than the primary stage joule rating e The primary suppression system components shall be pure silicon avalanche diodes f The secondary suppression syst
103. that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 8 PART 2 PRODUCTS The contractor designer shall determine the appropriate type of air barrier product to be specified for the specific location and the permeability Sheet Fluid applied Peel amp stick etc Air barrier locations shall include but not limited to Floor Slab On Grade Air Vapor Barrier Wall Air Barrier Roof Air Barrier Ceiling Air Barrier Window Door amp Louver Air Barrier Seal 0 PART 3 EXECUTION s Repair and Protection a Take measures to protect the air barrier system from damage during construction b Damaged air barriers shall be repaired as recommended by manufacturer by the air barrier installer prior to cover c After completion of the building and upon completion of inspection and testing restore repair any removed damaged construction caused by finding and repairing leaks in the air barrier system and restore substrates insulation and finishes to their original condition 8 2 TESTING AND INSPECTION The folloving qualitative and quantitative tests and inspections shall be conducted by the Contractor in the presence of the Contracting Officer during installation of the air barrier system Qualitative Testing and Inspection a Provide a Daily Report of Observations vith a copy to the Contracting Officer The report shall confirm the
104. the quantity of BACnet routers bridges and switches necessary for communications shown on the BACnet Communication Architecture schematic Provide BACnet routers with BACnet Broadcast Message Device BBMD capability on each BACnet internetwork communicating across an MS TP network Configure each BACnet device and bridge router or switch to communicate on its network segment All switches provided by the contractor shal lbe approved by base telephone 2 16 Wiring Criteria a Run circuits operating at more than 100 volts in rigid or flexible conduit metallic tubing covered metal raceways or armored cable b Do not run binary control circuit wiring in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts Where analog signal wiring requires conduit do not run in the same conduit with AC power circuits or control circuits operating at more than 100 volts c Provide circuit and wiring protection required by NFPA 70 d Run all wiring located inside mechanical rooms in conduit e Do not bury aluminum sheathed cable or aluminum conduit in concrete 2 Input output identification Permanently label each field installed wire cable and pneumatic tube at each end with descriptive text using a commercial wire marking system that fully encircles the wire cable or tube Locate the markers within 2 inches of each termination Match the names and I O number to the project s point list Similarly label all power wiring serving contro
105. to be 1 3 of the Primary Facilities Cost PFC depending on the building type Follow on studies by Steven Winter amp Associates are looking at four additional climate zones for the same three building types The results from these studies should be available by December 30 2007 with anticipation that the cost data can be included in the FY10 program as benchmarks In FY09 DD 1391 development describe in the Budget Estimate Summary Sheet BESS the additional energy modeling design studies systems and features required for compliance with the EPAct 2005 and the Executive Order mandates each with its own line item and price Show the delta between the cost of the primary technology and the cost of the technology expected to be used to meet the requirements for EPAct 2005 and LEEDa Silver The documentation is not to show the cost by percentage increases For the FY09 program Block 9 of the DD 1391shall include a line item titled EPAct 2005 amp LEEDa Silver Compliance This line will be a summation of all cost deltas associated with the proposed technologies and features identified in the BESS to achieve EPAct 2005 and LEEDa Silver compliance goals Typical technology types and features used to meet the new requirements include but are not limited to 1 High Efficiency Chillers 2 Premium Efficiency Motors and Transformers 3 Variable Air Volume VAV systems and Variable Speed Drive motors 4 Occupancy Sensors 5 Heat Recovery 6
106. to prevent buckling at snubbers Most airside equipment falls in this category o Floor mounted pumps may require concrete bases to control distortion to bearings couplings and seals when point mounted on vibration isolators o For adequate stiffness concrete base thickness should be 1 12 of the maximum span between isolators but no less than 150 mm 6 The depth of structural members in steel bases should be 1 10 of the maximum span between isolators but no less than 100 mm 4 Many manufacturers employ internal isolators in their equipment Because the unit casings are commonly lightweight sheet metal they are not structurally adequ ate to incorporate snubbing devices or there is not adequate clearance vvithin the case to prevent contact betvveen components ASHRAE recommends cautious use of internal seismic mountings and snubbers and only with written guarantees from the equipment ma nufacturer or from an independent certified test o Use snubber devices on wall mounted equipment such as propeller fans some air handling units and exhaust fans if equipped with vibration isolators o Sway bracing consisting of slack cable is required for suspended HVAC equipment to prevent the pendulum effect a rigid sway brace of channel or angle steel would cause transfer of vibration to the structure Sway bracing cable may be attached to the top of bottom of the unit and at least for cables per unit will be required for proper seism
107. to the Contractor for installation in the project work Page 6 SD 05 Design Data Design Data for luminaires G Wind Loading Calculations G SD 06 Test Reports LED Luminaire IESNA LM 79 Report G Submit report on manufacturer s standard production model luminaire Submittal shall include Testing agency report number date manufacturer s name catalog number LED driver drive current ambient temperature Luminaire Efficacy Lumens watt Color Qualities CCT and CRI Electrical Measurements input voltage input current input power watts Spectral Distribution over visible wavelengths mW nm Absolute Intensity Candlepower cd Summary table Isocandela Plot Luminance Summary table Illuminance Point to Point Illuminance Isofootcandle Plot Picture of sample Absolute Intensity Candlepover cd Summary table Photometric File including B U G rating in IES Format LED Luminaire IESNA LM 80 Report G Submit report on manufacturer s standard production LED package array or module Submittal shall include Testing agency report number date type of equipment and LED light source being tested All data required by IESNA LM 80 Test laboratories for the IESNA LM 79 and IESNA LM 80 reports shall be one of the following National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program NVLAP accredited for solid state lighting testing as part of the Page 7 1 4 4 mak Energy Efficient Lighting Prod
108. type back flow preventers BFP shall be tested certified by the installing contractor prior to BOD Add the following paragraph to any specification section that includes a BFP 10 22 08 3 X Back Flovv Preventer Certification After installation all double check and reduce pressure zone type back flovv preventers shall be inspected tested and certified by a certified tester Submit tester certification and Test Data Certification Sheet 68 Extruded Tee s in copper piping are acceptable for mains 2 and larger with the branch 72 or less than the main Joint must be brazed 6 13 8 69 Do not permit rolled grooved connections in domestic water copper piping 70 Combination waste amp vent is discouraged Make use of circuit venting where appropriate 71 Drain lines serving commercial dishwashers should be high silicone cast iron Drains serving low temperature mild acid such as carbonated beverage machine drains should be PVC Indicate on the drawings drain line material 72 Domestic water piping shall be type L copper for above ground and type K copper for below grade Do not permit press fittings For O amp M projects cross linked Polyethylene PEX is permitted when largest pipe can be served by 1 PEX 5 19 8 STEAM 73 74 T3 76 TT 78 79 80 81 82 Meters are required for steam water and electrical service to MWR facilities and all other reimbursable customers Avoid 5 19 8 ste
109. union vith a galvanized steel female pipe threaded end and a copper solder joint end conforming to ASME B16 39 Class 1 Provide a dry insulation barrier impervious to water and capable of withstanding a 600 volt breakdown test and limiting galvanic current to one percent of the short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint 2 1 2 9 Valves Ensure all valves comply with solar thermal collecting system manufacturer and solar thermal collecting system requirements ASTM B 763 for brass valves and ASTM A216 A216M or ASTM A351 A351M Provide end connections as indicated Unless otherwise indicated valves shall open when turned counterclockwise In some cases provide valves actuated by electric motors Provide valve construction with rating indicated MSS SP 25 marking modulating brass or steel body construction provide nonferrous or stainless steel valve seats and moving parts exposed to fluid compatible with the operating conditions and thermostatically controlled Construct valves to permit replacing valve seals without draining the system MSS SP 110 for threaded socket welding solder joint grooved and flanged ends SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 9 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 1 3 Piping Specialties 2 1 3 1 Bolts and Nuts Stainless steel ASTM A193 A193M for bolts and ASTM A194 A194M for nuts 2 1 3 2 Gaskets Sealants and Couplings Use fluorinated elastomers ethylene propylene diene t
110. well as UNICOR UNICOR must always be solicited which is done by sending an email with the requirements and evaluation criteria In addition to the review of published list prices the contractor s interior designer must confirm the pricing with the vendor The BVD form Enclosure 1 must be completed and submitted for all FF amp E procurements greater than 3 000 and 150 000 or less FAR 2 101 Greater than 150 000 The contractor s interior designer shall solicit proposals from ail BPA holders under the applicable group for FF amp E procurements greater than 150 000 UNICOR must always be solicited The contractor s interior designer shall develop performance criteria and project requirements based on a generic design for the BPA holders and UNICOR to develop a price and performance proposal The BVD form Enclosure 2 must be completed and submitted for all FF amp E procurements greater than 150 000 FAR 2 101 and manufacturer s quotes and a summary of all proposals must be attached Federal Prison Industries UNICOR must be considered as part of all BVDs UNICOR contact information to obtain pricing or send solicitations is enclosed Enclosure 3 This policy is in effect immediately for any projects awarded after 1 Mar 09 Any questions can be directed to Peggy Noland CID Supervisory Interior Designer NAVFAC MIDLANT at 757 341 0136 or margaret noland navy mil NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND MID ATLANTIC FURNITURE FIXTU
111. within 610 mm 24 of the elbovv as long as the brace is sized as a longitudinal brace see Figure 4 1 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition Provide joints capable of accommodating seismic movements where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators The joints must allow movement in all directions Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines Cast iron pipe of all types glass pipe and any other pipe joined with a shield and clamp assembly where the top of the pipe is 610 mm 24 or more from the supported structure must be braced on each side of the change in direction of 90 or more Riser joints must be braced or stabilized between floors Vertical risers not specifically engineered must be laterally supported with a riser clamp at each floor For buildings greater than six floors all risers must be engineered individually For risers in hubless piping systems where the riser joints are unsupported between floors see Figure 9 10 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition for brace HVAC Equipment Bracing Mechanical equipment less than 181 kg 400 Ibs does not require seismic restraint e Seismic Restraint of Equipment without Vibration Isolators Seismic restraint of floor mounted equipment without vibration isolation is most straightforward and easiest to address Such equipment like tube heat exchange
112. would be expected that the PE would give the building a fail grade for the ventilation requirement However if the outdoor supply rate or contaminant concentration for a single private office within a whole building does not meet ASHRAE Standard 62 1 and the remainder of the building is deemed to meet the standard than one could reasonably expect that the PE would give the building a pass for the ventilation requirement Generally the outdoor air supply assessment and contaminant concentration guideline should take in to account all measurements and observations and is not necessarily contingent upon one occupied space meeting the ventilation requirements It is the responsibility of the PE to determine whether the building meets the letter and spirit of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 after considering all measured data and observations Why are TAB reports and Indoor Air Quality assessments generally not acceptable for assessing whether acceptable outside air ventilation is being provided The principal reasons are two fold 1 the assessment is intended to be a professional opinion at the time of the site visit and 2 the assessment is intended to be based upon the measurements and observations of the PE hired to perform the assessment TAB reports and IAQ assessments can be quite useful for the PE to review though as they may provide confirmation of the PE s measurements and observations as well as indicate problematic areas worthy of the PE s atte
113. 00 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 15A single phase outlet mounted on the wall within six feet of the Instructor Station preferably at the location indicated on the facility layout drawings in Attachment A at 3 off the room floor 1 above the firing platform 2 Other Power 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 15A single phase outlets on separate circuits evenly spaced around the room for use with maintenance and miscellaneous equipment circuits isolated from system circuits A single point of ground earth shall be provided for the entire AC system Ground impedance shall be less than one ohm measured at any outlet or connecting device 2 2 11 Telephone Line Requirements Training Room Two analog telephone lines are recommended for use in system upgrades and remote diagnostics by FATS Inc Provision of telephone lines is desirable to support file and scenario transfer rates used in HLA 2 2 12 Lighting Requirements Training Room A common problem with many customer simulator training rooms is that they are either too dark or too bright This comes from having little or no control over ambient room lighting or from having lights in the wrong locations To maximize projected image clarity and saturation and eliminate interference with laser hit detect sensor Training Room lights in the area of the projector and screen must be turned OFF to keep this area in deep shadow While this reduced light level aids the Virtual Trainer projection syst
114. 00 square feet The building must be located within the United States of America or its territories Buildings owned by the United States government that are located in foreign lands are also eligible A 5 digit ZIP code must be recorded for buildings located in the USA or its territories For buildings owned by the United States government that are located in foreign lands the location most closely related to the building in terms of climate must be indicated Typically this is the location nearest that of the building Choices of location are by major city that has an international airport n some cases there may be only one location for an entire country The presence of a swimming pool on the same utility meter its size and if the pool is located inside or outside of the facility must be recorded Total square foot of parking structures data centers and any space marked as other must be verified and are subject to the following restrictions a The combined floor area of all the Parking Garages or Parking Lots cannot exceed the total gross floor area of the building where the gross floor area of the building excludes the parking garage parking lot Additionally The presence of an attached parking structure on the same utility meter s must be recorded b The combined floor area of all Computer Data Centers cannot exceed 10 of the total gross floor area of the building where the gross floor area of the building excludes the
115. 000 V and Less AC Pover Circuits 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Lov Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Pover Circuits 2002 R 2008 Recommended Practice on n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 1 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low Voltage 1000v and less AC Power Circuits INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION ISO ISO 8802 3 2000 Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Specific Requirements Part 3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code NFPA 72 2010 TIA 10 4 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA 90A 2009 Errata 09 1 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA SMACNA 1966 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 3rd Edition UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1449 2006 Reprint Feb 2011 Surge Protective Devices UL 506 2008 Reprint Mar 2010 Spe
116. 007 American National Standard for Electric Lamps Single Ended Metal Halide Lamps 2008 American National Standard for electric lamps Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products Page 3 NEMA 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum NEMA ICS 2 2000 R 2005 Errata 2008 Standard for Controllers Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 V NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2006 Enclosures NEMA WD 7 2000 R 2005 Occupancy Motion Sensors NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA RUS Bull 1728F 700 1993 REA Specification for Wood Poles Stubs and Anchor Logs U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EPA Energy Star 1992 R 2006 Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System U S FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC FCC Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices 47 CFR 15 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1029 1994 Reprint Jun 2010 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts UL 1310 2005 Standard for Safety Class 2 Power Units Fifth Edition Reprint with revisions through and including September 30 2010 UL 1598 2008 Reprint Jan 2010 Luminaires UL 773 1995 Reprint Mar 2002 Standard for Plug In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting UL 773A 2006 Reprint Mar 2011 Standard for Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control UL 8750 2009 Standard for Safety Li
117. 09 6 points for major renovations Enhanced Refrigerant Management EA 4 1 point Measurement and Verification EA 5 1 point 1 Attachment 2 Attachment 2 MOU High Performance LEED Credits Materials and Resources Construction Waste Management Recycled Content 10 Rapidly Renewable Products Certified Wood Indoor environmental Quality Low Emitting Materials Thermal Comfort Design Daylighting Innovation and Design Process Moisture Control Plan Bio Based Products LEED Accredited Professional MR 2 1 MR 4 1 MR 6 MR 7 EQ 4 EQ 7 1 EQ 8 1 IDI IDI ID2 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point 1 point Attachment 2 Attachment 3 Budget Cost for Energy Policy Act 2005 EPAct and LEED Silver Compliance EPAct 2005 requires energy consumption levels to be 30 less than current ASHRAE 90 1 2004 Standards The budget to comply with this requirement was not included in FY07 08 projects but is included and detailed in all FY09 projects and should be included in FY10 and later projects Studies prepared by Steven Winter amp Associates in the spring of 2006 examined three building types Admin BQ amp Maint Fac to determine system requirements and costs to comply with the Energy Policy Act 2005 The facilities are located in the Norfolk VA area Mid Atlantic mixed humid climate zone The studies concluded that the required systems would have additional cost expected
118. 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION After becoming thoroughly familiar with all details of the work verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work 3 2 SOLAR COLLECTOR INSTALLATION 22 1 Collector Subsystem Collectors tanks pumps valves heat exchangers piping hoses and other components shall be capable of operating vithin design pressure and temperature ranges and vithstanding environmental extremes anticipated in actual service vithout significantly reducing system design life A rating for 180 F at 100 psi should be sufficient for all components located beneath the roof collector area SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 16 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 2 1 1 Collector Array Solar collector array shall be installed in accordance to the manufacturer s specifications For mounting on pitched roofs back of collectors shall be installed at 1 inches above roof surface Each solar collector shall be removable for maintenance repair or replacement Solar collector array shall not impose additional loads on the structure beyond the loads scheduled on the structural drawings 322512 Array Piping Collector array piping shall be installed in a reverse return configuration so that path lengths of collector supply and return are of approximately equal length All piping must be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels in accordance with S
119. 3 Operating Characteristic Requirements Eligibility requirements must be met before a building can qualify for the ENERGY STAR label In Portfolio Manager users are asked to enter data for key operating characteristics of their building There are minimum and maximum thresholds for these values These limits are designed to make sure that their building falls into an operation pattern consistent with that of the peer group of buildings used for comparison In order to be eligible to receive a national energy performance rating and qualify for the ENERGY STAR label these threshold values must be met The following requirements must be verified by the PE All buildings must o be in operation at least 30 hours per week o be at least 5 000 ft with two exceptions If the building is a bank it may be as small as 1 000 square foot If the building is a hospital it must be at least 20 000 square foot o have at least 11 consecutive months of energy data and operational characteristics o must contain at least 1 worker during the main shift does not apply for hospitals or any other building type that does not have Workers on Main Shift listed as a required operational characteristic All office bank courthouse and K 12 school spaces must contain at least 1 Personal Computer PC Retail stores must contain at least 1 register but can have 0 personal computers s Building must meet the following occupancy requirements o Offices must ha
120. 3810 or Director of Crane Design at telephone 757 967 3822 The following stipulations apply 1 NAVCRANECEN shall be consulted on allowable configuration for overhead electric traveling bridge cranes with spans exceeding 40 feet 2 Navy shore activities shall use the applicable Unified Facilities Guide Specifications UFGS to prepare WHE solicitation UFG specifications are located at http www wbdg org NAVCRANECEN is available to review a specification upon request If a UFGS is not available for the type of WHE proposed the activity shall coordinate with NAVCRANECEN to determine if the WHE can be locally procured or should be a NAVCRANECEN procurement 3 Ensure WHE is certified by the local certifying official in accordance with reference b before being placed in operation 4 Navy shore activities without crane engineering expertise shall contact NAVCRANECEN to discuss procurement of the WHE S E BEVINS Distribution NAVCRANECEN Internet https portal navfac navy mil ncc NAVFAC Internet https portal navfac navy mil Rev 1 25 10 Minor rev 5 12 10 Previous 7 2 09 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE N C MECHANICAL POLICIES HVAC 1 Use the latest revision of ASHRAE 62 for guidance on indoor atr quality For the purposes of outside air ventilation only typical occupancy is considered that which happens at least once a week for buildings that follow a regular schedule or at least 15 times a year for non schedule type buildings
121. 6306 SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 RAINWATER HARVESTING 05 11 PART 1 GENERAL Ta 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANSI ANSI Z21 22 CSA 4 4 1999 Addenda A 2000 Addenda B 2001 R 2004 Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE ASHRAE 90 1 IP 2010 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING ASSE ASSE 1001 2008 Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers ANSI approved 2009 ASSE 1003 2009 Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems ANSI approved 2010 ASSE 1011 2004 Errata 2004 Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers ANSI approved 2004 ASSE 1012 2009 Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent ANSI approved 2009 ASSE 1013 2009 Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers ANSI approved 2010 ASSE 1020 2004 Errata 2004 Errata 2004 Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly ANSI Approved 2004 AME
122. A 22209 30 Sample Building Plaques Dimensions width 10 inches height 12 inches Cyan US EPA ENERGY STAR Professional Engineer s Guide 2009 31 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS 2000 NAVY PENTAGON WASHINGTON D C 20350 2000 110000 Ser 46 801598404 From Director Ashore Readiness Division N46 AUG 15 2008 To Deputy Assistant Secretary of the Navy Environment Subj PLAN OF ACTION AND MILESTONES POA amp M FOR DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY LOW IMPACT DEVELOPMENT LID IMPLEMENTAION FOR STORM WATER MANAGEMENT Ref a OPNAV N46 letter Ser 8U158437 of 8 May 08 b ASN I amp E memo of 16 Nov 07 c DASN E memo of 2 Apr 08 Encl 1 Low Impact Development Plan of Action and Milestones 1 Reference a states that NAVFAC will develop a POA amp M for implementing storm water LID in accordance with references b and c This letter provides the NAVFAC LID POA amp M enclosure 4 2 My point of contact for this matter is Mr Blodgett at wayne blodgett navy mil or 202 433 4513 Division Copy to COMNAVFACENGCOM ENV CHENG CNO N45 CMC ENV Low Impact Development LID Plan of Action Milestones POA amp M The goal of the POA amp M is to develop LID program requirements policy direction and criteria to affect the FY11 program 3 Phase Approach Phase JAN 08 FEB 09 e Goal Issue interim guidance to assist with FY 11 project 1391 deve 7 targe
123. ALVE INSTALL ONLY IF WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE EXCEEDS 75 OF WATER HEATING SYSTEM DESIGN PRESSURE 6 ASME THERMAL EXPANSION TANK SIZE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER S RECOMMENDATION T COMBINATION TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE GAUGE INSTALL WITHIN 12 OF WATER HEATER OUTLET PROVIDE FULL PORT VALVE AND ROUTE TO FLOOR DRAIN RECIRCULATION PUMP PROVIDE AQUASTAT ONLY IF REQUIRED BY CODE WITH LETTER TO OWNER REQUIRING RELEASE OF LIABILITY NON MOVING WATER PROMOTES LEGIONELLA FREEZE PROTECTION VALVE IC FP 035 INSTALL ON COMMON SOLAR HOT WATER RETURN LINE TO DISCHARGE ON ROOF VALVE AND TEE TO REMAIN UN INSULATED FAN AND COIL UNIT SIZED TO DISCHARGE AT LEAST 6 000 BTUH PER COLLECTOR 3 PORT VALVE TO DIVERT COLLECTOR LOOP TO FAN COIL DUCT DISCHARGE THROUGH NEAREST OUTSIDE WALL DOMESTIC HOT WATER FLOW DIAGRAM WATER HEATER WITH SOLAR STORAGE TANK Av SCALE NONE Ora 1 OUTDOORS INDOORS OUTDOORS 4 INDOORS CHEMICAL nc BYPASS FEEDER y SOLAR STORAGE STORAGE TYPE No WATER HEATER 2 no 2 KI NOTI INSTALL SOLAR COLLECTORS IN SERIES UP TO 6 UNITS THEN IN REVERSE FLOW PARALLEL MANIFOLD UP TO 24 UNITS 2 SOLAR CONTROL AND PUMP STATION CONNECT TO ALL RTD S AND SOLENOID VALVES QO MIXING VALVE Q ROUTE T amp P RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE FULL SIZE TO FLOOR DRAIN PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE INSTALL ONLY IF WATER SUPPLY PRE
124. AMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 1 2 2 3 Performance Verification Test PVT The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria prior to final acceptance The PVT is performed after installation testing and balancing of mechanical systems Typically the PVT is performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government 1 2 44 PID Proportional integral and derivative control three parameters used to control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint Derivative control is often not required for HVAC systems leaving PI control 1 2 45 PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS describing the BACnet capabilities of a device S BACnet Annex A for the standard format and content of a PICS statement 1 2 46 Points Physical and virtual inputs and outputs See also Input Output 1 2 47 PTP Point to Point protocol connects individual BACnet devices or networks using serial connections 1 2 48 Repeater A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the physical layer 1 2 49 Router A BACnet router is a component that joins together two or more networks using different LAN technologies Examples include joining a BACnet Ethernet LAN to a BACnet MS TP LAN 1 2 50 Stand Alone Control Refers to devices performing equipment specific and small system control without communication to other devices or computers for physical I O exclu
125. ATE 2009 please refer to Section 1 7 Module 4 Thermal Comfort 4 1 Objective The PE must verify that the thermal conditions in a building conform to industry standards as part of the review for the ENERGY STAR label to help assure that a comfortable work environment has not been sacrificed to reduce energy use 4 2 Technology Standard ANSI ASHRAE Standard 55 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc Atlanta Georgia www ashrae org Earlier versions of the Standard may be used when properly referenced in building documents if appropriate in the PE s professional judgment 4 3 Background and Expectations of PE According to ASHRAE Standard 55 acceptable thermal environment of indoor spaces designed for human occupancy is dependent upon temperature relative humidity air speed building activity and clothing insulation Thermal comfort may also vary from person to person however extensive laboratory and field data have been collected by ANSI ASHRAE to provide necessary statistical data to define conditions that a specified percentage of occupants will find thermally comfortable The majority of data collected is thermal comfort data that pertains to sedentary or near sedentary physical activity levels typical of office work The PE is expected to verify on the Statement of Energy Performance that thermal comfort conditions of the building ar
126. Ad PP O xx 8 1 pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aouaby Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg O p solQ led p ule qo 9ed 19V U0199 01d IeuutuelW SUNEN LINYad xx SJUBWOJINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aov y Buinss vu s ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg Shun d 1900 O uoneunsuoo p sol ajeq p ulelqo leq juauissassy 3E QEH 451 lEBU SS4 LINNAd x SJUBUIBJIINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 61099 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg Shun d 12410 O p solo 3eq 9 eq LINYAd xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aoueby Buinss ux ON S8A 401910 Jo siseg p solo aed PSUle qO 9 eq bulbpaiq LINNAd LOArOUd LNAWNYSAO9 NYOM JILIL 1 304 O syw d 19470 xog 42949 q aq noau LINM4d 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd 0 0 p ulelqo 910 xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg LINYAd xx SJUBUUBJIINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aoueby Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg 18410 E P SO O lEQ P SO O lEQ p ulelqo yeq poule qO aed bulbbiq 9 pue s
127. CE COMPLEX 616306 3 f Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer g Complete operation of the rainwater harvesting system This shall include operation under all conditions such as loss of power and low water levels in the storage tank 9 5 Disinfection After operational tests are complete the entire domestic non potable and cold water distribution system shall be disinfected System shall be flushed as specified before introducing chlorinating material The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine Except as herein specified water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million ppm A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a hypochlorinator or liquid chlorine injected into the main through a solution feed chlorinator and booster pump shall be used If after the 24 hour and 6 hour holding periods the residual solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively flush the piping with potable water and repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million During the flushing period each valve shall be opened and closed several tim
128. Chilled water VA V with zone reheat is the preferred HVAC system for offices and should be considered wherever appropriate VA V zone boxes with out fans are preferable to units with fans In non fan powered zone boxes when specifying minimum air flow the designer shall consider diffuser dumping If a zone has a large variance of load profile from neighboring zones a fan povvered box should be considered to avoid dumping of diffusers Chilled vvater VAV vvith fan povvered terminal units is the preferred HVAC system for BEQ BOQ s Zone reheat shall be as specified in the scope 10 14 08 VAV Fan powered terminal units shall have a fan volume of 50 cfm to 50 greater than the maximum primary air flow 1 8 10 Minimum primary air flow should match the ventilation rate required 5 12 10 Particular attention should be given to humidity control by air conditioning equipment Cooling units 7 5 tons and smaller shall not have modulating water controls unless based on a constant 55 F supply temperature Larger units may have split face coils to give capacity step control progressive modulating chilled water valves may be used Modulating face and bypass dampers are okay on any size equipment Rooftop HVAC equipment should be used with discretion Maintenance access is more difficult controls and water piping are exposed to more extreme conditions and roof is exposed to more abuse and wear Ladders permanent or temporary inhibit personnel material
129. D card permanent memory storage The system vill record and viev system data for energy pump operation etc with SD card interface The system also provides a graphic viev for 5 system configurations vith extra functions 2 Pump outputs 2 Analog sensor inputs for flov and pressure 1 Impulse flov meter input pump exercise function System capabilities include monitoring for errors such as short or open circuits to sensors pump failure Collector sensor location can be external or internal to collector 2 1 15 3 Sensor and Control Wiring Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and applicable electrical and plumbing code standards The control subsystem shall include such provision for bypass adjustment or override controls as are required to facilitate installation startup operation shutdown and maintenance of the system Safety controls shall not have provision for bypass or override All switches and their function shall be labeled and easily accessible 2 1 15 4 Thermistor Temperature Sensors Temperature sensors shall be multiple 1k type thermistor s units supplied by the differential temperature controller manufacturer with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent at indicated temperature Quantities will vary as a function of overall size 2 1 16 Manifold Provide supply and return manifold sets as part of each solar thermal collector system Manifold sets may include actuators balancing valves flow rate indicat
130. DISCHARGE FULL SIZE TO FLOOR DRAIN PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE INSTALL ONLY IF WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE EXCEEDS 75 OF WATER HEATING SYSTEM DESIGN PRESSURE ASME THERMAL EXPANSION TANK SIZE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER S RECOMMENDATION COMBINATION TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE GAUGE INSTALL WITHIN 12 OF WATER HEATER OUTLET PROVIDE FULL PORT VALVE AND ROUTE TO FLOOR DRAIN RECIRCULATION PUMP PROVIDE AQUASTAT ONLY IF REQUIRED BY CODE WITH LETTER TO OWNER REQUIRING RELEASE OF LIABILITY NON MOVING WATER PROMOTES LEGIONELLA 000 FREEZE PROTECTION VALVE 94 IC FP 035 INSTALL ON COMMON SOLAR HOT WATER RETURN LINE TO DISCHARGE ON ROOF VALVE AND TEE TO REMAIN UN INSULATED FAN COIL UNIT SIZED TO DISCHARGE AT LEAST 6 000 BTUH PER COLLECTOR 3 PORT VALVE TO DIVERT COLLECTOR LOOP TO FAN COIL WHEN STORAGE TANK REACHES 180 DUCT DISCHARGE THROUGH NEAREST OUTSIDE WALL DOMESTIC HOT WATER FLOW DIAGRAM SINGLE WATER HEATER WATER HEATER IS THE STORAGE TANK N SCALE NONE L OUTDOORS CHEMICAL NC BYPASS FEEDER y NO NO STORAGE TYPE 8 SOLAR STORAGE WATER HEATER NO 2 No CWS KEYED NOTES o INSTALL SOLAR COLLECTORS IN SER ES UP TO 6 UNITS THEN IN REVERSE FLOW PARALLEL MANIFOLD UP TO 24 UNITS 2 SOLAR CONTROL AND PUMP STATION CONNECT TO ALL RTD S 3 MIXING VALVE A ROUTE T amp P RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE FULL SIZE TO FLOOR DRAIN 5 PRESSURE REDUCING V
131. EPACT 2005 and EISA 2007 goals Provide analysis for using energy reclamation from chillers and or geothermal heating natural gas storage type heaters natural gas storage heaters supplemented by solar vvater heating system and supplemented by solar assisted vvater source heat pumps in vievv of achieving LEED credits under EA Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance EISA 2007 requires that 30 of the hot water demand shall be provided by solar water heating system if life cycle cost effective Provide energy calculations system design and life cycle cost calculations 16 Optimize the HVAC Systems Evaluate three general HVAC system types in view of meeting EPACT 2005 UFC 3 400 01 and the LEED requirements for this project The following four HVAC systems are those that have been found to be used the most Prepare a life cycle cost analysis for these three HVAC systems and the two heat distribution systems Select an HVAC system based upon fully meeting EPACT 2005 UFC 3 400 01 requirements and the LEED requirements UFC 3 400 01 dated 5 July 2002 including Change 4 dated August 2008 ENERGY CONSERVATION use latest versions Base the life cycle cost on first cost yearly maintenance cost energy costs operating costs and system equipment replacement costs The Designer of Record shall select an HVAC system type based upon fully meeting the energy conservation requirements and the overarching LEED Silver requirement and favoring the mos
132. ET Domestic Hot Water SetPoint O O EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune EMCS Equipment and Points Nomenclature for Camp Lejeune Command Interior Design Policy Best Value Determinations Feb 2011 FAR 8 405 1 States the designer shall review at least three schedule contractors through GSA NAVSUP 5 In addition to price when determining best value the designer may consider the factors such as special features trade in considerations life cycle analysis warranty maintenance past performance sustainability comfort delivery training needed technical qualifications compatibility and administrative costs as part of the Best Value Determination BVD Enclosures and 2 If other than price is the deciding factor for selection the designer must document the decision in a narrative paragraph as part of the BVD The designer must sign the BVD forms under Submitting Official BVD REQUIREMENTS 3 000 or less For any procurement in the FF amp E package with a value of 3 000 or less the interior designer may utilize any BPA holder If the BPA holders cannot supply the item then any other manufacturer may be utilized Greater than 3 000 and 150 000 or less for any procurement in the FF amp E package with a value greater than 3 000 and 150 000 or less the contractor s interior designer shall always review pricing from at least three BPA holders manufacturers as
133. Engineer Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality Yes z Acceptable Thermal Environmental Conditions Yes 33 Country Lane Adequate Illumination Yes Charlotte NC 28227 555 555 7788 Notes 1 Application for the ENERGY STAR must be submitted to EPA within 4 months of the Penod Ending date Award of the ENERGY STAR is not final until approval is received from EPA 2 The EPA Energy Performance Rating is based on total source energy A rating of 75 is the minimum to be eligible for the ENERGY STAR 3 Values represent energy consumption annualized to a 12 month period 4 Natural Gas values in units of volume e g cubic feet are converted to kBtu with adjustments made for elevation based on Facility zip code 5 Values represent energy intensity annualized to a 12 month 6 Based on Meeting ASHRAE Standard 62 for ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality ASHRAE Standard 55 for thermal comfort and IESNA Lighting Handbook for Sighting quality the average time needed to fill out this form is 6 hours includes the time for entering energy data PE factity inspection and notarizing the SEP and welcomes suggestions for m uq seve fo Sena comments referencing OMB contro number to the Director Collecion Strategies Division U S EPA 28227 1200 Pennsylvania Ave NW Washington D C 2 20 EPA Form 5900 16 Tracking Number SEP200810290001032888 ENERGY STAR Data Checklist for Commercial Buildings In order for a buildin
134. HVAC equipment and plant controllers provide for manual overrides either with three position on off auto override switches and status lights or with an adjacent operator display and interface Where appropriate provide a method to select normally open or normally closed operation f Analog Outputs Analog outputs shall send modulating 0 10 VDC or 4 20 mA signals to control output devices g Tri State Outputs Tri State outputs shall provide three point floating control of terminal unit electronic actuators 1 2 10 Digital Controller Cabinet Provide each digital controller as factory mounted or in a factory fabricated cabinet enclosure Cabinets located indoors shall protect against dust and have a minimum NEMA 1 rating except where indicated otherwise Cabinets located outdoors or in damp environments shall protect n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 16 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 against all outdoor conditions and have a minimum NEMA 4 rating Mechanical rooms that contain steam service or equipment are considered damp environments Outdoor control panels and controllers must be able to withstand extreme ambient conditions without malfunction or failure whether or not the controlled equipment is running If necessary provide a thermostatically controlled panel heater in freezing
135. MPLEX 616306 1 Inverter a The inverter shall be sized to accommodate the PV system layout The inverter shall have at a minimum the following features IEEE UL 1741 IEEE 519 NFPA 70 Peak efficiency not less than 95 and NEMA 4 enclosure b PV module manufacturer as part of system without substitutions shall provide inverter c The inverter system will convert the DC power from the photovoltaic arrays to commercial AC power The inverter is sized to match the capacity of the photovoltaic array and deliver the maximum energy to the load grid 2 Isolation Transformer a Provide a power conditioning transformer either with or within the inverter to complete the balance of system The isolation transformer will be selected to match the maximum output of the system inverter 3 Combiner J Box a Provide hinged cover fiberglass or metal NEMA 4X enclosure unit that is sunlight resistant and exhibits excellent chemical temperature and weather resistance properties 4 Disconnect Switch a Provide direct current DC disconnect switch to isolate system from inverter transformer The disconnect switch must be UL Listed with a main disconnect with fused switch to handle the inputs as specified by PV manufacturer 2 4 PAINTING AND FINISHING Equipment and component items when fabricated from ferrous metal and located inside the building shall be factory finished with the manufacturer s standard finish PART
136. N 07 25 00 00 22 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 04 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the xtent referenced The publications are referred to vithin the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C 1060 2011 Standard Practice for Thermographic Inspection of Insulation Installations in Envelope Cavities of Frame Buildings ASTM D 4541 200961 Pull Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers 84 2010b Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM ira z ASTM E 1827 1996 R2007 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Tightness of Buildings Using An Orifice Blower Door INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION ISO ISO 6781 1983 Thermal Insulation Qualitative Detection of Thermal Irregularities in Building Envelopes Infrared Method T UNITED STATES ARMY CORP OF ENGIN ERS USACE 1 2 RELATED WORK AFFECTED BY THIS SECTION The air barrier system requires close and frequent coordination between the contractor and sub contractors as well as between sub contractors As a result it is the contractor responsibility to assure that all such trades have a complete understanding of their responsibilities Below is a partial list of specifications th
137. NCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS ATIS ATIS ANSI 05 1 2008 Wood Poles Specifications amp Dimensions AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO LTS 5 2009 Errata 2009 Amendment 2010 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs Luminaires and Traffic Signals AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST ANSI 136 20 2008 American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Fiber Reinforced Composite FRC Lighting Poles AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION AWPA AWPA C1 2003 All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes AWPA C4 2003 Poles Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes AWPA M6 2007 Brands Used on Forest Products ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A123 A123M 2009 Standard Specification for Zinc Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 A153M 2009 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating Hot Dip on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM B 108 B 108M 2008 Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Permanent Mold Castings Page 1 ASTM B 117 2009 Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus ASTM C 1089 2006 Standard Specification for Spun Cast Prestressed Co
138. OMMAND ATLANTIC 6506 HAMPTON BLVD I NORFOLK VA 23508 1278 l 000 REFER TO CIME tjh 01 March 2005 From Commander Naval Facilities Engineering Command Capitol Improvements To Distribution Subj INTERIM TECHNICAL GUIDANCE ITG FY05 2 NAVFAC HUMID AREA HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Ref a ITG FY03 4 NAVFAC Mold Response Manual b Engineering Technical Letter ETL 04 3 Design Criteria for Prevention of Mold in Air Force Facilities dtd 6 April 6 2004 c Engineering Technical Letter ETL 03 2 Design Criteria for Prevention of Mold in Air Force Facilities dtd 12 August 2003 Encl 1 NAVFAC Humid Area HVAC Design Criteria dtd 31 January 2005 2 Bachelor Housing 1 1E Apt Example 1 Purpose The purpose of this guide is to provide revised basic criteria and information concerning the design of facilities located in Humid Areas with the intent to prevent the occurrence of mold and mildew growth 2 Discussion Reference a provides guidance on mold remediation and abatement based upon increasing incidence of mold and mildew occurrence within Navy facilities References b and c address prevention of similar problems within Air Force facilities Enclosure 1 of this ITG incorporates substantial portions of the Air Force ETL and supplements it with some additional information 3 Action a Design All projects located in Humid Areas starting design 90 days after the effective date of this ITG wil
139. ORMANCE Sample Facility Building ID 1526045 For 12 month Period Ending July 31 20081 Date SEP becomes ineligible November 28 2008 Date SEP Generated October 29 2008 Facility Facility Owner Primary Contact for this Facility Sample Facility Sample Owner Jane Smith 1234 Main Street 1500 Test Avenue 1500 Test Avenue Charlotte NC 28227 Charlotte NC 28227 Charlotte NC 28227 555 555 5555 555 555 5555 jsmith jsmith com Year Built 2001 Gross Floor Area ft2 12 000 Energy Performance Rating 1 100 100 Site Energy Use Summary Electricity kBtu 478 492 Natural Gas kBtu 4 0 Total Energy kBtu 478 492 Energy Intensity Site kBtu ft2 yr 40 Source kBtu ft2 yr 1 Professional Engineer Stamp certify that the information contained within this Emissions based on site energy use statement is accurate and in accordance with the Greenhouse Gas Emissions MtCO e year 1 Professional Engineer Stamp Electric Distribution Utility Duke Energy Carolinas LLC Signature Based on the conditions observed at the National Average Comparison time of my visit to this building certify that National Average Site EUI 65 the information contained vvithin this National Average Source EUI 217 statement is accurate and in accordance Difference from National Average Source EUI 39 with the PE Guidelines Building Type Office Meets Industry Standards for Indoor Environmental Professional
140. P chapters In addition to reviewing the chapter for the individual BMPs it can also be helpful to read Chapters 3 and 5 for basic stormwater calculations and common BMP design elements Stormwater treatment measures that do not appear in the BMP Manual have not yet been approved for use in North Carolina T 10 11 For determining the 1 yr 24 hr storm event rainfall depth and intensity the NOAA web site is very helpful The link is on the BMP web site but can also be accessed here http hdsc nws noaa gov hdsc pfds orb nc_pfds html In order to obtain information for the l yr 24 hr storm event select the option for the partial duration time series For Camp Lejeune the 1 yr 24 hr rainfall depth is typically 3 8 inch while the intensity is 0 15 inch hour If engineered BMPs wet pond infiltration system bioretention etc or curb outlet swale systems are proposed a soils report with detailed soils information is required to be submitted with the application package This report is based upon fieldwork at the site typically conducted by a soil scientist Please note that The SHWT elevation is not the same thing as the groundwater elevation typically reported in geotechnical reports The soils report should contain the estimated seasonal high water table SHWT elevation at each proposed BMP location and should be reported in FMSL not as a depth below the existing ground Ifthe soils report does provide the SHWT as a depth
141. PAct To address requirements for the sustainable design of federal buildings NAVFAC adopted the use of the USGBC LEED Green Building Rating System In Reference d direction was given to plan and program to achieve at least a USGBC LEEDe Silver level rating performance a minimum of 33 LEEDa credit points The LEEDe checklist is required on all projects to show credits being sought towards this goal Include the checklist as an attachment to the Electronic Project Generator EPG By aligning the MOU goals and measures with the LEEDe system 20 22 credit points can be achieved towards establishing the LEEDa Silver level rating and satisfying the requirements of the EPAct These credits are identified in the table below For all applicable projects new buildings and major renovations where the work exceeds 50 percent of the building s plant replacement value PRV use these credit strategies in meeting the LEEDa Silver level performance LEED NC version 2 2 Credits Title Credit Number of LEEDe Points Employ Integrated Design Principles N A 0 points Sustainable Sites Stormwater Design Quantity Control SS6 1 1 point Stormwater Design Quality Control SS 6 2 1 point Water Efficiency Water Efficient Landscaping Reduce by 50 WE 1 1 1 point Water Use Reduction 20 Reduction WE 3 1 1 point Energy and Atmosphere Fundamental Commissioning EAP 0 points Optimize Energy Performance 30 EA 1 4 points Reduction EPACT 2005 Section 1
142. PV panel wiring is provided at the ridge cap Correct defective conditions before beginning work 3 2 Installation Install in conformance with the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations Form panel shape as indicated on drawings accurate in size square and free from distortion or defects Install underlayment as recommended by the manufacturer Install all panels continuous from ridge to eave Transverse seams are not permitted All panels in excess of 40 feet shall be site formed Where not otherwise indicated conform to SMACNA details including flashing and trim Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids Pac enc Protection Protect installed products until completion of project Touch up repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion 4 PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER SYSTEM 4 1 Preparation Install complete electric connections and similar items as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as required for proper operations according to these specifications and the drawings SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 19 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 4 2 Installation Install in accordance vith manufacturer s instructions and NFPA 70 standards Install photovoltaic laminates over flat metal roofing panels as shown on the drawings 44 3 System Check Out and Test Provide the
143. RES amp EQUIPMENT FF amp E ESTIMATED COST SUMMARY E lC SUBTOTAL 0 S 1 Misc 5 Oooo S e o O 2 1 Shipping 6 n o installation 13 j e Oo k TOTAL C ES 4 Enclosure 1 BEST VALUE DETERMINATION GUIDELINES 3 000 150 000 Schedule Purchases are subject to FAR 8 4 DFARS 208 4 and DFARS PGI Supplement 208 405 70 FAR 2 101 a FAR 84 required that you make a best value determination before placing Multiple Award Schedule MAS orders above the micro purchase limit currently 3 000 Navy Furniture BPAs shall be the primary source for FF amp E Refer to Specification Section E20 For orders between 3 000 and 150 000 review pricing from at least three sources and UNICOR FAR 8 405 1 c FAR 2 101 Seek additional price discounts from the contractor offering the best value FAR 8 405 1 4 Brief Description of Item Systern or Component to be Procured Did you review the required number of sources under the BPA and or Federal Supply Schedule YES L xo LI Identify the Navy Furniture BPA or other Federal Supply Schedule utilized or indicate not applicable Was UNICOR included in the review YES _INo _ 5 List the name s and contract number s of contractor s who were considered List three or more contract
144. RICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA AWWA 10084 2005 Standard Methods for the SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 1 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 Examination of Nater and Nastevater AWWA B300 2010 Hypochlorites AWWA B301 2010 Liquid Chlorine AWWA C651 2005 Errata 2005 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA C652 2002 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities AWWA C700 2009 Standard for Cold Water Meters Displacement Type Bronze Main Case AWWA C701 2007 Standard for Cold Water Meters Turbine Type for Customer Service ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME A112 1 2 2004 Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems For Plumbing Fixtures and Water Connected Receptors ASME B1 20 1 1983 R 2006 Pipe Threads General Purpose Inch ASME B40 100 2005 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments ASME BPVC 2010 Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B 117 2009 Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray Fog Apparatus ASTM B 370 2009 Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction ASTM C 920 2011 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D 2822 2005 Asphalt Roof Cement ASTM E 1 2007 Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid in Glass Thermometers ASTM E 2129 2005 Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CON
145. S 5b TASK NUMBER 5c NAME OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON TITLE OR RANK 54 TELEPHONE NUMBER 6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 6a SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION O PLANS SUBMITTED O STORM WATER CALCULATIONS SUBMITTED O SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTED 7 WHY LID IS NOT PRACTICABLE FOR THIS PROJECT SITE 7a REASON NOT PRACTICABLE O TECHNICAL O ECONOMICAL O OTHER 8 PLANNED STORM WATER MANAGEMENT FEATURES when LID is not practicable 9 SIGNATURES COMMENTS O APPROVED O DISAPPROVED Project Manager PM Date O APPROVED O DISAPPROVED Design Manager DM Date O APPROVED O DISAPPROVED EV Department Eng EDE Date O APPROVED O DISAPPROVED FEAD ROICC Date O APPROVED O DISAPPROVED Commanding Officer Date WAIVER FORM INSTRUCTIONS Parentheses at top of form Fill in the classification UNCLASSIFIED CONFIDENTIAL etc in the parentheses at the top of the form Block 1 Enter today s date or due date of contract deadline The Navy standard date format is YYYYMMDD Example 200070131 Block 2 The format is YYMMDD This suspense date should be completed by the Environmental Department Engineer EDE and or Engineer In Charge EIC Enter the standard date the response is due to the contractor e g 30 days of receipt of contractors proposal or Enter the date the response is due to the contractor if the review is time sensitive e g 3 10 days of
146. S Environmental Protection Agency are considering mandatory treatment and control of storm water Conversely low impact development LID techniques offer a suite of Best Management Practices that maintain or restore predevelopment hydrology It mitigates the adverse effects of construction projects on water quality by cost effectively reducing the volume and pollutant loading of storm water before it reaches the receiving water bodies LID utilizes strategies that infiltrate filter store evaporate and or retain runoff close to its source LID further reduces installation reliance on aging storm water management infrastructure References a thru f provide requirements and guidance for LID This DON policy sets a goal of no net increase in storm vvater volume and sediment or nutrient loading from major renovation and construction projects In order to support this goal as well as reduce reliance on conventional storm water collection systems and treatment options this policy directs that LID be considered in the design for all projects that have a storm water management element LID will be implemented where possible to assist DON installations in complying with references a and b as well as all applicable State and Federal requirements for sustainable development In those infrequent situations where LID is not appropriate given the characteristics of the site the Navy and Marine Corps are authorized to establish a waiver process that i
147. SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition provides the table for the SHL for your specific project e For SHL A use Chapter 5 For SHL B use Chapter 6 For SHL C use Chapter 7 In the chapter determined by Step 4 find the table referred to in the detail from Chapter 4 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition by Step 3 In the first column find the duct or pipe size If the exact size is not liste d use the next larger size Ducts are assumed to be of SMACNA standard construction and pipes are assumed to be Schedule 40 water pipes If pipes are insulated or of heavy construction the weight of the duct or pipe must be determined and the weight column in the tables must be used to select the proper braces Once the appropriate row in the table has been found move to the right to read the size requirements for the hangers braces and bolts Step 8 In the same row under the column Connection Type to Structural Member find the connection type designated by a capital letter A through H For SHL A use the connection level determined in Step 2 to find the connection type Step 9 Find the connection type in the first column in Table 8 1 in Chapter 8 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition Move to the right in the same row to find sizes for the expansion anchors bolts spreader sizes and angle connectors for connecting to the supporting structure Step 10 Find a detail in
148. SSURE EXCEEDS 75 OF WATER HEATING SYSTEM DESIGN PRESSURE ASME THERMAL EXPANSION TANK SIZE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER S RECOMMENDATION COMBINATION TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE GAUGE INSTALL WITHIN 12 OF WATER HEATER OUTLET PROVIDE FULL PORT VALVE AND ROUTE TO FLOOR DRAIN RECIRCULATION PUMP PROVIDE AQUASTAT ONLY IF REQUIRED BY CODE WITH LETTER TO OWNER REQUIRING RELEASE OF LIABILITY NON MOVING WATER PROMOTES LEGIONELLA SOLENOID VALVE FREEZE PROTECTION VALVE IC FP 035 INSTALL ON COMMON SOLAR HOT WATER RETURN LINE TO DISCHARGE ON ROOF VALVE AND TEE TO REMAIN UN NSULATED FAN AND COIL UNIT SIZED TO DISCHARGE AT LEAST 6 000 BTUH PER COLLECTOR 3 PORT VALVE TO DIVERT COLLECTOR RETURN FROM STORAGE TANKS TO THE FAN COIL DUCT DISCHARGE THROUGH NEAREST OUTSIDE WALL STANDALONE SOLAR HOT WATER SYSTEM Esmee W H WITH TRIPLE SOLAR STORAGE TANKS SCALE NONE CWS 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkikkkkikkkkkkkkkikkkkikkkkikkkkikkkkikkkkikkkkkkkkkkkkkikikokok This specification section contains proprietary products k k k kk k kk k k k k k k k k kk kk k k kk k k k k k k k k k k kk kk kk k k kk kk k k k k kk k k k k kk k k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k SECTION 22 33 30 05 22 INTEGRATED PV THERMAL SYSTEM 05 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publicat
149. TROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH FCCCHR FCCCHR Manual 198869 Manual of Cross Connection Control SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 2 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL ICC LCC IPC 2009 International Plumbing Code MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS MSS SP 110 2010 Ball Valves Threaded Socket Welding Solder Joint Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP 58 2009 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials Design and Manufacture Selection Application and Installation MSS SP 69 2003 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application ANSI Approved American National Standard MSS SP 80 2008 Bronze Gate Globe Angle and Check Valves NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum NEMA MG 1 2009 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 11 1977 R 2007 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 90A 2009 Errata 09 1 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NSF INTERNATIONAL NSF NSF ANSI 61 2010a Drinking Water System Components Health Effects PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION PPFA PPFA 01 2004 Firestopping Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL SAE SAE 01508 2009 Hose C
150. The cost of all tear out and rework shall be at the Contractors expense not the expense of the subcontractor s 27 2 Construction Mock Up The Contractor shall build a construction mock up of every joint juncture and transition between materials products and assemblies of products specified in the different sections to be installed Work will not begin until the mock up is satisfactory to the Contracting Officer Mock ups may be part of the permanent construction and shall shall demonstrate the proper installation sequence and workmanship required for the Air Barrier System installation to provide an airtight envelope conforming to the Performance Requirements specified in this Section Select a representative locations for mock up of each different condition found on the project incorporating but not limited to the following a Typical exterior wall with parapet b Wall air barrier system c Exterior cladding materials d Roofing e Roof air barrier system f Window louver and door frame and sill g Air barrier seal around windows door and louvers h Insulation i Flashing interface with air barrier system j Exterior wall corner conditions k Junction between exterior wall and roof systems 1 Junction between exterior wall and foundation m Typical construction control and expansion joints n Typical penetrations and gaps illustrating materials interface and seals o Typical penetratio
151. The piping shall be extended to all fixtures and equipment The rainvater SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 15 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 harvesting piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture except flush valves or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures Supply piping to fixtures hydrants and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement 3 1 1 2 Cutting and Repairing The vork shall be carefully laid out in advance and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided Damage to building piping wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved 3 1 1 3 Protection of Fixtures Materials and Equipment Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt water chemicals and mechanical injury Upon completion of the work the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned adjusted and operated Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment 3 1 1 4 Mains Branches and Runouts Piping shall be installed as indicated Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without sp
152. UFC 3 400 10N Design General Mechanical Requirements UFC 4 721 10 Design Navy and Marine Corps Bachelor Housing 3 1 3 Unified Facilities Guide Specifications UFGS UFGS 15080 Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems UFGS 15950N Testing Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC Systems 3 1 4 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE ASHRAE 52 2 1999 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size ANSI ASHRAE 55 2004 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy ASHRAE 62 1 2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality ASHRAE 90 1 2004 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings e Standard 90 1 2004 User s Manual ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook ASHRAE Humidity Control Design Guide for Commercial and Institutional Buildings 3 1 5 Other Industry National Roofing Contractors Association NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual fifth edition International Code Council ICC International Building Code 2003 IBC 1 of 14 Enclosure 1 4 1 Acronyms ANSI American National Standards nstitute CFM cubic feet per minute CMS cubic meter per second F Fahrenheit HVAC heating ventilating and air conditioning ICC International Code Council MERV Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value 5 1 Definitions 5 1 1 Sensible Cooling Load Heat gain that causes a change in dry
153. VAS systems must not be subject to intermediate season no heat no cool shutdown or any other non emergency shutdown Individual room heating cooling equipment must have occupant control but may be subject to intermediate season heating cooling curtailment as directed by local command Systems must be designed to minimize the transmission of sound between apartments The designer will provide a psychrometric analysis documenting that the system is designed to properly maintain the space temperature and relative humidity at the required 0 4 or 1 Occurrence Outside Design Conditions The system must provide the capability to condition ventilation air and maintain space relative humidity less than 60 percent over the full range of cooling load Note Conditioning of ventilation air is not required for facilities not otherwise air conditioned 6 1 4 8 1 3 Exhaust Systems A central ducted bathroom exhaust system will be used instead of individual exhaust fans for each space The exhaust system must run continuously and be interlocked with the building supply air system The exhaust duct for each space must have a manual volume damper accessible from the space for proper balancing Install an exhaust grille constructed of corrosion resistant material just outside each shower stall and bathtub Exhaust 7 of 14 Enclosure 1 systems must be designed to minimize the transmission of sound betvveen apartments Exhaust from moisture producing equi
154. a Rules for Public Swimming Pools with the following exception Do not provide an integral vacuum system as called for in 15A NCAC 18A 2518 g The pool chemistry is maintained by the PW Utilities The cleaning is done by the pool operators We do not want pool operators to have access to the pump room which would be necessary if an integral vacuum system were installed 107 Filter rooms should have a pedestrian door and an 8 x8 roll up door for forklift and pallet access Provide differential pressure gage across each filter to be easily read while standing in front of filter 7 2 09 ENERGY 108 Building thermal envelope assemblies shall at a minimum meet the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90 1 with the following exceptions 2 10 10 109 Metal and wood studs walls shall be 6 with R19 insulation 2 10 10 13 110 Mass walls shall have a minimum of R10 rigid insulation between wythes of masonry or on the exterior of the massive layer Insulation in the cells of CMU does not fill this requirement 2 10 10 111 Roof insulation shall be R30 except for metal panel construction where blanket insulation is placed between purlins and metal panels the insulation may be R19 2 10 10 112 Windows shall meet ATFP requirements laminated meet ASHRAE 90 1 prescriptive requirements No tilting sashes are permitted 2 10 10 14 SECTION 26 56 00 00 22 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 06 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1 REFERE
155. able Additionally operating linkages shall be designed and constructed to have a 2 to 1 safety factor when loaded with the maximum required damper operating force Linkages shall be brass bronze galvanized steel or stainless steel Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings and walls for access to all concealed damper operators and damper locking setscrews For field installed control dampers a single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inches and no higher than 72 inches The maximum damper blade width shall be 12 inches Larger sized dampers shall be built using a combination of sections Frames shall be at least 2 inches wide Flat blades shall have edges folded for rigidity Blades shall be provided with compressible gasket seals along the full length of the blades to prevent air leakage when closed The damper frames shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air leakage Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 25 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 2 2 The leakage rate of each damper when full closed shall be no more than 2 cfm per sq foot of damper face area at 1 0 inches water gage static pressure 3 2 Control Valves 9 2 Valve Assembly Valve bodies sh
156. ace port T b RFI EMI filters c One spare VFD of each model provided fully programmed and ready for back up operation when connected PART 3 EXECUTION Soi INSTALLATION Perform the installation under the supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation of DDC systems Sele BACnet Naming and Addressing Coordinate with the EMCS Owner and provide naming and addressing consistent with existing buildings already loaded on the EMCS server All DDC controllers shall have a Camp Lejeune unique instance number and all Site Building Controllers shall have a Camp Lejeuene unique name a MAC Address Every BACnet device shall have an assigned and documented MAC Address unique to its network For Ethernet networks document the MAC Address assigned at its creation For ARCNET or MS TP assign from 4 to 128 b Network Numbering Assign unique numbers to each new network installed on the BACnet internetwork Provide ability for changing the network number either by device switches network computer or field operator interface The BACnet internetwork all possible connected networks can contain up to 65 534 possible unique networks c Device Object Identifier Property Number Assign unique Device Object Identifier property numbers or device instances for each device on the BACnet internetwork Provide for future modification of the device instance numb
157. ainee a printed 8 5 by 11 inch hard copy of all visual aids used Upon completion of the Phase I Training each trainee should fully understand the project s DDC system fundamentals The training session shall include the following a Review of O amp M Manual Network Drawing Equipment Flow Diagram Sequence of Operation Wiring Valve Schedule Damper Schedule Bill of Material OO 1 O OT sx S b Netvork 1 Communication Equipment 2 Configuration Setup of Program 3 Backup Procedures c Mechanical Equipment Flow Diagram Wiring amp Terminations Hardware Interlocks Sequence of Operation Program Decisions and Illustrations of How Program Meets the Sequence of Operation 6 Global Programming Affecting Each Piece of Equipment Oe Q N P q Building Data Base Alarm Management Trend Management Building Global Interlocks System Load Shedding amp Demand Limiting Utility Data Water Steam Solar OT P gt Q N FP n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 47 2D COMBAT ENGIN 3 T e System Tools Network Equipment Supervisory Controllers Equipment Controllers Archives H M 6 3 Phase II Training Operation Provide Phase II Training shortly after completing Phase I Training The Phase II training session shall last one day and be conducted at the DDC system workstation at a notebook computer connected t
158. al number securely Page 15 affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent vill not be acceptable q Fixture weight and effective projected area EPA shall not exceed the pole requirements for wind loading Provide wind loading calculations r Roadway and area luminaires shall have an integral tilt adjustment of 5 to allow the unit to be leveled in accordance with ANSI C136 3 s Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with NEMA C136 31 t Provide LED Luminaire IESNA LM 79 Report and LED Luminaire IESNA LM 80 Report Wiring All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp locking or latching style connectors Twist style wire nuts are not acceptable 3343 Power Supply Units UL 1310 Power Supply Unit PSU including drivers shall meet the following requirements a Minimum efficiency of 85 b Drive current per LED shall not exceed 525mA 10 c Rated to operate between ambient temperatures of 30 C and 40 C 450 C d Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected ranging from 120 V to 277 V nominal e Operating frequency 50 60 Hz f Power Factor PF Greater than or equal to 0 90 g Total Harmonic Distortion THD current Less than or equal to 205 Re PCC Part 15 Class b i Reduction of Hazardous Substances ROHS compliant j Luminaires under a covered structure such as canopies shall be UL listed with a soun
159. all be NSF listed for the service intended 2 5 9 Dye Injection System Add description here 2 5 10 Chlorine Injection System Add description here 112 5 11 Unpressurized holding Tank Add description here 112 5 12 Booster Pump Pumps shall be electrically driven single stage centrifugal vith mechanical seals suitable for the intended service Pump and motor shall bel integrally mounted on a cast iron or steel subbase close coupled with an overhung impeller and supported by the piping on which it is installed The shaft shall be one piece heat treated corrosion resisting steel with impeller and smooth surfaced housing of bronze The pump shall be UL listed rated for potable water shall have the required certifications and shall be NSF listed for the service intended and meet the requirements of NSF ANSI 61 The pumps shall be selected for maximum energy efficiency SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 12 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 Motor shall be high efficiency type and totally enclosed fan cooled and shall have sufficient horsepower for the service required Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across the line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with START STOP switch in cover Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1 Pump motors smaller than 1 hp Fractional horsepower pump motors shall have integral thermal overload
160. all be designed for 125 psig minimum vorking pressure or 150 percent of the operating pressure vhichever is greater Valve stems shall be Type 300 series stainless steel Valve leakage ratings shall be 0 01 percent of rated Cv value Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class 150 steel or stainless steel valves shall meet the requirements of ASME B16 5 Cast iron valve components shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 126 Class B or C 9 2 2 Butterfly Valves Butterfly valves shall be the threaded lug type suitable for dead end service and for modulation to the fully closed position with stainless steel shafts supported by bearings non corrosive discs geometrically interlocked vith or bolted to the shaft no pins and EPDM seats suitable for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F Valves shall have a means of manual operation independent of the actuator 255 Three Way Valves Three way valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic 3 2 4 Valves for Chilled Water Condenser Water and Glycol Fluid Service a Bodies for valves 1 1 2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze with threaded or union ends Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass bronze or iron Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections Bodies for valves from 2 1 2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections b Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze except that va
161. all be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications 1 8 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install concealed valves expansion joints controls dampers and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible through access doors 139 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 13 91 Local Regional Materials Use materials or products extracted harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within a 150011 mile radius from the project site if available from a minimum of three sources 1 9 2 Environmental Data Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for the following products 1 1 1 9 3 Rainwater Harvesting System Provide a sustainable design technique of rainwater harvesting To achieve Low Impact Development LID and LEED credit s provid
162. am pits within mechanical rooms Steam lines should be counter flowed from an exterior manhole Steam condensate receiver pumps should be steam pressure powered Do not use 557 duplex condensate Hu neers electric 7 7 pumps eause Minimize use of steampits Those required must be raised 18 inches 450 mm above finish grade and equipped with a full grated top Steampits are required for the connection and valving of building service lines Drip legs can be direct buried with steam trap above ground in a doghouse if the steam pit is not required for other reasons Steampits are required at low points and end of mains in order to gravity drain condensate for cold start up of distribution system Hastall tyve traps in these 1oeadions Fhe firsttrap is the nermaHPhigh pressure drip retin ning to the stones pressure exeoods 15 psig r si i 1 25 10 Do not use FRP pipe for buried steam condensate lines Use schedule 80 black steel pipe in condensate systems Steam tunnels and trenches are preferred by base utilities over direct buried preinsulated steam and condensate systems Trench tops may double as a sidewalk where appropriate Direct buried steam and condensate piping shall be drainable dryable testable Do not include thermal performance testing or sensors ie Delete from guide specification Edit the testing specification as follows Socket welded pipe does not need to be tested As an alternative to radiographic testing
163. ame and signature of laboratory inspector 1 Recommendations on retesting Building Air Tightness Test Reports G The Building Air Tightness Test analysis and report shall be submitted not later than 10 days after the test Thermography Test Report G The Thermography Test analysis and report shall be submitted not later than 10 days after the test SD 07 Certificates Prior to commencing the Work submit copies of manufacturers current ISO certification Membrane primers sealants and adhesives shall be included Prior to the air tightness test the contractor shall submit evidence that the test equipment has been calibrated within the n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 4 1 past year 5 QUALITY ASSURANC Gl The Contractor shall engage a prequalified third party organization including independent testing laboratories specialized in the types of air barrier system inspections and tests to be performed These tests include but not limited to Building Air Tightness Test Procedures Building Air Thermography Survey Procedures a Air Barrier Association of America Quality Assurance Program ABAAQAP An Air Barrier Association of America Quality Assurance Program ABAA QAP shall be implemented to provide a level of assurance that specific products are installed correctly and specific services are being provided to the highest possible standards An ABAA QAP monitors standards and specificatio
164. ams for guide rail support brackets Provide all layout drawing information required by ASME A17 1 Include the following a Provide 2 hour fire resistant hoistway construction Hoistway enclosure may not contain any access panels or doors in the walls or ceiling except as necessary for the operation maintenance and service of the elevator Hoistway entrance assemblies must have a minimum fire rating of 1 hour All hoistway door frames must be filled with grout to a height of 5 Hoistway enclosure must be plumb and have flush surfaces on the hoistway side Provide a lifting beam at the top of the hoistway for installation of elevator equipment Design all machine beam support with hoistway wall beam pocket construction mm o e o S g Hoistway ventilation must be provided in accordance with IBC Chapter 30 3 2 2 1 Only mechanical equipment and systems that are directly related to the installation and operation of the elevator may be installed in the elevator hoistway In addition pipes ducts and conduit not related to the elevator system must not penetrate the hoistway 3 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit 3 3 1 Elevator Hoistway Pit Ladder A hoistway pit ladder must be provided for all pits with a depth of Detail pit ladder on the detail drawings of the elevator pit Include the following a Provide a minimum clearance of 4 5 between ladder and the hoistway wall b Ladder must extend a minimum of 4 above the hoistway entranc
165. and ends the sequence of installation and each sub contractor s responsibility to ensure airtight joints junctures and transitions between materials products and assemblies of products specified in the different sections to be installed by the different sub contractors 6 BUILDING AIR TIGHTNESS TEST TECHNICIAN RESPONSIBILITII Gl 02 Gal Airtightness The testing technician shall have a minimum of 2 years documented experience in air tightness using the fan pressurization methods in accordance vith USACE Test protocol on building of similar size and complexity Have ABAA certification The technician shall a Describe the test procedures test apparatus and analysis method b Perform the Building Air Tightness Test c Demonstrate a thorough working knowledge and understanding of building construction and in particular exterior envelope systems and HVAC systems d Participate in identifying deficiencies in the building construction upon failure of a test to meet the specified leakage rat e Submit a report of each air tightness test whether successful or not f Submit a report of each thermography test identifying problem areas 6 2 Thermography a Level I Thermography Certification or have documented equivalent education and training meeting this requirement b A thorough knowledge of the operation of the particular infrared imaging system being
166. and what the project is and why this project is necessary Block 6a Select supporting documentation supporting the project The site plans storm water calculations and relevant supporting documentation for the selected LID design or the planned storm water management feature if LID is not selected should be submitted along with the waiver form to ensure a thorough review Block 7 Explain which LID goals could not be achieved and why achieving LID goals was not practicable Provide sufficient descriptions drawings and other necessary information to confirm the applicability of the Waiver The final approval authority should fully understand the reasons LID is not practicable for the project s Submit supporting documentation Block 7a Select a reason LID is not practicable for this project e g conflicts with existing State laws policies or requirements contaminated sites Block 8 Describe the planned storm water management features if LID is not selected Provide sufficient descriptions drawings and other necessary information to evaluate the proposed project Submit supporting documentation Block 9 All parties must review approve disapprove and sign the form for a LID waiver Enclosure 2 REVIEW AND CERTIFICATION FOR DOD MINIMUM ANTITERRORISM STANDARDS FOR BUILDINGS CHECKLIST Instructions The information outlined in this document shall be used to provide the minimum requirement for development of DOD Minimum Ant
167. anger and factory insulation jacket 2 1 12 Pipe Insulation Pipe insulation and coverings shall be applied in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS as called out for steam piping to 15 psig Solar thermal collector system piping insulation shall be capable of withstanding 250 degrees F except that piping within 1 5 feet of collector connections shall be capable of withstanding 360 degrees F 2 1 13 Expansion Tank Expansion tank fill and drain assemblies mechanical thermostats air scoops and vents in compliance vith best practices as described by solar thermal collector system manufacturer Expansion tank shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl and as applicable for a working pressure of 125 psig Expansion tank acceptance volume total tank size and arrangement shall be as shown Tank shall be provided with pressure relief valve Tank shall be provided with precharged pressure as shown 2 1 14 Heat Transfer Fluid Solar collector loop fluid shall be uninhibited USP food grade propylene glycol and shall be mixed with distilled or demineralized water to form a 50 percent by volume propylene glycol solution as shown Conform to the following a Liquid useful temperature range of 40 to 400 degrees F b Non ionic high dielectric non aqueous non reactive stable fluid which does not corrode copper aluminum iron or steel or attack plastics c Flash point exceeding
168. angers and Supports Selection and Application ANSI Approved American National Standard NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code SOLAR RATING AND CERTIFICATION CORPORATION SRCC SRCC CSCWHSR 2004 Summary of SRCC Certified Solar Collector and Water Heating System Ratings SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 3 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 SRCC OG 100 1995 Operating Guidelines for Certifying Solar Collectors U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD MIL STD 101 1970 Rev B Color Code for Pipelines amp for Compressed Gas Cylinders U S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION GSA CID A A 59617 Basic Unions Brass or Bronze Threaded Pipe Connections and Solder Joint Tube Connections UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 27 03 2002 Reprint May 2011 Standard for Safety Flat Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels Third Edition UL 1741 2010 Standard for Safety Inverters Converters Controllers and Interconnection System Equipment for Use With Distributed Energy Resources Second Edition UL 580 2006 Reprint Jul 2009 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies UL 790 2004 Reprint Oct 2008 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings 1 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION kk kk kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kk k k kk k k The system specified herein contains a
169. apons only When using laser inserts it is recommended you use the provided screen Training Facility Design Document 2 2 7 Window Restrictions Training Room For nevv facilities no vvindovvs should be included in the Training Room f there are vvindovvs present make sure they are completely sealed so NO ambient natural light can pass through 2 2 8 Environmental Requirements Training Room The FATS Virtual Trainer is designed for indoor use and is typically operated in room temperatures that are adiusted to personnel specifications Air conditioning is recommended for temperature and humidity control controllable via dedicated thermostat The heat load from the tvvo system Virtual Trainer is equivalent to that of 3 office PCs a monitor 2 projectors sound amplifier and a printer and the total power would not exceed 1400w The training room environment should maintain temperatures and climate that is within the operating range of the training system The safe operating temperature limits for the Virtual Trainer system are between 5 and 35 degrees Centigrade or 41 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit The relative non condensing humidity limits are 20 to 85 percent The Virtual Trainer is designed to operate successfully in a wide variety of climates and conditions Still avoid dust producing items leaking sandbags dirt floors deteriorating camouflage materials etc especially around the desks projectors and weapons Excess d
170. approved installer of the sheet metal roofing manufacturer for installation of all components of roofing and solar assemblies 1 4 3 Operation and Maintenance Data Submit solar thermal collecting system data package for the following items a Troubleshooting guide for solar energy systems b Solar thermal collector warranty c Operation instructions d Preventive maintenance and inspection data including a schedule for system operators 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the veather excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation and dirt and dust or other contaminants Deliver photovoltaic system to job site properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage Adequately protect equipment placed in storage at the construction site that can be affected by weather conditions dirt or other contaminants and construction activities 1 6 SYSTEM WARRANTY Provide written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of the entire building Integrated PV Thermal System against defects in materials and or manufacturing workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of complete installation and government acceptance 1 6 1 Solar Thermal System Warranty Provide written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace integrated thermal system components against defects in materials and workmanship for a
171. aratus and analysis methods to be employed for the Thermography Test Air Barrier Systems G Manufacturer s catalog data specifically indicating which items are in this contract Prior to commencing the Work submit manufacturers product data samples and complete set of standard details for the air barrier membrane system showing a continuous plane of air tightness throughout the building envelope SD 06 Test Reports Test Reports G The inspection and testing agency will submit a certified written report in duplicate of each inspection test or similar service to the Contractor with duplicate copies to the Contracting Officer not later than 10 days after each test Report Data Written reports of each inspection and test or Similar service shall include all the Report items described in ASTM E 1827 Additionally the report shall also include the following information a Date of Issue b Project title and number c Name address and telephone number of testing agency d Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections e Names of individuals making the inspection or test f Designation of the Work and test method g Identification of product and Specification Section h Complete inspection or test data i Test results and an interpretation of test results 20 Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements k N
172. ards for Buildings Checklist has been completed and is attached The construction contract plans specifications and related design analysis documentation have been checked and approved for accuracy and coordination Project Design Team Leader Signature Date Camp Lejeune Antiterrorism Officer Signature Date 11 NAVFAC ELEVATOR DESIGN GUIDE FINAL DRAFT CONTENTS Page CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Paragraph 1 1 D R R 1 1 1 2 COPE 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 4 Content and aaa a a r rA ea er CEES ESEA ESEE 1 1 CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DEVELOPMENT 2 1 Criteria Docentes s u a a Se ee u pa atya 2 1 2 2 Client Survey and Traffic Study u aa aaa LARDA ARTAR iesea 2 X 2 3 Building S pporting Systefins u AAA RAUL 2 X 2 4 Contract Vehicles and 2 X 2 5 Application of Elevator Types to Facility Design 2 X 2 6 Elevator Design Requirements for Overseas Projects 2 X CHAPTER 3 ARCHITECTURAL 3 1 Elevator Machine Room 22 54 ys na iS Sau ua Suku 2 X 3 2 Elevator H isiYyay n s s n 2 X 3 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit
173. aspects of the VFD 3 VFD Features VFDs shall have the following features a A local operator control keypad capable of 1 Remote Local operator selection with password access 2 Run Stop and manual speed commands 3 All programming functions 4 Scrolling through all display functions b Digital display capable of indicating 1 VFD status 2 Frequency 3 Motor RPM 4 Phase current n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 31 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 4 5 Fault diagnostics in descriptive text 6 All programmed parameters Standard PI loop controller with input terminal for controlled variable and parameter settings User interface terminals for remote control of VFD speed speed feedback and an isolated form C SPDT relay which energizes on a drive fault condition An isolated form C SPDT auxiliary relay which energizes on a run command A metal NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors NEMA 4 with heater for outdoors An adjustable carrier frequency with 16 KHz minimum upper limit A built in or external line reactor with 3 percent minimum impedance to protect the VFDs DC buss capacitors and rectifier section diodes Programmable Parameters VFDs shall include the following operator programmable parameters a b 226 5 Upper and lover li
174. at will be affected Section 01 45 00 00 20 QUALITY CONTROL for coordination with contractors independent testing and inspection agency Section 01 45 00 05 20 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL for coordination with contractors independent testing and inspection agency 13 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 3 3 Design Requirements All materials methods and expertise that contribute to an airtight building enclosure and controls infiltration or exfiltration of air located SECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 1 1 in the non accessible construction shall not exceed the maximum air permeance noted in this specification This includes sealing of all penetrations joints and transitions between materials products and assemblies forming the airtightness of the building enclosure which is the air barrier system or ABS a Provide materials and installation methods for a complete building Air Barrier System providing an airtight barrier conforming to the Performance Requirements specified in this Section betveen the conditioned interior building atmosphere and the exterior atmosphere and located as shovn on the Dravings b Provide materials and installation methods to bridge and provide an airtight connection seal conforming to the Performance Requirements specified in this Section All materials to be compatible in adhesion and chemically The following air leakage pathways and gaps including but
175. ated weapon storage e Compressor Room The compressor room houses the air compressor and or the carbon dioxide CO2 bottles providing compressed air or CO for weapon recoil of non Bluefire weapons e Office The office provides a work base for the Training Facility manager 2 2 TRAINING ROOM 2 2 1 Overview Training Room The Training Room s will house the Virtual Trainer a system operator 1 3 instructors and observers A diagrammatic layout is in Attachment A 2 2 2 Size Requirements Training Room Training Rooms should measure 45 x 25 13 716m X 7 62m for a single screen system Minimum requirements for a single screen system are 15 x 30 4 572m x 9 144m If multiple systems are being utilized the room dimension will increase Refer to Attachment A The physical dimensions of the Training Room should be sufficient to accommodate a 5 10 15 lane Virtual Trainer with an Instructor Station firing line for trainees projector screen speakers and training furniture Training room dimensions must take into account the critical placement of FATS system components relative to each other as identified in the facility diagrams in Attachment A For example the projector must be placed a distance of 230 5 842m from the screen while the firing line must be located 20 6 069m from the screen Placement of other system components can be customer defined as long as maximum cable lengths are not exceeded and p
176. ated when the clothes dryer operates for say 1 hour per day Calculate Space Latent Load and Sensible Load due to occupants all other sensible loads to be taken by the space cooling and heating equipment Male seated typing 4 persons X 255 BTUHL 1020 BTUHL 4 persons X 255 BTUHS 1020 BTUHS Latent Load BTUHL 0 68 X X A grHR rearranging to A grHR BTUHL 0 68 Therefore A grHR 1020 BTUHL 0 68 X 60 CFM 25 grHR VAS HR Conditions must be Space HR 67 gr 25 gr 42 grHR Therefore The VAS cooling coil leaving conditions are about 47 7 Fdb 46 3 Fwb 45 1 Fdpt amp 42 grHR To maintain the VAS 70 RH in ductwork requirement of the ITG Encl 1 6 4 7 1 1 reheat is needed to obtain a VAS reheat coil leaving conditions of 54 6 Fdb 70 RH 49 5Fwb 45 1 Fdpt amp 42 grHR Sensible Load BTUHS 1 08 X CFM X At Fdb rearranging to At Fdb BTUHS 1 08 X CFM Therefore At Fdb 1020 BTUHS 1 08 X 60 CFM 15 75 Fdb Page 11 of 14 Enclosure 2 Therefore Space temperature without other sensible loads would be VAS reheat coil leaving conditions of 54 6 Fdb 15 75 Fdb 70 35 Fdb Adding in the estimated sensible load from the refrigerator of 375 BTUHS raises the room temperature as follows At Fdb BTUHS 1 08 X CFM 375 BTUHS 1 08 X 60 CFM 5 75 Fdb Therefore Space temperature with the 4 persons and the refrigerator will be 70 35 Fdb 5 75 Fdb 76 1 Fdb All other sensible loads wi
177. ation and inside of sleeve Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast iron pipe Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe cast iron pipe galvanized sheet metal with lock type longitudinal seam or plastic Except as otherwise specified the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS The annular space between pipe and sleeve between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated Sleeves through below grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 1 2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and concrete masonry wall as specified above Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant Pipe sleeves in fire rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 3 124 2 Flashing Requirements The annular space betveen the flashing and the bare pipe or betveen the flashing and the metal jacket covered insulation shal
178. ator Paint all dual temp and chilled vvater steel pipe and equipment before insulation is installed This in addition to shop primer and or mill coating 1 28 10 Keep in mind fall hazards vvhen locating equipment Provide necessary fall protection In refrigerated rooms boxes specify all evaporators on a condensing unit to defrost together separate evaporator condensing unit pairs should defrost non concurrently Provide phase monitors on all 3 phase equipment For chillers the following shall be included a phase unbalance protection b over under voltage protection c phase loss protection d Delay of break timer to delay automatic restarts e non critical fault delay f programmable auto manual restart g load and line side monitoring For all other equipment only phase loss phase reversal and phase unbalance need to be monitored Reset shall be automatic upon correction of the fault 31 32 33 34 36 On chillers and large condensing units provide core filter dryer on suction line as available as standard option On chillers and large condensing units provide liquid and suction line service valves as available as standard option Do not permit welding on chillers Water connections shall be by grooved coupling or flanges Provide 16 20 mesh strainer on water inlet Do not permit grooved couplings in piping system other than the chiller connection 6 13 8 Extruded Tee s in copper pipin
179. attached to the control panel control device actuator and sensor Have the labels and wording approved by the BAS Owner prior to installation 31 16 Network and Telephone Communication Lines When telephone lines or network connections by the Government are required provide the Contracting Officer at least 60 days advance notice of need Provide 1 inch conduit and Cat 5 cable from the Supervisory Building controller SBC to the network connection most likely in the telephone equipment room n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 39 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 3 2 INTERFACE WITH EXISTING EMCS Interface the new DDC system with Camp Lejeune s existing EMCS Obtain Government approval before connecting new DDC system to the EMCS Any device connected directly to the EMCS must be approved by the Designated Approving Authority by following procedures listed in the DIACAP instruction Complete installation and programming includes graphic creation scheduling alarming lard management scheduling and trending The server is located in Building 24 workstations are located at Buildings 1005 1023 and 1202 Only Johnson Controls factory trained technicians approved by the EMCS Engineer will be allowed to program the EMCS TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT
180. avoid restriction Provide thermal conductivity material within the well to fully coat the inserted sensor 3 1 10 4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors Provide outside air temperature sensors in weatherproof enclosures on the north side of the building away from exhaust hoods and other areas that may affect the reading Provide a shield to shade the sensor from direct sunlight Sis LL Energy Meters Locat nergy meters as indicated Connect each meter output to the DDC system to measure both instantaneous and accumulated energy usage 3 1 12 Damper Actuators Where possible mount actuators outside the air stream in accessible areas 3 1 13 Thermometers and Gages Mount devices to allow reading while standing on the floor or ground as applicable 3 1 14 Pressure Sensors Locate pressure sensors as indicated 3 215 Component Identification Labeling Using an electronic hand held label maker with white tape and bold black block lettering provide an identification label on the exterior of each new control panel control device actuator and sensor Also provide labels on the exterior of each new control actuator indicating the full open and full closed positions For labels located outdoors use exterior grade label tape and provide labels on both the inside and outside of the panel door or device cover Acceptable alternatives are white plastic labels with engraved bold black block lettering permanently
181. ay doors shall be open 3 All HVAC systems shall be de energized 4 All appliances shall be de energized 5 All plumbing traps shall be full 6 The contractor shall prepare the building for testing in accordance with Section 4 5 2 of the USACE Test Protocol 0 ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 10 f The contractor shall first test the building by pressurizing the building positively relative to outdoors at multiple pressures up to at least 0 30 in v g inches vater gauge From the positive pressure test the building leakage rate shall be measured in accordance vith USAC Protocol g The Contractor shall then perform a negative pressure test at multiple pressures up to at least 0 30 in w g and compare the results to the positive test Where differences of 10 exist between the tests the contractor shall investigate the causes and resolve the reasons for the differences The Contractor shall retest the building h The acceptable building air leakage is 0 04 CFM SF cubic feet per minute per square foot maximum at a differential pressure of 0 3 in w g If the building fails to meet the acceptable leakage rate us techniques described in ASTM E 1186 to located the leak sources then correct the deficiencies in the building construction then retest Fog agents used to identify leaks shall be the non toxic type T i For each test the contractor shall take a minimum of 12 readings at various pressure
182. be installed at every landing Access to the insert key must be limited to 22 elevator personnel 8 2 2 Elevator guide Rails T section type guide rails must be used for all car and counterweight guide rails Rail shanks must be painted with one coat of black enamel 8 2 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit 8 2 3 1 The hoistway pit stop switch must be a push to stop type elevator stop switch 8 2 3 2 Structural steel pit channels must be installed to serve as mounting surfaces for main guide rails counterweight guide rails car buffers and counterweight buffers 8 2 4 Corrosion Protection All phosphorus metal elevator equipment and building components in the elevator hoistway must be painted with a minimum of one coat of black enamel paint except where a coating of paint may affect the operation of the elevator and equipment 8 3 Elevator Cab and Landing Fixtures 8 3 1 General Requirements Unless otherwise specified by the Designer of Record all elevators in a facility must be designed with cab and landing fixtures and panels of identical and uniform design material finish and components All fixtures and devices must be engraved to identify function and operating positions and backfilled with a contrasting color 8 3 1 1 Vandal Resistant Fixtures and Buttons All cab and landing fixtures must be industry standard vandal resistant design with metal buttons and positive stop assembly design 8 3 1 2 LED Illumination All illuminating
183. ble Use plenum rated cable for circuits under 100 volts in concealed accessible spaces Examples of these spaces include HVAC plenums within walls above suspended ceilings in attics and within ductwork All wiring in mechanical rooms and mezzanines shall be run in conduit 2 4 3 1 Power Wiring The following requirements are for field installed wiring a Wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and rated for 300 VAC service b Wiring for 120 V circuits shall be insulated copper 14 AWG minimum and rated for 600 VAC service 2 4 3 2 Analog Signal Wiring Field installed analog signal wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer s installation instructions Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have a 20 AWG drain wire Each wire shall have insulation rated for 300 VAC service Cables shall have an overall aluminum polyester or tinned copper cable shield tape 2 5 FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES 2 5 1 Duct Smoke Detectors Provide duct smoke detectors in HVAC ducts in accordance vith NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A except as indicated othervise Provide UL listed or FM approved detectors designed specifically for duct installation Provide photoelectric type detectors Detectors shall detect both visible and invisible particles of combustion and shall not be susceptible to undesired operation by changes to relative humidity Provide each
184. ble regardless of whether or not they are included in this list ABAAS Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Standard ASME A17 1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators ASME A17 3 Safety Code for Existing Elevators and Escalators ASME A18 1 Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts ASME QEI 1 Standard for the Qualification of Elevator Inspectors NFGS 14210 NAVFAC Guide Specification Electric Traction Passenger Elevators 29 NFGS 14210 NAVFAC Guide Specification Electric Traction Freight Elevators NFGS 14240 NAVFAC Guide Specification Hydraulic Passengers Elevators NFGS 14240 NAVFAC Guide Specification Hydraulic Freight Elevators NFPA 70 National Electric Code NEC IBC International Building Code IPC International Plumbing Code SEI ASCE 24 Flood Resistance Design and Construction FEMA 302 February 1999 NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures Part 1 Provisions TI 809 04 31 December 1998 TRI Service Instruction Seismic Design for Buildings Elevator Industry Field Employee Safety Handbook National Elevator Industry Inc Vertical Transportation Standards Copies of this standard may be obtained from National Elevator Industry Inc 400 Frank W Burr Blvd Teaneck NJ 07666 6801 Telephone 201 928 2828 UFC 3 600 01 Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities 2 1 2 The design criteria provided i
185. boveground piping valves fittings and accessories shall be as specified for domestic water supply Underground piping from the fiberglass reinforced plastic modular storage tank to the rainwater harvesting system shall be installed in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 3 2 1 Modular Storage Tank Prepare the area where the tank is to be installed in accordance with Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL Install the tank in accordance with the tank manufacturer s written instructions Provide the required types and number modules inspection ports inlets outlet and overflow connections and accessories as recommended by the tank manufacturer Tank shall be vented to atmospheric pressure 113 2 2 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank Install the tank in accordance with the tank manufacturer s written instructions Provide the required types and number of anchors strap sizes and number of straps and strap locations as recommended by the tank manufacturer Tank shall be vented to atmospheric pressure 13 23 Submersible Feed Pump Follov the dravings and the manufacturer s vritten instructions for installation of the submersible feed pump Connect the pump controls to the rainvater control system 3 2 4 Debris Filter Install the debris filter in accordance with the filter manufacturer s written instructions Install such that the top cover shall be flush with finish grade after installation is complete
186. by suppliers is typically 50 000 hours or greater and the first cost of exterior LED luminaires may be significant site Warranty shall assure that the product will perform as claimed in terms of useful life Provide Fixture Useful Life Certificate The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract Page 11 a Provide a vritten five year on site replacement varranty for material fixture finish and vorkmanship On site replacement includes transportation removal and installation of nev products 1 Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against substantial deterioration such as blistering cracking peeling chalking or fading 2 Material warranty shall include a All power supply units PSUs including drivers b Replacement when more than 10 of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly s are defective or non starting b Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty certificates prior to final payment 8 PONER SOURCE Use a photovoltaic power source OPERATIONAL SERVICE Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement take back program Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenanc
187. cally tested at a pressure of indicated by solar energy collecting system manufacturer for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours prior to installation of insulation Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test pressure No loss of pressure shall be allowed Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested Caulking of joints shall not be permitted 5 22 Cleaning of Piping System piping shall be flushed vith clean fresh vater prior to concealment Of any individual section and prior to final operating tests Prior to flushing piping relief valves shall be isolated or removed Solar collectors shall be covered to prevent heating of cleaning fluid unless SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 20 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 cleaning is performed during hours of darkness The solution shall be circulated through the section to be cleaned at the design flow rate fora minimum of 2 hours 32565 Posting Framed Instructions Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted where directed These instructions shall include a system schematic and wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system Condensed operating instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures balanced flow rates methods of checking the system for normal safe op
188. case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C LED LUMINAIRES UL 1598 and UL 8750 Provide luminaires as indicated Provide luminaires complete with LED light source and power supply unit Details shapes and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer Luminaires of similar designs light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved pe popi General Requirements a Luminaire shall be UL listed for wet locations and wiring cavity must be field accessible for service or repair needs Page 14 Luminaire shall be full cutoff or fully shielded as defined by IESNA RP 8 Alternatively the full cutoff can be validated by meeting the following IESNA TM 15 B U G Ratings backlight uplight and glare 1 Maximum uplight U rating of UO for residential areas and U1 for all other areas 2 Maximum glare G rating equal to GO for residential areas and G2 for all other areas Optical system for roadway and area luminaires shall be sealed and rated for IP 66 as defined in EN 60529 Luminaire shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory For all mast arm mounted luminaires a wildlife shield shall be included in the fixture to prevent wildlife access to the fixture Color of the luminaire shall be bronze unless specified otherwise The
189. ccordance with the manufacturer of the air compressor 2 4 3 Environmental Requirements Storage Room It is recommended that this room should be heated and cooled in a similar manner as the rest of the facility especially since it will house the Co2 canisters 2 4 4 Lighting Requirements Storage Room General purpose lighting should be provided for the storage room 2 4 5 Access Compressor Room The Storage Room should easily accessible from the Training Room If the customer purchases a compressor the access to the room should be through double doors vvith a minimum vvidth of at least 6 to allow for the compressor skid to be moved in the room n the interest of safety only authorized personnel should have access to this room 2 5 OFFICE An office is recommended for the Training Room manager This office will be used for Training Room scheduling and general management activities Size access furnishing and environmental control of this office are left to customer discretion 2 6 Safety Concerns All safety issues need to be addressed locally by the customer Some of the safety concerns are e Steps in the training area should be lighted to prevent students from tripping Exposed Cables hoses could be a possible trip hazard CO Nitrogen canisters need to be secured so they don t fall or get knocked over Fire extinguisher should be available Exit lighting Emergency shutoff Every weapon needs to be treated as a live
190. ce and rain 2 2 2 Transmitters Provide transmitters with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC linear output scaled to the sensed input Transmitters shall be matched to the respective sensor factory calibrated and sealed Size transmitters for an output near 50 percent of its full scale range at normal operating conditions The total transmitter error shall not exceed 0 1 percent at any point across the measured span Supply voltage shall be 12 to 24 volts AC or DC Transmitters shall have non interactive offset and span adjustments For temperature sensing transmitter drift shall not exceed 0 03 degrees F a year 2 242 1 Pressure Transmitters Provide transmitters integral with the pressure transducer n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 23 2D COMBAT ENGIN ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 T MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 2 23 Current Transducers Provide current transducers to monitor motor amperage Current switches may be used to indicate on off status 2 4 Air Quality Sensors Provide pover supply for each sensor sw ol CO2 Sensors Provide photo acoustic type CO2 sensors with integral transducers and linear output The devices shall read CO2 concentrations between 0 and 2000 ppm with full scale accuracy of at least plus or minus 100 ppm 220452 Air Quality Sensors Provide full spectrum air quality sensors using a hot wire
191. ces illuminating Alarm button key operated Independent Service switch momentary push button communication device for emergency voice communication with both the elevator MR and an emergency desk that is manned continually 7 days a week and 24 hours a day Behind a locked service panel toggle type cab lighting on off switch toggle type two speed cab fan switch key operated Hoistway Enable switch for Hoistway Access Operation key operated In Car Inspection Operation switch 8 3 4 Elevator Landing Fixtures 8 3 4 1 A hall call riser must be provided adjacent to each elevator 8 3 4 2 All elevator hall call fixtures must be engraved with the ASME A17 1 Elevator Corridor Call Station pictograph Pictograph must be engraved and backfilled with a contrasting color 8 3 5 Hoistway Access Switches All elevators must be equipped with hoistway access operation with switches at the top and bottom terminal landings Locate switch 1800 mm 6 feet above floor level within 300 mm 12 inches of elevator hoistway entrance frame or with the ferrule exposed when located in 24 the elevator entrance frame 8 3 6 Emergency Lock Box For every elevator a keyed lockbox must be provided at the FEO Designated Landing The lockbox must be flush mounted in the wall adjacent to and within 20 of the hoistway entrance assembly Locate lockbox at a height of 60 above the landing sill The lockbox must have a minim
192. chlorites AWWA B300 SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 9 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 e Liquid Chlorine AWWA B301 f Gauges Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type Elastic Element ASME B40 100 g Thermometers ASTM E 1 Mercury shall not be used in thermometers 251 2 Pipe Insulation Material Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 07 00 00 22 MECHANICAL INSULATION 2 2 PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS Pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 2 23 VALVES Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment Except as specified herein valves are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application Valves shall conform to the following standards Description Standard Ball Valves Threaded Socket Welding Solder Joint Ends MSS SP 110 Bronze Gate Globe Angle and Check Valves MSS SP 80 Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI 221 22 CSA 4 4 Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003 2 4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation For Cross Connection Control amp Hydraulic Research Provide reduced pressure principle type assembly backflow preventers on each in coming potable service water line to the rain water harvesting system In addition provide backflow preventers in accordance to the North Carolina Bu
193. cialty Transformers UL 508A 2001 Reprint Feb 2010 Industrial Control Panels UL 916 2007 Reprint Jun 2010 Standard for Energy Management Equipment rz DEFINI 1 2 1 ANSI TIONS ASHRAE Standard 135 ANSI ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet A Data Communication Protocol for Building A developed devices to 1 2 2 utomation and Control Netvorks referred to as BACnet ASHRA Gl BACnet to provide a method for diverse building automation communicate and share data over a network et Building Automation and Control Network the common name for the communication standard ASHRAF 135 The standard defines methods and n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 2 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 protocol for cooperating building automation devices to communicate over a variety of LAN technologies 2 3 BACnet IP An extension of BACnet Annex U defines this mechanism using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks A BACnet IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number See also BACnet Broadcast Management Device 2224 BACnet Internetwork Two or more BACnet networks possibly using different LAN technologies connected with routers In a BACnet interne
194. closures must be made of cement fiber cement or composite materials manufactured specifically for use in high moisture locations 6 1 4 8 1 2 Ventilation Air Supply VAS Systems New facilities must employ separate dedicated constant volume central ventilation air supply systems that continuously supply dehumidified and reheated tempered 100 percent outside air to all occupied spaces The design intent of these systems is not to provide total space heating and cooling but to provide total ventilation load and space latent load cooling and to capture any available VAS sensible cooling to meet a portion of the space sensible cooling load systems must continuously condition and deliver ventilation air to each occupied space The ventilation air must be dehumidified to maintain a 55 F dew point Fdpt 12 8 C dew point Cdpt and reheated tempered enough to maintain ventilation air supply relative humidity less than 70 within VAS ducts This reheat is to reduce potential for mold growth within the VAS ducts due to moisture carryover from the cooling coil WAS supply air temperature must not be at or below room design dew point temperature to avoid condensation on the supply air registers WAS supply air dew point temperature must be below room design dew point temperature in order to meet the room latent load Humidification of ventilation air during periods of low ambient humidity is not required unless otherwise indicated Facility central
195. coating must be capable of surviving ASTM B 117 Salt Fog environment for 1000 hrs minimum without blistering or peeling The coating shall demonstrate gloss retention of greater than or equal to 90 for 1000 hrs exposure QUV test per ASTM G 154 UVB 313 Lamps 4 hr Condensation 50 C Luminaire shall be tested according to IEC 60068 2 14 for thermal shock Luminaire shall be fully functional after completion of testing Luminaire shall be tested according to IEC 60068 2 30 damp heat steady state for high humidity and high temperatures Luminaire shall be fully functional after testing Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc plated steel If a lens not integral to the LED is used construct the luminaire optical enclosure lens window of clear and UV resistant acrylic or tempered glass 80 of the luminaire material by weight should be recyclable at end of life Produce a minimum efficacy of 60 lumens per Watt driven at 350mA or a minimum of 50 lumens per Watt driven at 525mA tested per IESNA LM 79 Theoretical models of initial raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable Incorporate modular electrical connections and construct luminaire to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics heat sinks power supply units and electrical components using only a simple tool such as a screwdriver Luminaire shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number date of manufacture and seri
196. com Use Siemon s CT couplers CT F C6 C6 20 for faceplates or equivalent equipment approved by AWN Ensure a back board per comm room is available for AWN Backboard shall be 8 H x 4 W x 4 A C grade plywood with two coats of fire retardant paint Ensure there is access to base telephone s Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus bar TMGB for any bonding TMGB should be 4 inches by min 10 inches by 4 inch thick copper pre drilled with a minimum 6 green sheathed stranded wire double lug connected and crimped extended from the electrical main distribution panel and building steel Labeling shall be in accordance with industry standards which includes room and port in the room building number is not needed Provide a complete as built floor plan with location of all ports and numbering on ports in dwg and pdf format to base telephone and AWN Install additional backboards in the comm room to allow mounting of AWN cable head and lightning protection at demark point for OSP cabling All conduit should be in accordance with MCB Camp Lejeune Telephon Specifications Section 27 10 00 and MCB Camp Lejeune Telephone Specifications Section 33 82 00 Also unless otherwise stated current base tele specs 27 10 00 will apply along with all references it contains If you have questions contact Base tele at 910 451 9439 4760 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 61
197. control circuits operate at the proper voltage and are free from grounds or faults f Verify all required surge protection is installed g Verify the A C Power Table specified in CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS is accurate h Verify all DDC network communications with the EMCS function properly including commanding set points and load shedding i Verify air handling unit and VAV box coil performance by commanding all valves 100 percent open in both heating and cooling Record the entering and leaving air temperatures Record the entering water temperature This data shall be printed stored and saved for future reference J Verify each digital controller s programming is backed up k Verify all wiring components and panels are properly labeled l Verify all required points are programmed into devices m Verify all TAB work affecting controls is complete n Verify all valve and actuator zero and span adjustments are set properly o Verify all sensor readings are accurate and calibrated p Verify each control valve and actuator goes to normal position upon loss of power q Provide 48 hours of trend data to verify all systems are functioning as specified Trend reports will verify control set point adjustment per the temperature re set schedules as required by sequence of operation Provide the following Trends 1 Chilled water System supply temperature actual return
198. control procedures and testing results Every job site report including the Building Air Tightness Test Reports and the Thermography Test Report is data based and revieved by the Quality Assurance Program Manager 5 Third Party Audits Third party audits are part of the ABAA QAP Quality Assurance Program Independent auditors shall reviev the Contractor s and Installer s adherence to the ABAA QAP vhich includes installation instructions manufacturer s recommendations and the overall quality of the air barrier n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 5 system All administrative and managerial aspects of the ABAA Quality Assurance Program such as accreditation audits conflict resolution and documentation reviev are handled by third party organizations The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 5 days in advance of a scheduled audit and a report shall be provided to the Contracting Officer vithin 14 days folloving the onsite audit A minimum number of audits ABAA vill conduct is based on the contract value Hovever if additional audits are required by the Contracting Officer due to installation procedures not meeting the QAP the contractor shall bear all additional costs 5 4 Pre Construction Conferences The Contractor shall organize pre construction conferences between th sub contractors involved in the construction of the air barrier system to discuss where each sub contractor begins
199. ct steam heat Insulate pipes with rigid insulation where pipes are subjected to being stepped on or damaged such as low above ground lines and steam pits cellular glass insulation is preferred Specify flange gaskets to be metal spiral wound ASME B16 20 Pump Packages In general do not specify pump heat exchanger packages Most of our mechanical rooms are on the smallish side Pump packages require maintenance space on all sides If specifying a pump package designer must work out general lay out of package and mechanical room to ensure maintenance access 12 31 07 All steam pressure powered pumps PPP shall have a direct acting pressure regulator on the motive steam Provide pressure gages on the motive steam line and the condensate collection system Regulator to be set for 20 psi higher than the condensate back pressure Regulator shall be 20 from PPP or the line between the regulator and the pump shall be oversized 12 31 07 Ensure that all steam heated equipment with modulating steam control valves have vacuum breakers air vents and gravity drain to a condensate receiver Show sufficient details to ensure contractor pipes accordingly The mechanical room plan shall also allow for this If a pumping trap is required show it on the drawing 12 31 07 Valves for 100psi and greater steam shall be steel bodied valves 1 28 10 11 92 Camp Lejeune has introduced flooded vertical heat exchangers that use line pressure
200. d NAVCRANECEN waiver process With the exception of SPS WHE Navy shore activities may request one time authority from NAVCRANECEN to procure WHE The following actions are required in order to obtain a waiver for self procurement of WHE 1 Submit a letter signed by the Commanding Officer Public Works Officer or equivalent of the activity responsible for procuring the WHE requesting authority to procure the WHE The letter shall include a description of the WHE including where it will be located the reason for requesting a waiver the method of procurement the process for having the WHE certified and a point of contact POC concerning operational technical issues 2 NAVCRANECEN will call the POC to discuss NAVCRANECEN s role in the procurement reviewing or preparing the specification reviewing the submittals and or being on site for the acceptance test 3 NAVCRANECEN will issue a letter either approving the waiver noting the conditions for approval or denying the waiver NAVCRANECEN INSTRUCTION 11450 1A e Navy shore activity self procurement of WHE With the exception of applications listed in paragraph 5 a Navy shore activities may procure new or replacement WHE with capacities of less than 20 000 pounds If Navy shore activities elect to procure WHE NAVCRANECEN technical and or quality assurance assistance is available upon request Contact the NAVCRANECEN Director of Project Management and Business at telephone 757 967
201. d in pursuit of energy conservation Professional Engineers provide unbiased engineering services and are legally bound to uphold standards of ethics Because of this high level of professionalism experience and expertise a PE is required to validate each Statement of Energy Performance that is used to apply for the ENERGY STAR label Namely the PE s key role is to verify that all data supplied to EPA is correct and the building is fully functional in accordance with industry standards The PE is not obligated to count up each individual building attribute but should be able to use his her professional judgment to assess whether indoor environmental quality standards have been met in the building and have not been compromised in pursuit of energy conservation Additionally the PE must verify that all information provided in the Statement of Energy Performance and on the Data Checklist is accurate Services performed by PEs in connection with the ENERGY STAR label shall in no way be construed to diminish or otherwise modify the responsibilities or liability of the original designer or operator of the building Validating a Statement of Energy Performance and Data Checklist requires the PE to review two categories of user provided information These verifications by the PE are one step in the rigorous review process of a label application For more on the on the labeling application process which is at the responsibility of the building owner manag
202. d outputs to and from a device although the term sometimes describes software or virtual I O See also Points 1 2 31 1 Expansion Unit An 1 0 expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital controller 1 2 32 IP subnet Internet protocol IP identifies individual devices with a 32 bit number divided into four groups from 0 to 255 Devices are often grouped and share some portion of this number For example one device has IP address 209 185 47 68 and another device has IP address 209 185 47 82 These two devices share Class C subnet 209 185 47 00 n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 6 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T 1253 Local Area Network LAN A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the same basic communication technology throughout 1 2 34 MAC Address Media Access Control address The physical node address that identifies a device on a Local Area Network 1 2 35 Master Slave Token Passing MS TP ISO 8802 3 The standard LAN for BACnet MSTP uses twisted pair wiring for relatively low speed and low cost communication up to 4 000 ft at 76 8K bps 1 2 36 Native BACnet Devic A device that uses BACnet as its primary if not only method of communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways A system that
203. d rating of A k Driver shall be dimmable and compatible with a standard Dimming Control cireuit of 0 10V 3 4 LED Light Source a Luminaires must be rated for operation in ambient temperatures of 30 C to 40 C 50 C b Correlated Color Temperature CCT shall be in accordance with Page 16 2 NEMA ANSLG C78 377 Nominal CCT 3000 K 3045 175 K or Nominal CCT 3500 K 3465 245 K Nominal CCT 4000 K 3985 275 K or Nominal CCT 4500 K 4503 243 K Nominal CCT 5000 K 5028 283 K or Nominal CCT 5700 K 5665 355 Nominal CCT 6500 K 6530 510 K c Color Rendering Index CRI shall be Greater than or equal to 80 for 3000 K 3500 K Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 K 6500 K Surge Protection Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Lov vaveforms as defined in IEEE C62 41 2 Scenario 1 Location Category C 36 LED Luminaire Daylighting Controls All exterior parking lot drive and front aisle areas shall be controlled such that exterior luminaires shall not operate during hours of daylight Controls may include a combination photocell plus time switch or an energy Management system Controls shall allow automatic on and off settings based on daylighting plus timed off settings after expected activity ends Energy management system shall have pre determined control strategies to include automatic dimming for adaptive standards Dimming controls shall work wi
204. d to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment to direct the expansion movement and to prevent buckling swaying and undue strain Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent 3 1 6 2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing Seismic Requirements Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support piping headers and equipment but not shown shall be provided Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 2 1 62 32 Pipe Hangers Inserts and Supports Installation of pipe hangers insert
205. de for each input and output point physically connected to a digital controller point name point description point type Analog Output AO Analog Input AI Binary Output BO Binary Input BI point sensor range point actuator range point address BACnet object associated BIBBS where applicable and point connection terminal number Typical schedules for multiple identical quipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract criteria All points shall adhere to the Camp Lejeune standard naming conventions 1 4 1 3 Control System Components List Provide a complete list of control system components installed on this project Include for each controller and device control system schematic name control system schematic designation device description manufacturer and manufacturer part number For sensors include point name sensor range and operating limits For valves include body style Cv design flow rate pressure drop valve characteristic linear or equal percentage and pipe connection size For actuators include point name spring or non spring return modulating or two position action normal power fail position nominal control signal operating range 0 10 volts DC or 4 20 milliamps and operating limits 1 4 1 4 Control System Schematics Provide control system schematics Typical schematics for multiple identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or
206. de interfacing software if a meter is used that is different than the existing meters at the Activity to ensure compatibility within the metering system Connect to the AMI network utilizing Provide 1 1 SPARE PARTS Provide the folloving spare parts a Power Meter two for each type used with batteries b Communications interface one for each type used l 4 METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE Page 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and to the requirements specified herein Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise 1 1 Existing Condition Survey The Contractor shall perform a field survey including inspection of all existing equipment resulting clearances and nev equipment locations intended to be incorporated into the system and furnish an existing conditions report to the Government The report shall identify those items that are non vorkable as defined in the contract documents The Contractor shall be held responsible for repairs and modifications necessary to make the system perform as required 1 1 1 Existing Meter Sockets In some cases the existing meter sockets vill have to be replaced to accommodate the nev electrical meters An existing socket is considered unacceptable for any of the following conditions a It is a non ANSI form factor meter socket b It is weathered b
207. de summary pages where appropriate 1 Building Floor Plans Provide a floor plan graphic for each of the building s floors and roof with dynamic display of space temperature and other important data If used indicate and provide links to sub plan areas If possible use the project s electronic drawing files for the graphic backgrounds Provide clear names for important areas such as Main Conference Room Include room names and numbers where applicable Include features such as stairwells elevators and main entrances Where applicable include the mechanical room HVAC equipment and control component locations with corresponding links to the n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 21 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T equipment graphics 2 Sub plan Areas Where a building s floor plan is too large to adequately display on the screen sub divide the plan into distinct areas and provide a separate graphic display for each area Provide same level of detail requested in building floor plan section above 3 HVAC Equipment Provide a graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment such as a fan coil unit VAV terminal or air handling unit Equipment shall be represented by a two or three dimensional drawing Where multiple pieces of equipment combine to form a system such as a central chiller plant o
208. ded 70 watt conforming to ANSI C78 1381 b Single ended wattage as indicated conforming to ANSI ANSLG C78 43 Page 13 2 Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings LER as follovs a Upward efficiency of 0 percent 1 150 399 vatts minimum 41 LER for closed fixture 2 400 999 vatts minimum 53 LER for closed fixture minimum 59 for open fixture 3 1000 plus watts minimum 77 LER for closed fixture b Upward efficiency of 1 percent 10 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 56 LER for closed fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 62 LER for closed fixture minimum 64 for open fixture 3 1000 plus watts minimum 88 LER for open fixture c Upward efficiency greater than 20 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 62 LER for closed fixture minimum 77 for open fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 65 LER for closed fixture 22 2 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge HID Luminaires UL 1029 and ANSI C82 4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer CWA or regulator high power factor type minimum 90 percent Provide single lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C Ballasts shall be a Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected b Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life HID ballasts shall have a solid state igniter starter with an average life in the pulsing mode of 10 000 hours at the intended ambient temperature Igniter
209. ding outside air and other common shared conditions Devices are located near controlled equipment with physical input and output points limited to 64 or less per device except for complex individual equipment or systems Failure of any single device will not cause other network devices to fail BACnet Smart actuators B SA profile and sensors B SS profile communicating on a network with a parent device ar xempt from stand alone requirements 1 2 51 SSAA System Security Authorization Agreement The SSAA is a local document authorizing the use of the IP networks on Camp Lejeune 1 2 52 Supervisory Controller Supervisory Controller is the upper level controller on the building s n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 8 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEGEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 MS TP bus It provides building wide points scheduling and interface with programming tools 1 2 53 Supervisory Building Controller SBC The Supervisory Building Controller is the point of connection betveen the Camp Lejeune EMCS network IP and the building level control network MS TP The hardware at this location that provides the connection is referred to as the SBC Since the EMCS network uses the Marine Air Ground Task Force Regional Area Network MRAM Ethernet network using TCP IP any equipment connecting to the Camp Lejeune EMCS m
210. ditions applicable to the project Indicate manufacturer s commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and or reuse QUALITY ASSURANCE Drawing Requirements Page 8 1 4 1 1 Luminaire Dravings Include dimensions effective projected area EPA accessories and installation and construction details Photometric data including zonal lumen data average and minimum ratio aiming diagram and computerized candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings 1 4 1 2 Poles Include dimensions wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS 5 pole deflection pole class and other applicable information For concrete poles include section and details to indicate quantities and position of prestressing steel spiral steel inserts and through holes initial prestressing steel tension and concrete strengths at release and at 28 days 42 Pressure Treated Wood Pole Quality Ensure the quality of pressure treated wood poles Furnish an inspection report for wood poles of an independent inspection agency approved by the Contracting Officer stating that offered products comply with AWPA M6 and RUS Bull 1728F 700 standards The RUS approved Quality Mark VQC on each pole vill be accepted in lieu of inspection reports as evidence of compliance vith applicable ANPA treatment standards 1 4 3 Design Data for Luminaires a Distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in IESNA HB 9 b Computer
211. dule 1 Physical Characteristics 1 Module 2 Operating Characteristics 4 Module 3 Energy Consumption U u u 6 Modul 4 8 Module 5 Illumination 10 Module 6 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 14 Appendix A Contact Information 18 Appendix B Professional Engineer Qualifications 19 Appendix C Example Copy of a Statement of Energy Performance 20 Appendix D Example Copy of Data Checklist 21 Appendix E List of Building Type Definitions 22 Appendix F Outdoor Air Ventilation Rates for Health Care Facilities 25 Appendix G How to Apply for the ENERGY STAR Label 28 iti Module 1 Physical Characteristics 1 1 Objective All recorded physical characteristics displayed on a building s Statement of Energy Performance must be verified when applying for the ENERGY STAR label 1 2 Background and Expectations of PE To assess the energy performance of a building all physical characteristics must be accurately portrayed b
212. dust and vibration where they are located 2 lu 2555 Stand Alone Control Provide stand alone digital controllers capable of meeting the complete sequence of operation with and without network connectivity being connected to the EMCS 2 1 2 4 Internal Clock Provide internal clocks for all BACnet Building Controllers B BC and BACnet Advanced Application Controllers B AAC using BACnet time synchronization services Automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator designated controller The system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving time 221 225 Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support the required control communication trends alarms and messages Protect programs residing in memory vith EEPROM flash memory or by an uninterruptible pover source battery or uninterruptible pover supply The backup pover source shall have capacity to maintain the memory during a 72 hour continuous pover outage Rechargeable pover sources shall be constantly charged vhile the controller is operating under normal line pover Batteries shall be replaceable vithout soldering Trend and alarm history n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 15 2D COMBAT ENGIN ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 T MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 collected during normal operation shall not be lost during power outag
213. dway and area luminaires for a minimum of 15 years Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 15 year period 4 6 2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified othervise 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 5 1 Wood Poles Stack poles stored for more than 2 weeks on decay resisting skids arranged to support the poles without producing noticeable distortion Store poles to permit free circulation of air the bottom poles in the stack shall be at least 305 mm one foot above ground level and groving vegetation Do not permit decayed or decaying vood to remain underneath stored poles Do not drag treated poles along the ground Do not use pole tongs cant hooks and other pointed tools capable of producing indentation more than 25 mm one inch in depth in handling the poles Do not apply tools to the groundline section of any pole Page 10 1 5 2 Concrete Poles Do not store poles on ground Support poles so they are at least 305 mm one foot above ground level and growing vegetation 2 54 3 Fiberglass Poles Do not store poles on ground Support poles so they are at least 305 mm one foot above ground level and growing vegetation Do not r
214. e agreement green lease options and submit to Contracting Officer Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and or reuse Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury When such a service is not available local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 s PRODUCT COORDINATION Products and materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified inl Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Section 33 71 01 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION Section 33 70 02 00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNDERGROUND and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 22 LUMINAIRES UL 1598 and UL 8750 Provide luminaires as indicated Provide luminaires complete with lamps of number type and wattage indicated Details shapes and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer Luminaires of similar designs light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as approved ANE Lamps Page 12 2 2 1 1 High Pressure Sodium HPS Lamps ANSI ANSLG C78 42 Wattage as
215. e Design Analysis For swimming pool enclosures museums and other highly humidified buildings the designer must perform a moisture vapor diffusion analysis for exterior walls and roof structures using the dew point method as shown in American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook Fundamentals 2001 Chapter 23 using design weather conditions as stated in paragraph 6 1 4 1 1 of this document The wall analysis must indicate any planes of condensation Acceptable wall design shall either NOT contain any planes of condensation or the walls SHALL have the capability to drain vent the moisture to the exterior 1 weep holes Corrective action i e redesign must occur if the design fails to meet these requirements 3 of 14 Enclosure 1 6 1 4 HVAC Systems 6 1 4 1 HVAC System Cooling Dehumidification Capability For facilities authorized air conditioning HVAC system cooling dehumidification capacity must be designed to meet the following 6 1 4 1 1 Outside Design Conditions for all locations Refer to UFC 3 400 02 and utilize the Design Criteria Data available from the referenced Air Force Combat Climatology Center website For Design Build projects the data may be defined in the RFP documents 6 1 4 1 1 1 Cooling Systems Humid Area Facilities Specialized De humidification Systems and 100 Outside Air Systems For design use the 1 Occurrence value of outside air
216. e Telephone manages all Ethernet connections to the IP networks 1 2 25 Firmware Software programmed into read only memory ROM flash memory electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM or erasable programmable read only memory EPROM chips 1 2 26 Gateway Communication hardware connecting two or more different protocols similar to human language translators The Gateway translates one protocol into equivalent concepts for the other protocol In BACnet applications a gateway has BACnet on one side and non BACnet usually proprietary protocols on the other side Lg 2 27 Half Router A device that participates as one partner in a BACnet point to point PTP connection Two half routers in an active PTP connection combine to forma single router 1 2 28 Hub A common connection point for devices on a network 1 2 29 Internet Protocol IP TCP IP UDP IP A communication method the most common use is the World Wide Web At the lovest level it is based on Internet Protocol IP a method for conveying and routing packets of information over various LAN media Two common protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol UDP and Transmission Control Protocol TCP UDP conveys information to well known sockets without confirmation of receipt TCP establishes sessions which have end to end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery 1 2 30 Input Output 1 0 Physical inputs an
217. e a separate and dedicated 100 outdoor air conditioning system feeding neutral air to each individual zone space using direct expansion DX cooling hot water heating pre heat and reheat using hot water and energy recovery from exhaust air using total enthalpy heat wheel Hot water heating will be from the hot water supply via natural gas VRF systems shall meet ASHRAE 15 and 34 standards Refrigerant systems shall meet ASHRAE 15 and 34 standards International Mechanical Code and Local and or State Mechanical Codes as required System design shall ensure the refrigerant volume of a system does not exceed the refrigerant concentration limit per unit volume as defined in ASHRAE 34 and the local and State Mechanical Codes for the smallest occupied space In addition and if used VRF systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the detailed requirements as attached Ground Source Heat Pumps GSHPs Geothermal well field with condenser water loop serving ground source heat pumps GSHP located throughout the facility Consider supplemental energy such as steam heated hot water or hot water from other energy sources such as gas 5 of 8 electric etc as required to support condenser vvater temperatures during the heating season if required and backed up by analyses Analyze best heat source if required using life cycle cost analysis Consider utilizing a closed circuit cooling tower to supplement the ground source condenser water
218. e a complete rainvater harvesting and management system complete ready for use The SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 8 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 system shall be complete and shall serve plumbing fixtures vithin the facility in accordance vith LEED guidance The system shall collect treat store and distribute rainvater as non potable vater in sufficient capacity to achieve the corresponding vater efficiency reduction for LEED credit s The system shall be provided in accordance vith the most stringent requirements from the applicable government criteria including the requirements recommendations of the following o EPA Manual EPA 625 R 04 108 September 2004 Guidelines for Water Reuse Web link is http www epa gov nrmrl pubs 625r04108 625r04108 pdf o NCDENR Technical Guidance Stormwater Treatment Credit for Rainwater Harvesting Systems web link is http h2o enr state nc us su documents RainvaterHarvesting Approved pdf o The Texas Manual on Rainwater Harvesting latest edition web link is www twdb state tx us publications reports RainwaterHarvestingManual 3rdedition pdf North Carolina Rules Regarding Water Reuse See North Carolina ADMINISTRATIVE CODE Effective April 1 2001 Pages 31 36 of 44 See also ENR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION T15A 02H 0200 All of the water closets urinalsl and hose bibbs shall be served by non potable water To distinguish non potable water fro
219. e codes and standards results in many different and often conflicting interpretations by the hundreds of federal state and municipality Authorities Having Jurisdiction AHJ across the country and around the world NAVFAC is the AHJ for VTE in Navy and Marine Corps Facilities The NAVFAC Elevator Subject Matter Expert SME manages the NAVFAC VTE Program and provides interpretation and direction for the application of safety codes and standards as they apply to VTE in Navy and Maine Corps facilities NAVFAC Elevator Design Criteria provides specific direction for the application of the non government standards that apply to elevators and other types of VTE The criteria provides consistent and uniform methods to be used to comply with the performance language of the applicable building and safety codes In addition NAVFAC Design Criteria specifies quality and performance requirements for specific elevator components and systems to ensure sustainability effective performance optimum life cycle costs and energy efficiency Scope This document provides NAVFAC Elevator Design Criteria that applies to all elevators and other types of VTE in Navy and Marine Corps facilities References References are provided in Appendix A The listing is not exclusive the elevator design and installation must comply with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes The elevator and facility design must comply with th
220. e edition in effect at the time of contract award Content and Format This document is arranged by design disciplines Within each chapter the content is arranged by major elevator systems and components CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DEVELOPMENT 2 1 Criteria Documents The project development process shall determine the need for elevators through compliance with the most stringent requirements of the following criteria a The new DoD ABA Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Standard DoD ABAAS and the DEPSECDEF Memorandum b NAVFAC Facility Design Criteria for the facility type under design c NAVFAC Facility Design Program requirements for each specific project 2 2 Client Survey and Traffic Study To determine the elevator types service and quantity necessary for effective elevator service the design process must include a client survey and a traffic study of the proposed facility design The two basic elevator types are hydraulic elevators and electric traction elevators The two categories of service that are recognized by ASME A17 1 are Passenger and Freight 2 2 1 Client Survey and Traffic Study Factors The client survey and traffic study are also conducted to determine requirements for elevator capacities speeds and elevator cab interior dimensions For unique facilities and for facilities with critical demand requirements the traffic study must be performed by a qualified elevator consultant The following factors must be utilized i
221. e met given the standards outlined in ANSI ASHRAE Standard 55 It is the responsibility of the PE to consider all measured data and observations at the time of the site visit and to determine in his her professional opinion whether the building meets the letter and spirit of ASHRAE Standard 55 4 4 Acceptable Thermal Environmental Conditions There are two methods for determining acceptable thermal conditions in occupied spaces as outlined by ASHRAE Standard 55 One method is based on a typical indoor environment with set conditions and the other method assesses thermal conditions in naturally conditioned spaces Naturally conditioned spaces are those spaces controlled by occupants through the opening and closing of windows Given these different methods the PE is expected to give a professional opinion about the capability of the building to provide acceptable thermal environment conditions per guidelines provided by ASHRAE Standard 55 The PE should measure the temperature relative humidity air speed and draft of a representative sample of the occupied interior spaces of the building during occupied hours Please refer to ASHRAE Standard 55 for guidance on acceptable limits of these conditions that are expected to be maintained within a functioning building 4 5 Hints amp Tips Reviewing previous indoor air quality reports or testing adjusting and balancing TAB reports is generally not acceptable as a sole source of information when gi
222. e must be provided by luminaire manufacturer a Infrared Integral to the luminaire Shall detect occupancy by changes in infrared energy within a coverage area and shall be capable of operating between 40 C and 50 C b Microwave Integral to luminaire Shall detect occupancy by transmitting electromagnetic energy into a coverage area receiving direct and reflected energy and monitoring frequency shift between transmitted and received signals When more than one device is used in an area devices shall operate on different frequencies Provide for selective filtering by the sensor to minimize nuisance tripping due to interference from radar or other sources of electronic interference 4 LIGHTING CONTACTOR NEMA ICS 2 electrically mechanically held contactor Contacts shall be rated volts amperes and poles Coils shall be rated volts Rate contactor as indicated Provide in NEMA 411 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6 Contactor shall have silver alloy double break contacts and coil clearing contacts for mechanically Page 18 2 held contactor and shall require no arcing contacts Provide contactor vithl hand off automatic on off selector switch Contactor shall be hermetically sealed TIME SWITCH Astronomic dial type or electronic type arranged to turn ON at sunset and turn OFF at predetermined time between 8 30 p m and 2 30 a m or sunrise automatically changing the s
223. e sill c Provide continuous non slip horizontal rungs for the full height of the pit ladder d Locate ladder within 39 horizontal inches of the hoistway door unlocking device 3 3 2 Elevator Hoistway Pit Sump and Sump Pump All elevator hoistways must be equipped with a sump pit sump pump and permanent discharge piping to a point outside of the elevator hoistway and MR Comply with the following a Minimum sump pump discharge must be 50 gallons per minute per elevator Sump pump and piping must be sized to accomplish this output regardless of head pressure or piping run b Design hoistway sump pit large enough to fully enclose submersible sump pump and control sensors below hoistway pit floor level c Discharge to an approved location that can accommodate a full continuous pump output and does comply with all applicable discharge permits regulations and statutes d Provide fully supported removable grate cover with top of grate flush with pit floor e Coordinate power requirements with Electrical engineer 3 3 2 1 In addition to the requirements of 3 3 2 hydraulic elevator installations must be designed with a sump pump oil sensing control system to allow water to be pumped out of the sump without pumping oil hydraulic fluid from the elevator hoistway pit The sump pump control system must include an audible alarm and visual indicators for water and oil The alarm indicators and controls must be installed in the elevator machi
224. e speed primary pumps for chilled water Optimize the chilled water plant operation via DDC o o gt If the Public Works Department agrees use water cooled chiller instead of an air cooled chiller 14 Interior Room Design Condition Change the design from 75 F dry bulb as shown on Drawing M1 001 to 76 F dry bulb as required by UFC 3 400 10N Paragraph 3 2 1 3 Cooling Indoor Design Conditions 15 Apply the requirements of 2007 Energy Independence and Security Act Optimize the lighting efficiencies as well as meet new ASHRAE 90 1 2007 Optimize equipment efficiencies to improve to beat the EISA 2007act Solar Hot Water EISA 2007 requires 30 minimum of the hot water demand to be provided by solar water heating system if life cycle cost effective Payback period is considered to be 40 years Note some clients may require this feature even if the payback is greater than 40 years Consider 100 of the hot water demand as well Provide solar water heating Develop the hot water system design in conjunction with the HVAC systems in meeting EPACT 2005 Evaluate the domestic hot water system types or combination of types in view of meeting the EPACT 2005 EISA 2007 and the LEED requirements for this project Perform a life cycle cost analysis on these systems and include with the EPACT 2005 calculations Submit 4of8 calculations at the 35 design submittal Select a hot water service system based on fully meeting the
225. e that indoor air quality has not been sacrificed to reduce energy use 6 2 Technology Standard ANSI ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality Note Healthcare facilities may use either ASHRAE Standard 62 or AIA 2001 Guideline for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities Earlier versions of the Standard may be used when properly referenced in building documents if appropriate in the PE s professional judgment 6 3 Background and Expectations of PE According to ASHRAE Standard 62 1 acceptable indoor air quality refers to air in which there are no known contaminants at harmful concentrations as determined by cognizant authorities and with which a substantial majority 80 or more of the people exposed do not express dissatisfaction The stated purpose of the standard is to specify minimum ventilation rates and indoor air quality that is acceptable to human occupants and that minimizes adverse health effects The standard also points out that acceptable indoor air quality may not be achieved in all buildings meeting the requirements of the standard for one or more of the following reasons Because of the diversity of sources and contaminants in indoor air because of the many other factors that may affect occupant perception and acceptance of indoor air quality such as air temperature humidity noise lighting and psychological stress because of the range of susceptibility in the population
226. e used for financial services Relevant businesses include bank branches bank headquarters securities and brokerage firms The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as vaults kitchens used by staff lobbies atria conference rooms and auditoria fitness areas for staff storage areas stairways elevator shafts etc Computer Data Center Computer Data Center applies to spaces specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high density computing equipment such as server racks used for data storage and processing Typically these are raised floor spaces that maintain controlled temperatures and or humidity The air conditioning system for this type of space is usually separate from that used to control the space environment in other parts of the building and is usually separated by walls and doors If an entire facility is listed as a Computer Data Center it is not eligible to receive a National Energy Performance Rating However if the majority of the building space use falls into an eligible category and the Computer Data Center accounts for 10 or less of total floor area the facility is eligible to receive an National Energy Performance Rating Courthouse Courthouse applies to facility space used for federal state or local courts and associated office space The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as temporary holding cells kitchens used by staff lobbies atria conf
227. e49U95 LIW33d abieyosig xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI eads Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolisioc q Jo siseg p so O 4 S3GdN Apioedes paseasou 10 M N LINH Ad ywl d Bieu5Ssid LOAPOYd LNAWNNYSAOD xog 49949 NOLLVOOT aayinoay WHOM JILL 103 4 HINM4d 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd P SO O P SO O lEQ p ule qo yeq poule qoO 9120 xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg 49430 LINH3d xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI BI09dS Aouaby Sulnssi xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg uon lu punoiBi pun LIN 3d xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue suolsiAoid 61090 Aoueby Sulnssi s ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg 4 3EA Buyung O 4 3BA Buryuug O P SO O lEQ poule qO 94eq uononu suo IM LINYAd xx SJUBUIBJIINDAY pue SUOISIAOI e109dS Aouaby Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg 4 3EA Buryuug O P SO O poule qO eyed que 1 une l LINYAd H3 VNV N 1 LN3INNzI3AO S NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM 1111 1 4 3EA Buyung xog 42949 qad nosu A IN 1dd 4044 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd xx SJUSUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo sise
228. eak avvay but move vvith the building during an earthquake Because the direction of forces during an earthquake are unpredictable and can be in any direction it is important to provide restrai nt in the X Y and Z directions vertically laterally transverse and longitudinally Together transverse and longitudinal bracing vvith vertical gravity supports vvill resist seismic loads in all directions The bracing that vvill be referenced in this guidance will provide for the additional members required to resist the horizontal forces during an earthquake Code references in this guidance are based on the policy established by Planning and Design Policy Statement 95 02 which adopted the Inter national Mechanical Code IMC as NAVFAC s sole mechanical code The IMC is published by three entities in the United States including the Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc BOCA the International Conference of Building Officials ICBO and the Southern Building Code Congress International Inc SBCCI Use of these U S Codes for projects outside the continental U S is contingent upon the engineer to determine it to be more strict than what the local requires standard procedure requires the engineer to apply the strictest of U S and local codes in foreign countries e Seismic Bracing for Pipe and Duct All building codes including BOCA require most structures to be designed for a horizontal seismic force The formu
229. earances required for maintenance and operation Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated details shall include loadings and proposed support methods Mechanical drawing plans elevations views and details shall be drawn to scale Modular Storage Tank G Detail drawings showing the size configuration and other information to illustrate the requirements and assembly of the storage tank modules and all required accessories Provide storage tank drawing plans elevations views and details drawn to scale Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank G Detail drawings showing the size configuration and other information to illustrate the requirements and assembly of the storage tank modules and all required accessories Provide storage tank drawing plans elevations views and details drawn to scale SD 03 Product Data Local Regional Materials SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 4 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 Documentation indicating distance betveen manufacturing facility and the project site Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site Indicate relative dollar value of local regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project Environmental Data Materials Documentation indicating percentage of post industrial and post consumer recycled content per unit of product Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content
230. eatment rooms usad Tor cryosurgery procadures with nitrous oxide shall contain provisions forexhausting waste gasas In a ventilation system that recirculatas air HEPA Titers can be usad in lieu of axhausting the airfrom these spacas to the outside In this application tha ratum air shall ba passed through the HEPA fitars before itis introduced into any otherspacas m endoscopic instrument processing room is a room adjacent to the gas trointastinal andoscopy room that is usad for cleaning endoscopic equipment and instruments 8Whan mquim d appropriate hoods and exhaust devicas forthe emoval of Noxious gasas or chemical vapors shall be provided sae Saction 2 1 10 2 4 5 2 and NFPA 99 Tra air movament relationships for laboratories apply between laboratory and adjacant noniaboratory spacas Reference DHHS publication Biosafaty in Microbiological and Biomadical Laboratories CDC and NIH on the COC Web sip Psyehronsetric Chart Total air changes per room for patient rooms intarmadiata care labor delivary covery rooms and labor d lh ry m core postpartum rooms may be reduced to 4 whan supplemental heating and or cooling systems radiant heating and cooling baseboard heating etc a used 4 Dit rential pressure shall b a minimum of 0 01 water gauge 2 5 Pa If alarms ar installed allowancas shall be made to prevent nuisance alarms of monitoring devices 12 ifitis not practica
231. ecklist was completed on the following date INTERIM or PRELIMINARY DESIGN Fill In Project Name Architect Engineer Certification of Antiterrorism Standards Note Edit the team members if necessary Preparers of this document certify the accuracy and completeness of the Antiterrorism Force Protection features of this project Civil Engineer of Record Signature Date Architect of Record Signature Date Structural Engineer of Record Signature Date Mechanical Engineer of Record Signature Date Electrical Engineer of Record Signature Date CAMP LEJEUNE NORTH CAROLINA ANTITERRORISM STANDARDS REVIEW for Fill in Project Name INTERIM or PRELIMINARY DESIGN Review and Certification for Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings Checklist has been completed and is attached The Antiterrorism Force Protection review and related design analysis documentation have been checked and approved by the in house design team Project Design Team Leader Signature Date Antiterrorism Force Protection Team Civil Team Member Signature Date Architectural Team Member Signature Date Structural Team Member Signature Date Mechanical Team Member Signature Date Electrical Team Member Signature Date 10 CAMP LEJEUNE NORTH CAROLINA ANTITERRORISM STANDARDS REVIEW for Fill in Project Name FINAL DESIGN The project specific Review and Certification for Minimum Antiterrorism Stand
232. ecovery from exhaust air or from VAS refrigeration equipment to provide the VAS reheat and reduce the energy consumption necessary to condition ventilation air where savings from heat recovery results in a life cycle cost payback for the heat recovery equipment 6 1 4 8 1 6 Economizer Cycle Economizer cycle will not be used in Navy construction unless required by ASHRAE Standard 90 1 STD 90 1 Full use of the STD 90 1 Economizer Requirements Exceptions shall be taken to avoid economizer use where allowed These exceptions are detailed in the 90 1 User s Manual Section 6 3 1 They include the weather amp capacity exception Table 6 3 1 the residential exception the envelope dominated exception the High efficiency exception and others STD 90 1 Table 6 3 1 lists 1 Cooling Design Wet Bulb Temperature CDwbt ranges and the Number of Hours the Outside Air Design Dry Bulb Temperature is between 55 Fdb 12 8 Cdb and 69 Fdb 20 5 Cdb during the time period of 8 AM to 4 PM The tabulated value is the minimum system size that will require an economizer STD 90 1 Appendix D 1 lists values for the 1 CDvvbt and No of Hours for many locations Engineering Weather Data EWD lists the 1 Cooling Wet Bulb Temperature on page 1 of 18 and lists the Dry Bulb Temperature Hours For An Average Year on page 9 of 18 The column labeled Hour Group LST 09 to 16 may be used to obtain the number of hours for use in STD 90 1 Table 6 3 1 The di
233. ect and clean all HVAC components for proper operation Reviewing previous indoor air quality reports or testing adjusting and balancing TAB reports is generally not acceptable as the sole means to give a professional opinion about the capability of the building to provide acceptable outside air s The PE should make an effort to measure the outdoor airflow directly If this is not feasible due to air handling unit design or configuration the PE should calculate the percentage of outdoor air by mass balance equations s In buildings having repetitive occupant and HVAC configurations direct measurement of a sampling of air handling units may be acceptable Each air handling unit however should be inspected to determine if it is operating properly Central energy management control systems EMCS or direct digital control DDC systems can provide real time information about an air handling unit s operating status PEs may use this 15 information at their discretion as a means to give an opinion about the ability of the building to meet ASHRAE Standard 62 1 6 6 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality Q amp A s the building required to be mechanically ventilated to meet ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Generally yes However some buildings for example K 12 schools were designed to be naturally ventilated Use of natural ventilation systems designed in accordance with Section 5 1 of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 is permitted in lieu o
234. ected to mechanical loads greater than 1 HP electrical loads greater than 10 KW or wherever else specified 2 1 4 6 Timed Local Override Provide a non cumulative adjustable override time for the push of a local override button 2 1 4 7 Time Synchronization Provide time synchronization including adjustments for leap years daylight saving time and operator time adjustments 2 1 4 8 Scheduling Provide operating schedules as indicated with equipment assigned to groups Changing the schedule of a group shall change the operating schedule of all equipment in the group Groups shall be capable of operator creation modification and deletion Provide capability to view and modify schedules in a seven day week format Provide capability to enter holiday and override schedules one full year at a time 2 1 4 9 Object Property Override Allow writeable object property values to accept overrides to any valid value Where specified or required for the sequence of control the Out Of Service property of Objects shall be modifiable using BACnet s write property service When documented exceptions to these requirement ar allowed for life machine and process safeties n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 19 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T 2 4 0 Alarms and Events Alarms and e
235. ection 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 2 1 3 Array Support Array support shall be provided by a pre engineered sub purlin system on a properly prepared metal roof and installed in accordance vith the recommendations of the collector manufacturer 3 2 2 Storage Subsystem Solar storage tank penetrations shall be installed as shovn on the dravings so that cold vater inlet to storage tank and outlet from storage tank to collector array are located near the bottom of the tank and inlet from collector array and outlet to load are located near the top of the tank 3 2 3 Transport Subsystem 3 2 3 1 Flow Rates Flowmeters will be used for displaying and setting flow rate System flow rate shall be based on recommended collector flow rate and shall be as indicated All flow rates shall be below 5 feet second 3 2 3 2 Pumps Pumps shall be installed on foundations leveled grouted and realigned before operation in accordance with solar energy collecting system manufacturer instructions Additional pipe supports shall be provided as indicated Drain line sizes from the pumps shall not be less than the drain trap or the pump dirt pocket but in no case shall the drain line be less than 1 2 inch iron pipe size Drain lines shall terminate to spill over the nearest floor or open sight drain 3 2313 Expansion Tank Expansion tank shall be installed on suction side of pump as shown 32 34 Piping Valves and Accessories Piping shall be installed
236. ection to the potable vater supply to ensure a continuous vater supply to the building fixtures connected to the system 5 2 Modular Storage Tank Storage tank shall be composed of interlocking modular sections arranged in the configuration shown on the civil drawings The modules shall be assembled from injection molded plastic top bottom and side panels of the manufacturers standard size The top and bottom panels shall be connected by either extruded rigid PVC columns or internal baffles The tank structure shall be capable of withstanding HS 20 surface loads as defined by AASHTO Provide inspection ports inlets outlet and overflow connections as shown on the Plumbing and Civil drawings Tank shall be vented to atmospheric pressure 5 3 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank Storage tank shall be fiber glass reinforced plastic FRP Underground Storage tank Provide a polyester resin chemical rated coating on the tank interior and exterior Tanks shall be capable of handling internal pressure loads of 5 psig pressure with a 5 1 safety ratio The tank size shall be as indicated on the Plumbing and Civil drawings Tank shall be leaked test in the factory at 5 psig The tank shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum test to 11 5 inches of mercury The tank shall be capable of withstanding surface loads from H 20 axle loads The tank shall be capable of handling external hydrostatic pressure loads from being buried in the ground up to
237. ed to operate selected elevator s at rated speed with rated load System design must accommodate automatic sequential operation to bring all elevators to the designated floor and provide selected elevator s with emergency power operation Control vviring may be required between MRs for sequential operation Provide manual selector switch in main elevator lobby area s to allow emergency personnel to override the automatic emergency power selection Provide emergency power for MR lighting and MR HVAC equipment Provide emergency power for Cab lighting and Cab HVAC equipment g Provide emergency power for hoistway pit sump pump operation mo 6 1 6 Emergency Communication Systems Provide telephone outlet with dedicated line next to each elevator controller for emergency phone service in elevator car Indicate outlets on telephone riser 15 6 1 6 1 Provide emergency communication between the elevator cab and the elevator MR for all elevators with a travel of 60 or greater and for all elevators with a remote MR when MR and hoistway do not share a contiguous wall 6 1 7 Firefighters Emergency Operation The design of the building fire detection and alarm system must include an effective interface with the elevator controller for actuation of Fire Fighter s Emergency Operation FEO in accordance with ASME A17 1 6 1 7 1 For FEO actuation provide ceiling mounted smoke detectors in elevator lobbies elevator MR and somet
238. egral part of the equipment Providel high efficiency type single phase fractional horsepover alternating current motors including motors that are part of a system corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11 In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM provide polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings including motors that are part of a system that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified but not shown shall be
239. elated to the installation and operation of the elevator may be installed in the elevator hoistway In addition pipes ducts and conduit not related to the elevator system must not penetrate the hoistway 5 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit 5 3 1 Elevator Hoistvvay Pit Sump and Sump Pump For all elevators a sump pit and an automatic sump pump system must be provided Permanent discharge piping must be provided to a point outside of the elevator hoistway and MR Comply with the following a Minimum sump pump discharge must be 50 gallons per minute per elevator Sump pump and piping must be sized to accomplish this output regardless of head pressure or piping run b Provide fully supported removable grate cover with top of grate flush with pit floor c Discharge to an approved location that will accommodate full pump output and comply with all applicable discharge permits regulations and statutes d Coordinate sump pump size with Architect to ensure that the sump pump and control sensors will fit completely within the sump e Coordinate power requirements with Electrical engineer 5 3 1 1 In addition to the requirements of 5 3 1 hydraulic elevator installations must be designed with a sump pump oil sensing control system to allow water to be pumped out of the sump without pumping oil hydraulic fluid from the elevator hoistway pit The sump pump control system must include an audible alarm and visual indicators for water and oil The alarm indicato
240. element based on the Taguchi principle The sensor shall monitor a wide range of gaseous volatile organic components common in indoor air contaminants like paint fumes solvents cigarette smoke and vehicle exhaust The sensor shall automatically compensate for temperature and humidity have span and calibration potentiometers operate on 24 VDC power with output of 0 10 VDC and have a service rating of 32 to 140 degrees F and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity 25 Input Switches 55 Timed Local Overrides Provide buttons or switches to override the DDC occupancy schedule programming for each major building zone during unoccupied periods and to return HVAC equipment to the occupied mode This requirement is waived for zones Clearly intended for 24 hour continuous operation Freeze Protection Thermostats Provide special purpose thermostats vith flexible capillary elements 20 feet in length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet Provide additional thermostats for larger coils Provide switch contacts rated for the respective motor starter s control circuit voltage Include auxiliary contacts for the switch s status condition A freezing condition at any 18 inch increment along the sensing element s length shall activate the switch The thermostat shall be equipped with a manual push button reset switch so that when tripped the thermostat requires manual resetting before the HVAC equipment can restart 2 Air Flov Meas
241. em Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing Each device shall be a standard commercial unit SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 22 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 1334 2 Access Panels Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls or any item requiring inspection or maintenance Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced maintained or replaced Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 3 4 VIBRATION ABSORBING FEATURES Mechanical equipment including pumps shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration absorbing features unless otherwise shown Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening together with intermediate isolation material and shall be a standard product with printed load rating Isolation unit installation shall limit vibration to percent of the lowest equipment rpm 3 5 WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER The remote readout register shall be provided thru the DDC for remote reading 3 6 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS 3 6 1 Identification Tags Identification tags made of bra
242. em it potentially limits both the trainee on the firing line and operator at the instructor station For example low light levels at the firing line makes it difficult for trainees to fill out score notebooks or easily see weapon sights In addition the Virtual Trainer operator is forced to work in darkness making it difficult to impossible to effectively review training aids Therefore dedicated recessed focused dimmable lighting is important for lighting the firing line and the Instructor Station position It is best for all room lighting to be adjustable by the operator from the Instructor Station location Proper use of operator controlled lighting enables use of different light levels within the Training Room allowing screen images to remain sharp and clear while enabling the trainees and operator to see what they are doing During simulator operation recessed dimmable fluorescent compact fluorescent or low IR lights are recommended for use over the firing line and instructor station Any other kinds of light such as halogen and incandescent lights generate significant amounts of IR light that can potentially interfere with the system s hit detection For general room lighting when the simulator is not in use standard florescent lights are acceptable It is preferable if the fluorescent lights are separated in front of the firing platform and are on a separate bank from the ones over the firing platform 2 2 13 Furniture Requirements Tra
243. em components shall be silicon avalanche diodes or metal oxide varistors g The device shall have an indication light to indicate the protection components are functioning h All system functions of the transient suppression system shall be n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 28 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time i The device shall have an EMI RFI noise filter with a minimum attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz x x E C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Class B E C62 45 j The device shall comply with IE requirements and be tested according to IE x k The device shall be capable of operating between minus 20 degrees F and plus 122 degrees F 2 4 3 Wiring Provide complete electrical wiring for the DDC System including wiring to transformer primaries Unless indicated otherwise provide all normally visible or otherwis xposed wiring in conduit Where conduit is required control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring over 100 volts Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Run all circuits over 100 volts in conduit metallic tubing covered metal raceways or armored ca
244. em that is part of the buildings DDC system The trend report shall include a value for each set point listed in the sequence of operation b Identify any values that do not meet the sequence of operation requirements make repairs re program and run a new trend for the system Document each deficiency and corrective action taken c If re testing is required follow the procedures for the initial PVT The Government may require re testing of any control system components affected by the original failed test 9 56 Controller Capability and Labeling Test the folloving for each controller a Memory Demonstrate that programmed data parameters and trend alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during pover failure Direct Connect Interface Demonstrate the ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable electronic device like a notebook computer or PDA Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as specified in the manufacturer s technical literature Stand Alone Ability Demonstrate controllers provide stable and reliable stand alone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over the network Building DDC system shall function to the project s specifications if connection to the EMCS server is lost Wiring and AC Power Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table Dem
245. emove factory applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole 1 5 4 Aluminum Steel Poles Do not store poles on ground Support poles so they are at least 305 mm one foot above ground level and growing vegetation Do not remove factory applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole 6 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6 1 Local Regional Materials Use materials or products extracted harvested or recovered as vell as manufactured vithin a 180011 kilometer 500 mile radius from the project site if available from a minimum of three sources 6 2 Environmental Data Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for the following products 1 1 4643 Energy Efficiency Comply vith National Energy Policy Act Comply with Energy Star requirements for the following lighting products JJ af WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract ei LED Luminaire Warranty Life of exterior LED lighting primarily the luminaire is not yet well understood given the relative newness of the technology for this application Projected life of LED luminaires is a key component to payback scenarios in project evaluations therefore it is very important that products perform as anticipated Since life claims provided
246. ent of ceiling tiles without disturbing the sprinklers Do not permit hinged escutcheons 1 28 10 SWIMMING POOLS 5 10 09 97 98 Swimming pool chemistry and filters are monitored by PW Utilities and pools shall be equipped as followings Pool shall have pool controller that automatically monitors and feeds sodium hypochlorite and sulfuric acid and backwashes the filter a Controller shall read ORP or free chlorine and PH b Controller shall transmit free chlorine and PH values to the corresponding water plant via radio c Pool water temperature shall also be sensed and transmitted on indoor pools d Controller shall transmit a master alarm to the corresponding water plant via radio in the event of high or low ORP or PH levels no sensor water flow and elapsed chemical feed alarm e Chemical feed system shall be interlocked to shut off in the event of no pool circulation water flow f The preferred pool controller is Bec System 7 g Electronics shall have a 60 minute battery backup 12 99 Filter backvash shall have manual over ride such that the filters can be backvashed in the event of controller failure 100 Normal pool vater vaste shall be to the sanitary sever vith a bypass to the storm sever This can be used to empty pool after dechlorination A dechlorinator shall be installed 7 2 09 101 A normally energized duplex receptacle needs to be installed near the chemical feed pumps to
247. ent that will meet the design requirements and provide the lowest life cycle cost and energy consumption 6 1 4 10 HVAC System Layout 6 1 4 10 1 To the maximum extent possible chilled water piping must be routed through pipe chases and hallways Avoid concealing piping in the walls or ceilings of occupied spaces Provide access for maintenance 9 of 14 Enclosure 1 6 1 4 10 2 Insulate piping with an operating temperature below dew point with jacketed insulation meeting the cold piping requirements of UFGS 15080 Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Equipment The insulation jacket must be sealed to provide an exterior vapor barrier 6 1 4 10 3 Sufficiently sized safe access must be provided for the maintenance of valves variable air volume VAV boxes dampers controls and other HVAC components 6 1 4 10 4 Ductwork must not be installed within or beneath slab on grade floors 6 1 4 11 Design Analysis Submittal The designer shall provide a single submittal package for approval of the Contracting Officer including each of the following applicable Design Analysis DA ITG Paragraph 6 1 3 4 Envelope DA ITG Paragraph 6 1 4 3 Psychrometric DA ITG Paragraph 6 1 4 8 1 2 VAS Psychrometric DA ITG Paragraph 6 1 4 8 2 Existing Facility Alternative System Psychrometric DA 7 1 Testing Adjusting and Balancing TAB HVAC systems will be tested adjusted and balanced to verify and document actual performance of the systems and evaluate
248. equipped with a down speed regulated control valve In both directions of travel and in all loading conditions the control valve must operate the elevator at a minimum of rated speed and at a maximum of 110 of rated speed 8 5 2 1 1 The hydraulic control valve must have built in adjustment capability to operate the elevator at 140 of rated speed to facilitate periodic testing of the over speed safety valve 8 5 2 2 Hydraulic Working Pressure The hydraulic system must be designed and installed so that the working pressure of the 25 elevator running in the up direction at rated speed vvith rated load does not exceed 500 psi 8 5 2 3 Hydraulic Pump Motor The hydraulic pump and motor must be designed and installed so that motor amperage does not exceed nameplate motor amperage when the elevator is running in the up direction at rated speed with rated load 8 5 2 3 1 The hydraulic pump motor must be rated for 120 starts per hour and a minimum Class F insulation 8 5 2 4 Motor Control The hydraulic elevator motor control must utilize an electronic soft start motor starter 8 5 2 5 The elevator system must be designed for and must operate to maintain the hydraulic fluid temperature within the optimum operating range specified by the hydraulic control valve manufacturer 8 5 2 6 The hydraulic fluid reservoir capacity must be designed for and supplied with a minimum of full plunger displacement plus 38 liters 10 gal 8 5 3 Hydraul
249. er either by device switches network computer or field interface BACnet allows up to 4 194 302 possible unique devices per internetwork d Device Object Name Property Text The Device Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters Assign unique Device Object Name property names with plain English descriptive names for each device For example the Device Object Name for the device controlling the first floor air handler unit at Building AS4035 would be Name Air Station AS4035 First Floor Air Handling Unit AHU 1 A e Object Name Property Text Other than Device Objects n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 34 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 The Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters Assign Object Name properties with plain English names descriptive of the application Examples include Zone 1 Temperature and Fan Start Stop Object Identifier Property Number Other than Device Objects Assign Object Identifier property numbers according to design drawings or tables if provided If not provided Object Identifier property numbers may be assigned at the Contractor s discretion but must be approved by the Government In this case they must be documented and unique for like
250. er see Appendix G The PE must verify that the data entered about the building are accurate This includes verifying the building s physical characteristics operating characteristics and energy consumption All building characteristics are provided in entirety on the data checklist and must be verified through a site visit by the PE Il During the site visit the PE must also verify that the building complies with current industry standards for indoor environment quality including thermal comfort illumination outside air ventilation and control of indoor air pollutants See modules 4 5 amp 6 These standards are meant to provide general guidance for a comfortable and healthy work environment Given nuances in the feasibility of some buildings to renovate and conform to these strict standards it us up to the PE s EPA conducts statistical analysis on the data gathered by the Department of Energy s Energy Information Administration during its quadrennial Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey CBECS For more information on how the rating is calculated and supporting documents on the statistical models please visit our supporting documents page http Awww energystar gov index cfm c evaluate_performance bus portfoliomanager docs professional judgment as to whether the building as a whole provides a suitable work environment for those subject to the respective working conditions This document The Professional Engineer s
251. eral The PVT shall demonstrate compliance of the control system vork vith the contract requirements The PVT shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed and approved by the Government If the project is phased provide separate testing for each phase A Pre PVT meeting to reviev the Pre PVT Checklist is required to coordinate all aspects of the PVT and shall include the Contractor s QA representative the Contractor s PVT administrator the Contracting Officer s representative and the EMCS Ovner 5 Performance Verification Testing Plan Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed testing for Government approval Develop the PVT Plan specifically for the control system in this contract The PVT Plan shall be a clear list of test items arranged in a logical sequence Include the intended test procedure th xpected response and the pass fail criteria for every component tested The plan shall clearly describe how each item is tested indicate where assisting personnel are required like the mechanical contractor and include what procedures are used to simulate conditions Include a separate column for each checked item and extra space for comments Where sequences of operations are checked insert each corresponding routine from the project s sequence of operation For each test area include signature and date lines for the Contractor s PVT administrator the Contractor s QA representative the Contracting Officer s represen
252. eration Use read write property services to globally read and modify parameters over the internetwork 3 25210 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy For all control loops tested give the Government trend graphs of the control variable over time demonstrating that the control loop responds to a 20 percent sudden change of the control variable set point without xcessive overshoot and undershoot If the process does not allow a 20 percent set point change use the largest change possible Show that once the new set point is reached it is stable and maintained Control loop trend data shall be in real time with the time between data points 30 seconds or less 345 11 Performance Verification Testing Report Upon successful completion of the PVT submit a PVT Report to the Government and prior to the Government taking use and possession of the facility Do not submit the report until all problems are corrected and successfully re tested The report shall include the annotated PVT Plan used during the PVT Where problems vere identified explain each problem and the corrective action taken Include a written certification that the installation and testing of the control system is complete and meets all of the contract s requirements 3 6 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Provide a qualified instructor or instructors with two years minimum field experience with the installation and programming of similar BACnet
253. eration and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified above and posted beside the diagrams Proposed diagrams instructions and other sheets shall be submitted for approval prior to posting The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system 3 5 4 Acceptance Testing and Final Inspection Notify the Contracting Officer 7 calendar days before the performance and acceptance tests are to be conducted Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer Furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests Electricity and water will be furnished by the Government A written record of the results of all acceptance tests shall be maintained to be submitted in booklet form The tests shall be as follows 3 5 4 1 As Built Drawings Provide as a condition of final acceptance a complete set of as built system drawings Drawings shall clearly indicate the actual condition of the installed solar energy system at the time of the final test 3 5 4 2 Final Hydrostatic Test Demonstrate to Contracting Officer that all piping has been hydrostatically tested at a pressure indicated by manufacturer for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test pressure Gauges used in the test shall have been calibrated within the 6 mo
254. erence rooms and auditoria fitness areas for staff storage areas Stairways elevator shafts etc Dormitory Residence Hall Dormitory Residence Hall applies to buildings associated with educational institutions or military facilities which offer multiple accommodations for long term residents The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as food service facilities laundry facilities meeting spaces exercise rooms health club spas lobbies elevator shafts storage areas stairways etc Hospital Acute Care and Children s Hospital applies to facility space used as Acute Care and Children s Hospitals between 20 000 to 5 000 000 square feet in total gross floor area These facilities provide acute care services intended to treat patients for short periods of time for any brief but severe medical condition including emergency medical care physician s office services diagnostic care ambulatory care and surgical care Acute care hospitals typically discharge patients as soon the patient is deemed healthy and stable Note Long term care hospitals LTCHs that are certified as acute care hospitals are not eligible because LTCHs provide patients with acute care for extended inpatient stays defined by federal statute as an average of 25 days or more At least 51 of beds must be licensed and used for acute care services And at least 51 of the total gross floor area must be used for acute care services The total flo
255. ering all measured data and observations it is the responsibility of the PE to determine whether the building meets the letter and spirit of ASHRAE Standard 55 Why are TAB reports and Indoor Air Quality IAQ assessments generally not acceptable to assess whether acceptable thermal environmental conditions are being met There are two reasons 1 the assessment is intended to be a professional opinion at the time of the site visit and 2 the assessment is intended to be based on the measurements and observations of the PE hired to perform the assessment TAB reports and IAQ assessments can be useful for the PE to review because they may give confirmation of the PE s measurements and observations as well as indicate problem areas that need further assessment or measurement Module 5 Illumination 5 1 Objective Appropriate illumination of interior occupied spaces and the generally unoccupied exterior spaces for example parking garages and parking lots associated with the building must be verified as part of review for the ENERGY STAR label Appropriate illumination is defined by current industry standards for commercial illumination 5 2 Technology Standard IESNA Lighting Handbook Reference amp Application 9th Edition Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IESNA 120 Wall Street 17th Floor New York NY 10005 5 3 Background and Expectations of PE According to the Illuminance Selection Procedure of the IESNA Lig
256. erior oil paint of a color as indicated aluminum paint 3 1 5 Pole Setting Depth shall be as indicated Poles in straight runs shall be ina straight line Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the hole Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm 6 inch maximum layers and thoroughly tamp Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape and pack tightly to drain water avay l 3 1 6 Photocell Switch Aiming Aim switch according to manufacturer s recommendations Mount switch on or beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof aluminum housing with swivel arm Set adjustable window slide for 1 Dux footcandles photocell turn on l 7 GROUNDING Ground noncurrent carrying parts of equipment including metal poles l luminaires mounting arms brackets and metallic enclosures as specified in Sectionl 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 33 70 02 00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNDERGROUND Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose 3 1 8 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation verify that e
257. erpolymer EPDM or Silicone gaskets for system compatibility Gaskets sealants and coupling hoses shall not be adversely affected by contact with fluids or the environment to an extent that will significantly impair their ability to function 2 1 3 3 Brazing Metal AWS A5 8 A5 8M 15 percent silver base alloy minimum melting point 1 500 degrees F for copper pipes rated at maximum 125 psi and 350 degrees F Provide cadmium free filler metals 2 1 3 4 Solder Metal ASTM B 32 Alloy Grade Sb5 Sn95 or Sn96 with minimum melting 430 degrees FP 2 1 4 Piping Identification Labels Plastic slip on or adhesive backed labels conforming to MIL STD 101 Zak 5 Circulating Pumps A variable or multiple speed AC or DC pump as designed and furnished by the manufacturer as part of the balance of system The motors shall have sufficient power for the service required and be suitable for the available electric service and for the heat transfer fluid used and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Circulating pumps shall be electrically driven single stage centrifugal type The pumps shall have a capacity not less than that indicated The pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion resistant alloy steel sleeve bearings and glands of bronze designed to accommodate a mechanical seal Pumps shall have stainless steel impellers and casings of bronze The motors shall be controlled by suitable switche
258. es Samples of water in disinfected containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting Officer The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms coliform bacteria fecal coliform streptococcal and other bacteria in accordance with ANNA 10084 The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters in the samples for at least 2 full days The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained 10 WASTE MANAGEMENT Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic vaste in designated containers Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected well ventilated fire safe area at moderate temperature Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse 11 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system shall be posted where directed
259. es less than 72 hours long 2 56 Immunity to Power Fluctuations Controllers shall operate at 90 percent to 110 percent nominal voltage rating L27 Transformer The controller power supply shall be fused or current limiting and rated at 125 percent power consumption 205 Wiring Terminations Use screw terminal wiring terminations for all field installed controllers Provide field removable modular terminal strip or a termination card connected by a ribbon cable for all controllers other than terminal units 2 9 Input and Output Interface Provide hard vired input and output interface for all controllers as follovs a Protection Shorting an input or output point to itself to another point or to ground shall cause no controller damage Input or output point contact with sources up to 24 volts AC or DC for any duration shall cause no controller damage b Binary Inputs Binary inputs shall monitor two state devices c Pulse Accumulation Inputs Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and accumulate pulses at a resolution suitable to the application d Analog Inputs Analog inputs shall monitor low voltage 0 10 VDC current 4 20 mA or resistance thermistor or RTD signals e Binary Outputs Binary outputs shall have a toggle switch and send a pulsed 24 VDC low voltage signal for modulation control or provide a maintained open closed position for on off control For
260. essure Management based upon a field investigation survey of 70 commercial buildings in the southern U S these buildings leaked an average of 0 4 AC hr when the HVAC systems were OFF and an average of 0 9 AC hr when the HVAC systems were ON It is easy to see that the available 0 38 AC hr will not be enough to positively pressurize the building with properly dehumidified VAS unless and until we construct a building envelope tighter than the average and we construct the HVAC system ductwork tighter than average Additionally the 60 CFM per unit was based upon 4 persons per unit not the normal 2 persons per unit therefore the design VAS volume is ample and the design EA volume is as low as allowed by ASHRAE The only other means to keep the moisture that leads to mold and mildew out of the building is to increase the VAS CFM enough to offset the leakage This requires larger more expensive HVAC equipment greater energy consumption and greater maintenance costs for the life of the building Investing in sealing the building enclosure and sealing the HVAC system will avoid these increased life cycle costs Page 14 of 14 Enclosure 2 CAPITAL MPROVEMENTS zy NA FAC ENGINEERING amp CONSTRUCTION Bulletin Issue No 2010 05 8 July 2010 Type Policy same ss m sa s Subject Solar Roof Technologies for Use on Marine Corps New Construction and Roof Replacement Projects Reference a Assistant Deputy Commandant I am
261. etc Additionally the following must be noted Existing atriums should only include the base floor area that it occupies Interstitial plenum space between floors should not be included in total Gross floor area is not the same as leasable space Leasable space is a subset of a building s gross floor area Can parking garage or surface parking be excluded from the analysis Yes if the energy consumption for a parking garage or surface parking is included on the same meter as the building then it should be accounted for in Portfolio Manager The tool will calculate the energy consumption of the parking structure and subtract the energy use of the parking structure from the actual reported energy consumption If the parking structure is separately metered and not included in other utility bill data in Portfolio Manager the user can exclude the parking structure from Portfolio Manager 1 7 Verifying Information on Data Checklist NEW REQUIREMENT The Data Checklist is a new document as of October 2008 developed by EPA that prints out with the Statement of Energy Performance from Portfolio Manager The document is meant to summarize all building information for both the owner operator of the building and the Professional Engineer The document is especially meant to assist the Professional Engineer during the site visit of the label application process by providing all the information about the building in question including physical
262. ettings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise Provide switch rated volts having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure Provide time switch with a manual on off bypass switch Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted NEMA 3R enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6 6 PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated volts ac 60 Hz with single throw contacts single pole double throw spdt contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watts designed to fail to the ON position Switch shall turn on at or below 32 lux 3 footcandles and off at 43 to 107 lux 4 to 10 footcandles A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition Provide switch fa In a high impact resistant noncorroding and nonconductive molded plastic housing with a fixture mounted locking type receptacle conforming to ANSI 136 10 and rated 1800 VA minimum b In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide rated 1800 VA minimum c Ina U V stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide rated 1800 VA minimum d Integral to the luminaire rated 1000 VA min
263. eyond the point of being safe to reuse c It is installed incorrectly such as a non veather resistant enclosure installed outdoors d It is not the correct form factor for the existing electrical service 2122 Existing Installations As part of the existing condition survey the following applies for installations with existing meters a Replace any meters that do not comply with this section b If CTs are installed verify that they comply with this section If they do not comply replace them with CTs that comply with this section One CT per phase is required for wye connected systems c If potential transformers are installed on low voltage systems remove the PTs as part of the installation d Install disconnect switches as specified in this section 1 2 Scheduling of Work and Outages The Contract Clauses shall govern regarding permission for power outages scheduling of work coordination with Government personnel and special working conditions 1 Page 12 3 2143 Configuration Softvare The standard meter shall include the latest available version of firmvare and software Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field Meters shall have a password that shall be provided to the contracting officer upon project completion When field programming is performed turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project When interfacing software
264. f 4 ECB posted at https portal navfac navy mil pls portal url page ci ecb ssue No 2008 01 13 December 2007 Type Guidance If the project funding or life cycle cost effectiveness will not achieve the maximum energy efficiency goal of EPAct 2005 evaluate alternative designs at successive decrements below 30 to the optimal level that is life cycle cost effective Do not decrease scope For Navy and Marine Corps projects follow reference c for meeting LEEDe Certified level rating performance as the minimum goal for applicable projects USGBC registration and certification of FY08 projects is recommended if attainable without decreasing scope and within allowable funds To encourage higher levels of performance include the following in Requests for Proposals Design Build projects Include a technical evaluation factor for providing a facility that achieves a LEEDg Silver level rating performance Design Bid Build projects Include achieving a LEEDa Silver level rating performance as an additive bid item or option FY09 Projects and Beyond All projects for new buildings and major renovations where the work exceeds 50 percent of the building s plant replacement value PRV must comply with EPAct 2005 requirements as codified under US Code 10 CFR 433 amp 435 regardless of fund source building size location or temporary nature Projects must also comply with the Executive Order 13423 reference b All projects must be registered w
265. f 8 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY NAVY CRANE CENTER NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND NORFOLK NAVAL SHIPYARD BUILDING 491 PORTSMOUTH VIRGINIA 23709 5000 IN REPLY REFER TO NAVCRANECENINST 11450 1A 31 Mar 11 NAVCRANECEN INSTRUCTION 11450 1A From Director Navy Crane Center Subj ACQUISITION OF NAVY SHORE BASED WEIGHT HANDLING EQUIPMENT Ref a SECNAVINST 11260 2A Navy Weight Handling Program for Shore Activities b NAVFAC P 307 Management of Weight Handling Equipment 1 Purpose To establish acquisition policy for Navy shore based weight handling equipment WHE as authorized by reference a 2 Cancellation NAVCRANECEN Instruction 11450 1 3 Applicability This instruction applies to WHE purchased for and assigned to the Navy shore establishment excluding a Civil Engineering Support Equipment CESE mobile cranes procured through Naval Facilities Expeditionary Logistics Center NFELC b Mobile cargo cranes under the cognizance of NAVSUP 538 and procured through NAVSUPSYSCOM c Aviation support cranes procured by NAVAIRSYSCOM d Equipment addressed in paragraph 14 1 1 of reference b except as noted in paragraph 5 Note Contracts for mobile cargo cranes and CESE mobile cranes shall require the contractor at the receiving activity s option to either i Perform a complete condition inspection and load test in accordance with reference b at the contractor s facility prior to shipment or ii Be on site
266. f or in conjunction with mechanical ventilation systems Natural ventilation must be approved by the authority having jurisdiction Determining whether such buildings meet mechanical ventilation requirements of ASHRAE 62 1 would necessitate a calculation by the PE Are outside air measurements or calculations required for every occupied space within the building No It is expected that the PE will take a representative sample of the occupied spaces to be able to give his her decision There are several factors that might influence a PE s decision or warrant further measurement For example if a significantly sized space is marginally meeting the minimum requirements then more measurements may be vvarranted Similarly if there are a significant number of personal fans indicating stagnate air or damaged and or occupied altered HVAC equipment for example diffusers and thermostats the PE may vvant to consider additional measurements in these areas Ifthe measured outdoor air supply of a single occupied space is below the acceptable suppiy rates given in ASHRAE Standard 62 1 is that sufficient grounds to give an opinion of Fail for the ventilation requirement The answer depends upon the space itself and the compliance design path chosen IAQ or Ventilation Rate Procedure it is ultimately the judgment of the PE For Example if the ventilation rate in an open office plan within a given building does not meet ASHRAE Standard 62 1 then it
267. f roofing underlayment reflective barrier and the roofing material The solar thermal collector system will allow fastening of the roofing material directly to the roof deck The solar thermal collector system shall comply with ASHRAE 93 ASHRAE 96 SRCC OG 100 and SRCC CSCWHSR Supply with all materials necessary for integration into building s envelope Include the following design features pap 2941 Solar Thermal System Collector Performance Thermal performance shall be plotted on the thermal efficiency curve in accordance with ASHRAE 93 Manufacturer s recommended volumetric flow rate and the design pressure drop at the recommended flow rate shall be as shown on the drawings Manufacturer s recommendations shall allow for balanced flow and for thermal expansion considerations 9 2 Solar Thermal Collector System Weight Maximum filled weight not to exceed 5 pounds per square foot of gross solar thermal system area 1 953 Solar Thermal Collector System Layout Solar thermal collector system shall consist of an assembly of solar thermal loops manifolded together as shown on the drawings Solar collectors shall be assembled as shown Minimum spacing between rows shall be as shown 1 9 4 Solar Thermal Collector System Piping The solar thermal collector system piping shall include interconnecting piping and manifolds between the solar thermal collector system loops and shall be connected in the configuration as indicated on the drawin
268. f technical data and computer software meaning technical data which relates to computer software which are specifically identified in this project and which may be defined required in other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List DD Form 1423 Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished All submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered shop drawings under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement FARS and shall contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted rights Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423 SD 02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings G T G I 11 SD 03 Product Data Electricity meters G G I 11 The most recent meter product data shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site Any software shall be submitted on CD ROM and hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided Page 2 Current transformer 411 G I 11 Potential transformerl G G L 11 External communications devicesl G G 11 Configuration Softvarel G L G I Il The most recent version of the configuration software for each type manufac
269. f the building 9 Standard 8 Building Overhangs Appendix B 2 3 e Does building have overhangs with inhabited spaces above them o If yes insure that there are no roadways or parking areas under the overhangs o If yes insure that floors beneath inhabited areas are in accordance with UFC 4 023 03 Design of Buildings to Resist Progressive Collapse o If yes insure that superstructure is in accordance with UFC 4 023 03 Design of Buildings to Resist Progressive Collapse 10 Standard 9 Exterior Masonry Walls Appendix B 2 4 ls masonry wall in new building reinforced vvith required minimum enforcement e Has mitigating measures been provided for masonry wall in existing building that provides an equivalent level of protection 11 Appendix C Recommended Additional Measures Appendix C 2 1 e Has recommendation 11 been considered 11 Structural Redundanct 12 Other Structural Requirements Has structural requirements related to windows been considered See Architectural Standard 10 o Yes o No Architectural 13 Standard 10 Windows and Skylights Appendix B 3 1 amp UFC 4 011 02 e Has required thickness of exterior glazing be determined using Tables B 2 amp B 3 e Do window frames anchorages and supporting elements meet required minimum level of protection for the following o Frame Member Design o Glazing Frame Bite o Frame Connection to Wall o Suppo
270. f used would include regional engineer level review and approval The Navy and Marine Corps are directed to immediately plan program and budget to meet the requirements of this policy starting in FY 2011 All efforts shall be made to incorporate LID practices in the fiscal years 08 09 and 2010 The services are further directed to submit to my office an annual report that summarizes all projects that have a storm water component and identify how LID was implemented or waived I waived the report must identify the approving official Naval Facilities Engineering Command as the Department s expert in acquisition construction and environmental management shall assist Navy and Marine Corps installations in meeting these policies My point of contact for this matter is CAPT Robin Brake robin brake navy mil 703 693 2931 BJ Pen Major renovation projects are defined as having a storm water component and exceeding 55 million when initially approved by DASN I amp F Major construction projects are defined as those exceeding 750K N Low Impact Development Waiver Form Classification NAVY LOW IMPACT DEVELOPMENT WAIVER 1 TODAY S DATE 2 SUSPENSE DATE FORM 3 PROJECT TITLE 3a CONTRACT NUMBER 3b MODIFICATION NUMBER 4 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION 4a NAME OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON TITLE NAME ES AND ADDRESS ES 4b TELEPHONE NUMBER 5 CONTRACT OFFICER NAME ES AND 5a PROJECT NUMBER ADDRESS E
271. feet outside the building unless otherwise indicated Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place Rainwater harvesting system pipes shall be laid in separate trenches except when otherwise shown Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the average local frost depth finish grade or as indicated on the drawings If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means Valves shall be installed with control no lover than the valve body All piping located below the building shall be supported from above by the floor slab Provide adequate working space around all equipment in accordance with manufacturers written requirements Working space shall allow room to perform maintenance functions as well as to pull coils pumps heat transfer surfaces valves and valve operators dampers controls control wiring conduit fans motors etc Water Pipe Fittings and Connections Water pressure piping fitting and connections to the rainwater harvesting system and equipment shall be made in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE Rainwater collection piping located outside the building shall be connected in accordance with Section 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES sl Utilities
272. fference between the STD 90 1 Appendix D 1 data and the EWD is small and is due to the difference in hours included in the data STD 90 1 uses 0800 through 1559 EWD uses 0900 through 1659 Use the EWD data where available 6 1 4 8 1 7 Storage Spaces Closets and storage or utility rooms smaller than 4 64 square meters 50 square feet of floor space within conditioned spaces must have undercut and overcut doors 8 of 14 Enclosure 1 allowing airflow through these spaces Closets and storage or utility spaces larger than 4 64 square meters of floor space must be supplied with conditioned air 6 1 4 8 2 Existing Facilities Existing facilities being renovated must incorporate ventilation air supply systems as described for new facilities in paragraph 6 1 4 8 1 2 Where the facility structure i e floor to floor height prohibits dedicated central ventilation air systems alternative system package unit designs must have separate dedicated and continuous conditioning of ventilation air The designer will perform a psychrometric analysis documenting that the system is designed to maintain space humidity with entering ventilation air at the 1 percent humidity ratio design weather condition The system must provide the capability to condition ventilation air and maintain space relative humidity over the full range of cooling load 6 1 4 9 HVAC Equipment Selection 6 1 4 9 1 For VAS cooling coils typically with a depth of 4 or more rows indica
273. fixture components must utilize LED lighting for energy efficiency 8 3 1 3 Fixture Switches and Keys Elevator manufacturer s standard grade may be used for all key switches unless otherwise specified For all keyed car and landing fixtures a minimum of twelve keys must be provided for each unique cylinder 8 3 2 Firefighters Emergency Operation FEO 8 3 2 1 The FEO designated landing must be determined during the facility design process and identified in the design submittal package 23 8 3 2 1 1 A separate FEO Phase 1 fixture must be provided at the designated fire response floor FEO Phase 1 fixture must be mounted on the opposite side of the elevator entrance from the landing hall call fixture FEO Operating Instructions must be engraved in the Phase I fixture and backfilled with a contrasting color 8 3 2 1 2 Both the FEO Phase I and Phase II visual indicators must be designed to operate with flashing operation to indicate when a fire alarm initiating device has actuated in the elevator MR and or hoistway 8 3 2 1 3 The FEO Phase II Firefighters Operation Panel must be located in the elevator cab Car Operating Panel FEO Phase II Operating Instructions must be engraved on the inside face of the Phase II Firefighters Operation Panel cover and backfilled with a contrasting color 8 3 3 Car Operating Panel COP In addition to items required by safety code the elevator COP must include the following Passenger accessible devi
274. folloving 1 The continuity of the air barrier system throughout the building enclosure and that all gaps are covered the covering is structurally sound and all penetrations are sealed alloving for no infiltration or exfiltration through the air barrier system 2 The structural support of the air barrier system can vithstand design air pressures 3 The masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth clean and free of cavities protrusions and mortar droppings vith mortar oints struck flush or as required by the manufacturer of the air barrier material 4 Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates are vithin guidelines 5 The substrate surfaces are properly primed 6 Overlaps in materials are at least a 2 inch minimum shingled in the correct direction or mastic applied on exposed edges vith no n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 9 fishmouths 7 The mastic is applied on cut edges 8 A roller has been used to enhance adhesion 0 Measure application thickness of liquid applied materials to manufacturer s specifications for the specific substrate 10 The correct materials are installed for compatibility 11 Proper transitions for change in direction and structural support at gaps 12 Ensure proper connection betveen assemblies membrane and sealants for cleaning preparation and priming of surfaces structural support integrity and continuity of seal Quantitati
275. formation required by ASME A17 1 Include the following a Locate MR and hoistway on the same side of any building expansion joint b Provide 2 hour fire resistant construction for all elevator machine rooms MR enclosure may not contain access panels in the walls or ceiling c MR fire rated ceiling must not exceed 12 3658 mm in height d Machine room door must have a minimum fire rating of 1 hour e Louvers and undercuts of machine room door are not permitted f Design all machine beam support with hoistway wall beam pocket construction 3 1 2 1 Elevator MR door must include the following a MR door must be equipped with panic hardware for MR exit and with key operated hardware from outside only A lever type handle on the MR side of the door shall be provided if the building hallway design precludes the use of an swing out door b MR door must be self closing and self locking 3 1 2 2 Mechanical equipment and systems must conform to the following a Provide an unobstructed 7 0 2133 mm minimum vertical clearance headroom below all solid items in the elevator machine room The 7 headroom applies to all building components and all installed mechanical or electrical system components b Only items that are directly related to the installation and operation of the elevator may be installed in the elevator machine room In addition pipes ducts and conduit not related to the elevator system must not penetrate the
276. g jesodsig sjeq peulejqo ajeq Beio s Ju une u L BJSeAA SNOpsezeH 11 4 15 pue SUOISIAOJ 61099 Aov y Buinss s ON S A UOlS O Q Jo siseg p solo led PSUle qO 9 eq 49410 1IINM4d xx SJUBUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 10904 Aoueby Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg bune s do yue bBeio s punoiBi pun L NM4d xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aoueby Buinss xx ON S A uolsi5 q JO siseg SEM snop ezeH pue pijos O syue jan4 SYUEL jan4 O uononiysuoy P SO O 10 p ule1q0 2q yue punoiBi pun LIN 3d M45VNVI 154FOMd LNSINNYSAO9D NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM 1111 1 syue l n xog y uo qad nosu A IN 1dd 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd xx SJUBUIAJIINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61099 Aov y Buinss ux ON S A UOISIN9G Jo siseg uonezuouny h u d sjeq p uie qo ajeq A u sisuo2 e SeOD LIINYAd JUsWebeueW jezseog s SJUBUIBJIINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aov y Buinss ux ON S8A UOISIN9G Jo siseg p sol eq p ulelqO leq 4 u3O LINYAd snopuezeH pue pijos xx SJUSUUBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 O Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg 9 5
277. g EPA s Portfolio Manager is an on line interactive software tool that makes benchmarking energy performance simple and accessible Portfolio Manager is based on statistical models developed by the US EPA that correlate energy data to operational characteristics for each building type to identify the key drivers of energy use Based on physical and operating characteristics such as size number of workers operating hours per week number of PCs etc the rating system evaluates and communicates the energy performance of a building relative to other buildings with similar characteristics in the United States After the building s energy performance is assessed users can apply for the ENERGY STAR label by completing an Application Letter and a Statement of Energy Performance See Appendix C The Statement of Energy Performance is a stand alone document designed to communicate not only a building s energy performance but also its physical characteristics operating characteristics and whether it meets industry standards for the following indoor environment conditions thermal comfort adequate ventilation and illumination Once all information is validated by a professional engineer PE the Statement of Energy Performance becomes an official document that can be used to apply for the ENERGY STAR label The role of the PE is essential to certify true superior energy performance and to assure that indoor environmental quality was not compromise
278. g Controllers B BC BACnet Advanced Application Controllers B AAC BACnet Application Specific Controllers B ASC BACnet Smart Actuator B SA and BACnet Smart Sensor B SS Each device used in new construction is required to have a PICS statement listing BIBBs supported and must be tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratory BTL t Aw 1 2 18 Digital Controller An electronic controller usually with internal programming logic and digital and analog input output capability which performs control functions In most cases synonymous with a BACnet device described in this specification See also Device There are different levels of controllers with varying levels or complexity and flexibility 1 221821 Terminal Device Controllers Terminal device controllers typically are controllers vith less control features may have integrated actuators and may be mounted directly on equipment vith enclosures 1 2 18 2 Field Controllers Field controllers typically have a greater capability for input output and customization do not have integral actuators are mounted in an enclosure not on the equipment and are used for equipment such as VAV air handlers n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 4 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T J 2 38 3 Plant Controllers Plant Controllers are typica
279. g are acceptable for mains 2 and larger with the branch 72 or less than the main Joint must be brazed 6 13 8 Do not permit press type fittings in copper 6 13 8 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Require 5 year warranty on compressor parts Require 5 year warranty on labor if available DUCT WORK specify and draw 45 degree expanded throat take offs with balance damper for all supply run outs to diffusers and grills Do not permit flexible duct runs exceeding 8 long Specify that all 90 degree turns be accomplished with hard metal elbows such as on top of diffusers and if top take off of trunk duct Pump Packages In general do not specify pump heat exchanger packages Most of our mechanical rooms are on the smallish side Pump packages require maintenance space on all sides If specifying a pump package designer must work out general lay out of package and mechanical room to ensure maintenance access Circulating pumps for hot water chilled water or dual temperature shall be inline pumps when pumps are installed in noise sensitive areas or when redundant pumps are used Other wise base mounted pumps shall be used For inline pumps 5 hp and larger include rigging points for maintenance When a partial renovation of a building HVAC system re uses existing piping specify the contractor to clean and flush the existing piping 1 8 10 In buildings where cooling is not available 12 months year consider the use of
280. g in Soil depths shall apply where pole holes are in soil sand or gravel or any combination of these At corners dead ends and other points of extra strain poles 12 200 mm 40 feet long or more shall be set 150 mm 6 inches deeper c Setting on sloping ground On sloping ground measure the depth of the hole from the low side of the hole d Backfill Tamp pole backfill for the full depth of the hole and mound the excess fill around the pole Se 1 2 Concrete Poles Page 23 Install according to pole manufacturer s instructions 3 1 3 Fiberglass Poles Install according to pole manufacturer s instructions 3 1 4 Aluminum Steel Poles Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts threaded at the top end and bent 1 57 rad 90 degrees at the bottom end Provide ornamental covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts Concrete for anchor bases polyvinyl chloride PVC conduit ells and ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 33 70 02 00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNDERGROUND Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor jacket or sheath and the end of conduit ell Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location After installation paint exposed surfaces of steel poles with two finish coats of ext
281. g of pipes hangers supports and other iron work either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 8 1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied and shall be as specified herein and provided under each individual section 3 8 1 1 Factory Painting Systems Manufacturer s standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 3000 hours in a salt spray fog test Salt spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117 and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows immediately after completion of the test the paint shall show no signs of blistering wrinkling or cracking and no loss of adhesion and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0 125 inch on either side of the scratch mark The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen If manufacturer s standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service 3 8 1 2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces Clean pretreat prime and paint metal surfaces except alumi
282. g to qualify for the ENERGY STAR a Professional Engineer PE must validate the accuracy of the data underlying the building s energy performance rating This checklist is designed to provide an at a glance summary of a property s physical and operating characteristics as well as its total energy consumption to assist the PE in double checking the information that the building owner or operator has entered into Portfolio Manager Please complete and sign this checklist and include it with the stamped signed Statement of Energy Performance NOTE You must check each box to indicate that each value is correct OR include a note CRITERION VALUE AS ENTERED IN PORTFOLIO MANAGER Building Name Sample Facility Type Office Locati 1234 Main Street Charlotte NC ocation 28227 Annual Occupancy Rate Single Structure Single Facility Exhibition Office Office VALUE AS ENTERED IN CR TER ON PORTFOLIO MANAGER Gross Floor Area 12 000 Sq Ft VVeekly operating 50 Hours hours VVorkers on Main 45 Shift Number of PCs 45 Percent Cooled 5096 or more Percent Heated 5096 or more Parking Parking VERIFICATION QUESTIONS Is this the official building name to be displayed in the ENERGY STAR Registry of Labeled Buildings s this an accurate description of the space in question s this address accurate and complete Correct weather normalization requires an accurate zip code Has the property maintained an average occupancy of
283. gen is used special regulators that can support a higher PSI need to be used and will be an additional cost A list of all weapon types and associated PSI levels can be provided upon request 2 2 15 Cable Routing Requirements Training Room The cables from the equipment rack to the projector and hit camera as well as the trunk lines for the weapons will run underneath the firing platform It is required that a 6 0 1524m diameter hole is cut out in the firing platform behind the equipment rack If a raised platform cannot be used it is recommended that floor tunnels be used to hide cables If a good tunnel structure exists there should not be a need for a raised platform 2 3 WEAPONS STORAGE ROOM 2 3 1 Size Requirements Storage Room The size of the Storage Room should be sufficient to store training furniture and simulated weapons unless stored in another secured lockup area when not in use Actual size of this room is left to the discretion of the customer no formal requirement exists relative to the operation of the Virtual Trainer 2 3 2 Power Requirements Storage Room There are no special power requirements for the Storage Room However it is recommended to add a couple of power outlets to this room for future use easier and cheaper to add now than later If Bluefire weapons are to be used power outlets are required for the battery chargers to charge up the batteries inside the weapon simulator overnight t is
284. ght alloys and Alloy 356 T4 3 5 for cast alloys Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 4 8 mm 0 188 inch wall thickness Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire Tops of shafts shall be fitted with a round or tapered cover Base shall be anchor bolt mounted made of cast 356 T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108 B 108M and shall be machined to receive the lower end of shaft Joint between shaft and base shall be welded Base cover shall be cast 356 T6 aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B 108 B 108M Hardware except anchor bolts shall be either 2024 T4 anodized aluminum alloy or stainless steel Aluminum Page 20 poles and brackets for walkway lighting shall have al uniform satin dark anodic bronze finish to match fixtures and shall not be painted Manufacturer s standard provision shall be made for protecting the finish during shipment and installation Minimum protection shall consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper secured with tape and shipping small parts in boxes 7 3 Steel Poles AASHTO LTS 5 Provide steel poles having minimum 11 gage steel vith minimum yield strength of 331 MPa 48 000 psi and hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 A123M iron oxide primed factory finish Provide a pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire
285. ght Emitting Diode LED Equipment for Use in Lighting Products First Edition 22 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as Page 4 defined in IEEE 100 b Average life is the time after vhich 50 percent vill have failed and 50 percent vill have survived under normal conditions Groundline section is that portion between 305 mm one foot above and 610 mm 2 feet below the groundline d Useful Life is the operating hours before reaching 70 of the initial rated lumen output point with no catastrophic failures under normal conditions SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval for information only When used a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Photometric Plan G Submit computer generated photometric analysis of the designed to values for the end of useful life of the lighting installation using an LLD value of 0 7 Submittal shall include the following Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade Spacing between computer calculation points must be 10 maximum
286. gs with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path Flow rate through the solar thermalcollector system loops shall be as indicated on the drawings Each component of the solar thermal collector system shall be capable of being isolated by valves Manually operated air vents shall be located at system high points ibe 925 Supports for Solar Thermal System Collector Support shall be provided by a pre engineered sub purlin system on a properly prepared metal roof and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the solar thermal collector system manufacturer Support structures provided by the solar thermal collector system SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 11 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 manufacturer may be used if they meet the stated specification Support structure shall secure the solar thermal collector system as shovn on the drawings Support structure shall withstand static weight of the filled solar thermal collector system and piping wind snow seismic and other loads as indicated 2 1 10 Heat Exchangers The heat exchanger construction and testing shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 Minimum design pressure rating shall be as shown Provide relief vent with a visual indicator to detect leaks by the change of coloring in the heat transfer fluid 2 1 11 Solar Boosted Domestic Water Heaters ASHRAE 90 1 IP and UL listed Provide built in double wall heat exch
287. h scheduling capability provide at least one Calendar Object with ten entry capacity All operators may view Calendar Objects authorized operators may make modifications from a workstation Enable the writeable Date List property and support all calendar entry data types Schedule Object Use Schedule Objects for all building system scheduling All operators may view schedul ntries authorized operators may modify schedules n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 35 2D COMBAT ENGIN b T from a workstation Loop Object or Equal Use Loop Objects or equivalent BACnet objects in each applicable field device for PID control Regardless of program method or object used allow authorized operators to adjust the Update Interval Setpoint Proportional Constant Integral Constant and Derivative Constant using BACnet read write services Minimum BACnet Service Requirements Command Priorities Use commandable BACnet objects to control machinery and systems providing the priority levels listed below If the sequence of operation requires a different priority obtain approval from the Contracting Officer Priority Level Application 1 Manual Life Safety 2 Automatic Life Safety 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 5 Critical Equipment Control 6 Minimum On Off 7 User Defined 8 Manual Operator 9 User Defined 10 User Defined 11 Load
288. hat vhen reinforcement is tensioned to 70 percent of its ultimate strength the total resultant tensile force does not exceed the minimum section compressive strength of the concrete 27 13 Coating and Sleeves for Reinforcing Members Where minimum internal coverage cannot be maintained next to required core openings such as handhole and wiring inlet reinforcing shall be protected with a vaporproof noncorrosive sleeve over the length without the 13 mm 1 2 inch concrete coverage Each steel reinforcing member which is to be post tensioned shall have a nonmigrating slipper coating applied prior to the addition of concrete to ensure uniformity of stress throughout the length of such member oF athe Strength Requirement As an exception to the requirements of ASTM C 1089 poles shall be naturally cured to achieve a 28 day compressive strength of 48 23 MPa 7000 psi Poles shall not be subjected to severe temperature changes during the curing period 7 5 Shaft Preparation Completed prestressed concrete pole shaft shall have a hard smooth nonporous surface that is resistant to soil acids road salts and attacks Of vater and frost and shall be clean smooth and free of surface voids and internal honeycombing Poles shall not be installed for at least 15 days after manufacture 57 2 Aluminum Poles Provide aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion resistant aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS 5 for Alloy 6063 T6 or Alloy 6005 T5 for wrou
289. he Design Cooling Day 6 1 4 1 1 2 Heating Systems Mission Critical Facilities For design use the 99 6 Occurrence value for outside air Dry Bulb Temperature T Design Value F Other Typical Facilities For design use the 99 0 Occurrence value for outside air Dry Bulb Temperature T Design Value F 6 1 4 1 2 Inside Design Conditions for Bachelor Housing Administrative Spaces and Family Housing 4 of 14 Enclosure 1 6 1 4 1 2 1 Cooling Systems Space Design conditions shall be 76 Fdb 24 4 Cdb z 50 RH during the Design Cooling Day outside air conditions At all other than design day occupied times maintain the space vvithin the Summer conditions shown in ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals 2001 Chapter 8 Figure 5 but not less than 76 Fdb 24 4 Cdb Space thermostat typically set at 76 Fdb 2 Fdb dead band 24 5 Cdb 1 Cdb 100 Outside Air systems shall operate continuously in Humid Areas to prevent mold growth Admin spaces with Process cooling Space Design conditions are to be determined by the requirements of the respective processes to be utilized within Note Spaces authorized comfort cooling shall be designed for inside temperatures no lower than 76 Fdb 24 4 Cdb During unoccupied hours cooling systems shall be secured where appropriate IAW OPNAVINST 4100 5D 6 1 4 1 2 2 Heating Systems Space Design conditions shall be 70 Fdb 21 1 Cdb duri
290. he above mounting items All control wiring shall be color coded and identified with permanent numeric or alphabetic codes 3 2 4 2 Sequence of Operation The differential temperature controller sensing temperature difference between the fluid in a solar collector and water in the storage tank shall start and stop solar collector loop and storage loop pumps when the temperature differential Delta T ON rises above manufacturer temperature specified SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 18 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 3 20 FIELD SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS weak Examination Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal roofing Notify the Architect in writing of any defective conditions encountered Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of such conditions Metal Deck Substrate a Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth free of depressions waves or projections and properly sloped b Verify deck is dry and joints are solidly supported and fastened c Verify wood nailers are installed and correctly located Structural Framing Substrate a Verify primary and secondary framing members are installed and fastened properly aligned and sloped b Verify damaged shop coatings are repaired with touch up paint Verify roof openings curbs pipes sleeves ducts or vents through roof are solidly set reglets are in place and nailing strips located Ensure that adequate clearance for the
291. he sleeve at the exterior end of the sleeve Seal all curb mounted rooftop HVAC equipment to the roof curbs and seal the roof curbs to the roofing membrane Seal all HVAC equipment mounted within the building envelope to the supply and return ducts to prevent leakage from or into the building cavities Duct insulation must be external duct board or internal duct liner are not allowed Use only metal ductwork for the central ventilation and exhaust systems Supply air duct leakage into the building cavities causes condensation leading to mold growth within the cavities and reduced cooling to the spaces Exhaust air duct leakage depressurizes the 6 of 14 Enclosure 1 building cavities increasing infiltration of moisture laden outside air into the building cavities leading to mold grovvth vvithin the cavities and reduced removal of moisture laden or pollution laden air intended to be exhausted 6 1 4 8 Bachelor Housing and Navy Lodge Facilities 6 1 4 8 1 Nevv Facilities The design must provide sufficient floor to floor height vertical distribution space and mechanical equipment space to accommodate ducted systems to supply preconditioned ventilation air and ducted systems for exhaust air In these types of facilities do not use the space above the ceiling as an HVAC plenum 6 1 4 8 1 1 Within bathrooms the substrate beneath ceramic tile plastic tile or plastic finished wall panels in areas exposed to water e g tub and shower en
292. he sole lighting design criterion and that other criteria may be more important than illuminance In these instances the lighting designer may deviate from the recommended illuminance In general IESNA believe that a dramatic difference between actual and a recommended illuminance i e a difference of two standard deviations or more is characterized as 1 3 more or 1 3 less than the recommended value Any dramatic deviations from the recommended value should be carefully documented just in case the design is ever challenged Additionally it should be kept in mind that while a single instance is not alarming a number of dramatic deviations should be questioned and challenged against the design illuminance A sample of the minimum recommended illumination levels in foot candles FC are given in the table below Please refer to the IESNA Lighting Handbook for a complete list of recommended illumination levels of interior spaces 10 Recommended Illumination Levels for Interior Spaces Note this list is not all inclusive For a complete list of recommended illumination levels of interior spaces see Interior 1 16 of the IESNA Lighting Design Guide Space Type Horizontal Vertical Space Type Horizontal Vertical FC FC FC FC Offices Hotels Meeting Rooms 30 5 Guest rooms general 10 Video Conference Rooms 50 30 Bathrooms 30 5 10 3 Co
293. hics package on the EMCS Server bind all points and demonstrate operability Graphic displays shall have full screen resolution when viewed on the workstation and notebook computers Dynamic data on graphics pages shall refresh within 10 seconds using an Internet connection or 30 seconds using a dial up modem connection Graphics viewing shall not require additional plug in software like Java Shockwave and Flash applications unless the software is readily available for fr over the Internet and certified for use with Navy Marine Corps Internet NMCI personal computers The graphics shall show the present value and object name for each of the project s I O points on at least one graphic page Arrange point values and names on the graphic displays in their appropriate physical locations with respect to the floor plan or equipment graphic displayed Graphics shall allow the operator to monitor current status view zone and equipment summaries use point and click navigation between graphic pages and edit setpoints and parameters directly from the screens Items in alarm shall be displayed using a different color or other obvious visual indicator Provide graphics with the following a Graphic Types Provide at least one graphic display for each piece of HVAC equipment building floor and controlled zone Indicate dynamic point values operating statuses alarm conditions and control setpoints on each display Provi
294. hting Handbook illuminance levels for specific applications are based on best practices for a typical application While illuminance is not the sole or in many cases the most important lighting design criteria it is a useful indicator to determine if the lighting system performance has been compromised in pursuit of energy conservation The PE is expected to give a professional opinion about the capability of the building to provide minimum recommended illumination levels of both occupied spaces that is interior spaces and generally unoccupied spaces that is parking garages and parking lots based on guidance provided by the lluminance Selection Procedure in the IESNA Lighting Handbook In doing so the PE should measure the illumination levels in a representative sample of the occupied interior spaces of the building as well as any associated parking facilities It is the responsibility of the PE to decide based on his her professional opinion whether the building meets the minimum recommended illumination levels considering all measured data and observations at the time of the site visit 5 4 Acceptable Illumination Levels The IESNA Lighting Handbook recommends horizontal and or vertical task illuminances for a wide variety of locations and tasks The recommended values throughout the IESNA Lighting Handbook represent consensus values formally obtained by the appropriate application committee IESNA recognizes that illuminance is not t
295. iability prohibit success vvith economizers except in extremely high internal load buildings Direct Digital Control DDC systems are the preferred HVAC control systems for nevv and replacement control systems i appheations such as for pot eperators ontaree control valves 5 19 8 Where DDC is not practical such as with small unitary equipment use Smart Thermostats CO2 sensors and outside air modulation should be considered in facilities with highly varying occupancies Specify that pneumatic control devices be able to withstand 30 psi without damage Control valve actuators shall be spring return normally open on preheat coils and other coils subject to freezing spring return closed on hot water converters and spring return closed on outside air dampers 10 22 08 Specify individual scheduling for air handlers Specify a gradual progressive startup and a gradual progressive shut down of air handlers A sudden startup or shut down of the entire building is too fast for chiller controls to react and sometimes causes safety trips PLUMBING 56 37 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Lubrication oil lines should not be installed below building floor slabs It is preferred that lubrication oil lines be installed overhead If this is not possible or desirable by the customer lines within service bays should be installed in trenches with removable tops 6 26 9 Install shop air compress
296. ibility Install all equipment so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install digital controllers data ports and concealed actuators valves dampers and like equipment in locations freely accessible through access doors 3 1 8 Digital Controllers a Install as stand alone control devices s definitions b Locate control cabinets at the locations shown on the drawings If not shown on the drawings install in the most accessible space close to the controlled equipment 129 Hand Off Auto Svitches Wire safety controls such as smoke detectors and freeze protection thermostats to protect th quipment during both hand and auto operation 1 10 Temperature Sensors Install temperature sensors in locations that are accessible and provide a good representation of sensed media Installations in dead spaces are not acceptable Calibrate sensors according to manufacturer s instructions Do not use sensors designed for one application in a different application 1221021 Room Temperature Sensors Mount the sensors on interior valls to sense the average room temperature at the locations indicated Avoid locations near heat sources such as copy machines or locations by supply air outlet drafts Mount the center of the sensor at the heightindicated 3 1 10 2 Duct Temperature Sensors a Probe Type Provide a gasket betveen the sensor
297. ic Safety Valve Every hydraulic elevator must be equipped with a safety valve installed directly adjacent to the hydraulic cylinder For single cylinder designs the safety valve must be attached to the cylinder with a connection that is threaded or bolted directly to the hydraulic cylinder For dual cylinder designs the safety valve must be located as close as possible and equidistant from both cylinders 8 5 4 Hydraulic Oil Supply Piping 8 5 4 1 Hydraulic oil supply line from the hydraulic control valve to the hydraulic cylinder must include the following a Schedule 80 piping b Threaded or welded fittings c Manual shut off valves in the elevator machine room and in the hoistway pit Shut off valves must be full flow 1 4 turn ball valves d Dielectric union or isolation coupling at each end of the hydraulic oil supply line 8 5 4 2 Hydraulic oil lines must remain in or under conditioned space from end to end and remain within the building footprint For all buried hydraulic lines between machine room and hoistway provide straight pipe run in PVC pipe sleeves Inside diameter of the PVC must be a minimum of 4 larger than the outside diameter of the supply line fittings 8 5 5 Hydraulic Oil Scavenger Pump A scavenge oil reservoir with strainer and transfer pump must be provided for every hydraulic 26 elevator The scavenger pump unit must include a manual reset pit flood svvitch to prevent pump operation if pit is flooded Pump
298. ic restraint When employing the sway bracing cable system particular attention must be paid to the cable connection to the building structure Consult ASHRAE A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint for specific guidance Drawing Requirements Seismic restraint detailing for mechanical and plumbing systems complete and appropriate for the project location and seismic hazard exposure group shall be provided on the contract drawings It shall be incumbent upon the A amp E to determine the Seismic Hazard Level SHL factor and to clearly indicate the determination on the mechanical and plumbing contract drawings 2009 Professional Engineer s Guide to the ENERGY STAR Label for Commercial Buildings SED 574 s lt s US Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air and Radiation 2009 gt aroun o N agenc lt L prote x ntroduction Since January 1999 the U S Environmental Protection Agency US EPA has provided the public with the means to quickly and easily assess or benchmark the energy performance of commercial buildings relative to similar buildings in the United States Accounting for the most significant drivers of energy intensity such as weather and operating characteristics a building whose performance is among the nation s top 25 percent equal to an energy performance rating of 75 or greater on a 1 to 100 scale and prove to maintain a healthy indoor environment can qualify as an ENERGY STAR buildin
299. icity meter installed on any building site is compatible with the base wide metering system with respect to the types of meters selected and the method used to program the meters for initial use Software and meter programming tools are necessary to set up the meters described by this specification New software tools different from the meter programming methods currently used by base personnel will require separate approval for use Contractor shall verify that the metering system installed on any building site is compatible with the facility wide or base wide communication and meter reading protocol system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 1 ELECTRICITY METERS AND ACCESSORIES Provide meter s and connect the meter s to the existing AMI DAS The contractor shall use the existing government laptop computers to configure the meter using existing software loaded on the computer The contractor will not be allowed to modify any software or add any additional software to the computer Alternatively the government will configure the meter s which must be compatible with the existing system using existing software Contract shall insure that the meter s will transmit the specified data to the DAS The current meters being used by are ION 8600A meters with X MB of memory 1 1 sles dL Physical and Common Requirements a Provide metering system components in accordance with the Metering System Schedule shown in this specification on
300. iding a computer with device programming tools as part of the project provide a means for detecting program errors and testing n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 18 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 software strategies with a simulation tool Simulation may be inherent within the programming software suite or provided by physical controllers mounted in a NEMA 1 test enclosure The test enclosure shall contain one dedicated controller of each type provided under this contract complete with power supply and relevant accessories 2 2 4 2 Parameter Modification All writeable object properties and all other programming parameters needed to comply with the project specification shall be adjustable for devices at any network level including those accessible with web browser communication and regardless of programming methods used to create the applications Z2 1 4 8 Short Cycling Prevention Provide setpoint differentials and minimum on off times to prevent equipment short cycling 2 1 4 4 Equipment Status Delay Provide an adjustable delay from when equipment is commanded on or off and when the control program looks to the status input for confirmation 2 1 4 5 Run Time Accumulation Use the Elapsed Time Property to provide re settable run time accumulation for each Binary Output Object conn
301. iew is 2 000 while a high density project is 4 000 In the Express program the application submittal must be scheduled and the submittal must be done in person For more information or to schedule a submittal meeting through the Express Program contact the Express Coordinators Janet Russell at janet russell ncdenr gov or Cameron Weaver at cameron weaver ncdenr gov The DENR permitting contact for Camp Lejeune is David Towler on base David can be reached at 910 451 3238 ext 3284 or by email at david towler usmc mil American Warrior Network Need a 2 conduit with pull string from the telecomm room assigned with wall space for the commercial provider to a Hand hole out side the building Building wiring should be CAT6 with a minimum of two cables per faceplate There should be 2 faceplates per user on opposite walls for example a two occupant room would have 4 faceplates Tele Comm outlet faceplates shall be standard double gang box with single gang reducer and 1 inch conduits stubbed into a basket tray in hallway ceiling Basket tray should feed from a comm room on the same floor or one floor above or below via 4 sleeves conduit Number of sleeves conduit should be calculated using fill ratios from TIA 569 B Face plate will contain two RJ 45 jacks per faceplate with 2 CAT 6 cables going back to 110 fields in the comm room Contact AWN Tussey Michael A for any questions Michael A Tussey sprint
302. ilding Code and the Water Supply permit All backflow preventers shall be accessible Reduced pressure principle assemblies double check valve assemblies atmospheric nonpressure type vacuum breakers and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested approved and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012 Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013 Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011 Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001 Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020 Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112 1 2 p RAINWATER HARVESTING SYSTEM Provide the rainwater harvesting system complete with all components necessary to provide a complete system to collect store and process rainwater for use in situ including water treatment as appropriate to intended service System shall include the following items SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 10 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 5 1 Rainwater Control System Provide a rainwater control system capable of monitoring and controlling the entire rainwater harvesting system The system shall be able to monitor the water level in the cistern storage tank the status of the filters and the purification system The system shall control the cistern pump and the bypass conn
303. ilter Provide a self cleaning type debris filter to remove trash before rainvater is delivered to the storage tank The filter is to be provided as a self contained unit vith inlet outlet and overflov pipe connections and removable stainless steel 0 35 mm meshl basketl strainer Provide an adjustable dome shaft with pedestrian load rated cover Provide the cover with a child proof closure 2 5 6 Initial Runoff Filter Water Diverter Provide an initial runoff filter water diverter to remove water borne contaminants The filter shall consist of a horizontal underground chamber sized as indicated on the Plumbing drawings to hold the initial water runoff from the roof Provide a floating ball at the filter inlet to divert water to the storage tank once the chamber of the initial runoff filter is full At the outlet end of the filter provide an adjustable orifice that slowly allows the water in the chamber to drain out over time The orifice shall be removable for servicing 2 5 7 Rainvater Sediment Filters Provide 50 and 10 micron sediment filters and a 10 micron carbon filter sized for the service intended and located as shovn on the dravings The filters shall have removable filter housings vith replaceable cartridge type filters and shall be NSF listed for the service intended 2 5 8 Rainvater Ultraviolet Purification System Provide a ultraviolet vater purifier sized for the service intended and located as shown on the drawings The unit sh
304. imes in the elevator hoistway in conformance with the NAVFAC Fire Protection UFC Indicate smoke detectors on electrical drawings unless there are separate fire protection drawings Coordinate with Fire Protection Engineer 6 1 7 2 For a code compliant interface with the elevator controller the smoke detector fire alarm initiating device system will require 3 to 4 relay modules for actuation of the elevator Firefighters Emergency Operation Mount FEO operation modules on the wall inside the elevator MR 6 1 8 Elevator Hoistway Pit Sump and Sump Pump For hydraulic elevator installations the hoistway pit sump pump control system audible and visual alarm indicators and controls must be installed in the elevator machine room 6 1 9 General Wiring requirements 6 1 9 1 Only electric wiring raceways and cables used directly in connection with the elevator are permitted inside the elevator machine room Allowable wiring includes wiring for signals lighting heating air conditioning and venting of the elevator MR 6 1 9 2 All conductors and optical fibers in the MR must be in conduit 6 2 Elevator Hoistway 6 2 1 120 VAC Hoistway Lighting and Receptacles A minimum of two 2 light 1 2 m 4 ft long fluorescent lighting fixtures must be provided for lighting of the elevator hoistway pit The fixtures must have a one piece molded high impact clear acrylic diffuser with a secure seal against dust and moisture A similar fixture must be pr
305. imum l 27 POLES Provide poles designed for wind loading of 161 km hr 100 miles per hour determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS 5 while supporting luminaires and all other appurtenances indicated The effective projected areas of luminaires and appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on each pole Poles shall bel embedded anchor base type designed for use with underground overhead supply conductors Poles other than wood poles shall have oval shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 65 by 130 mm 2 5 by 5 inches Handhole cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws Metal poles shall have an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the bottom of each pole Scratched stained chipped or dented poles shall not be installed d l Concrete Poles Page 19 Provide concrete poles conforming to ASTM C 1089 Cross sectional shape shall bel round or multi sided 7 1 1 Steel Reinforcing Prestressed concrete pole shafts shall be reinforced vith steel prestressing members Design shall provide internal longitudinal loading by either pretensioning or post tensioning of longitudinal reinforcing members 1 2 Tensioned Reinforcing Primary reinforcement steel used for a prestressed concrete pole shaft shall be tensioned betveen 60 to 70 percent of its ultimate strength The amount of reinforcement shall be such t
306. in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE except where noted otherwise Solders used on piping shall be as shown Piping shall be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS When a food grade uninhibited propylene glycol solution is used to heat SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 17 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 potable service vater tamper resistant seals must be attached to all fill ports All propylene glycol circuits must be labeled CONTAINS UNINHIBITED FOOD GRADE PROPYLENE GLYCOL INTRODUCTION OF ANY NONAPPROVED FLUID MAY CONSTITUTE A HEALTH HAZARD All tamper resistant seals must carry the name of the registered engineer or licensed plumber vho certifies that only a 50 percent food grade uninhibited propylene glycol and water solution has been installed in the system Air vents shall be installed at the high points of the collector array and in the equipment room 3522925 Pipe Expansion Expansion of supply and return pipes shall be provided for by changes in the direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops as indicated Expansion loops shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs of the system within the stress limits specified in ASME B31 1 Pipe guides shall be provided as indicated Expansion joints shall not be used in system piping 3 2 3 6 Valves Valves shall be installed at the locations indicated
307. in the tabla shall ba ventilated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 Ventilation for Acceptable indoor Air Quality and ASHRAE Handbook HVAC Applications Spacialzed patient amas including organ transplant units burn units spacialty procedure rooms ete shall have additional ventilation provisions for air quality control as may b appropriate OSHA standards and or NIOSH criteria quie spacial ventilation requirements for amployee health and within health care facilities 2 Dasign of the ventilation system shall provide air movament which is g narally trom clean to 855 chan amas If any form ofvariabk airvolume or load shad ding system is usad for anergy conservation it must not compromise the coni dor to room pressure balancing mlationships or tha minimum air changas aquired by the tabla gt To satisty axhaust naads replacement air from the outside is 9 55 Table 2 1 2 doas not attempt to describe spacific amounts of outside air to be sup pliad to individual spaces except for cartain areas such as those listed Distribution of the outside air added to the system to balance required 28 Professional Engineer s Guide axhaust shall b as required by good anginaaring practica Minimum outside air quantities shall main constant while the system is in operation In vari able volume systems the minimum outside air setting on the air handling unit shall b calculated using the ASHRAE 62 method
308. inaires d ANSI ballast type M98 M57 etc for HID luminaires e Correlated color temperature CCT and color rendering index CRI for all luminaires Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs Page 22 2 2 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems vhich shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein 3 1 1 Wood Poles Pole holes shall be at least as large at the top as at the bottom and shall be large enough to provide 100 mm 4 inches of clearance between the pole and the side of the hole a Setting depth Pole setting depths shall be as follows Length of Pole Setting in Soil 6100 mm 20 feet 1575 mm 7625 mm 25 feet 1575 mm 9150 mm 30 feet 1575 mm 10675 mm 35 feet 1830 mm 12200 mm 40 feet 1830 mm 13725 mm 45 feet 1985 mm 12250 mm 50 feet 2135 mm 16775 mm 55 feet 2285 mm 18300 mm 60 feet 2440 mm Length of Pole feet Setting in Soil feet 20 0 25 5 5 30 5 35 6 0 40 6 0 45 6 5 50 Ke 55 n s 60 0 b Soil setting Settin
309. indicated HPS lamps shall have average rated life of 16 000 hours minimum for 35 watt lamps and 24 000 hours minimum for all higher wattage lamps 150 watt lamps if required shall be 55 volt lamps Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings LER as follows a Upward efficiency of 0 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 58 LER for closed fixture minimum 68 for open fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 63 LER for closed fixture minimum 84 for open fixture b Upward efficiency of 1 percent 10 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 64 LER for closed fixture minimum 63 for open fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 82 LER for closed fixture minimum 89 for open fixture 3 1000 plus watts minimum 109 LER for open fixture c Upward efficiency of 11 percent to 20 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 78 LER for open fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 94 for open fixture d Upward efficiency greater than 20 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 75 LER for closed fixture minimum 77 for open fixture 12 2 122 Standby HPS Lamps ANSI ANSLG C78 42 Wattage as indicated Standby HPS lamps shall have two arc tubes and an average rated life of 40 000 hours minimum Hot restart instant lumen output shall be 8 percent minimum of total light output 150 watt lamps if required shall be 55 volt type 2 2 1 3 Low Pressure Sodium LPS Lamps ANSI ANSLG C78 41 2 2 1 4 Metal Halide Lamps Provide luminaires with tempered glass lens a Double en
310. ine in place of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Table 2 1 2 Ventilation Requirements for Areas Affecting Patient Care in Hospitals and Outpatient Facilities Air movement Minimum Minimum Allair relationship air changes total air exhausted Recirculated Relative Design to adiaoent pofoutdoor changes per directly biy humidity temperature Area designation area airper hour hour outdoors room units degrees F C NURSING UNITS Patient room 2 6 70 75 21 24 Toilet room In 10 Yes Newbom nursery suite 2 6 No 30 60 72 78 22 26 Protective environment room Out 2 12 No 75 24 Airbome infection isolation room In 2 12 Yes No 75 24 Isolation alcove or anteroom In Out _ 10 Yes No _ Patient corridor _ _ 2 _ _ _ _ OBSTETRICAL FACILITIES Delivery room Out 3 15 No 30 60 68 73 20 23 Labor deliery retovery 2 6 70 75 21 24 Labor delivery reoovery postpartum 2 6 70 75 21 24 EMERGENCY SURGERY AND CRITICAL CARE Operating surgical cystoscopic rooms t 33 Out 3 15 No 30 60 68 73 20 23 Recovery room 2 6 No 30 60 70 75 21 24 Critical and intensive care 2 6 _ No 30 60 70 75 21 24 Intermediate care 2 6 70 75 21 24 Newbom intensive care 2 6 No 30 60 72 78 22 26 Treatment room 6 75 24 Trauma room Out 3 15 No 30 60 70 75 21 24 Bronchoscopy In 2 12 Yes No 30 60 68 73 20 23 Triage In 2 12 Yes 70 75 21
311. ing and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts nuts and pressure plates The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 17 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 and provide a vatertight seal betveen the pipe and the sleeve Hach seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except vhere indicated or approved Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor or roof and shall be cut flush with each surface except for special circumstances Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms lavatories kitchens and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor Unless otherwise indicated sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1 4 inch one inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insul
312. ing binders with a title sheet on the outside of each binder indicating the project title project location contract number and the controls contractor name address and telephone number Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers with all material neatly organized Manuals shall include the following a A copy of the as built control system shop drawings set with all items specified under the paragraph Submittals Indicate all field changes and modifications b A copy of the project s mechanical design drawings including any official modifications and revisions c A copy of the project s approved Product Data submittals provided under the paragraph Submittals n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 40 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 d A copy of the project s approved Performance Verification Testing Plan and Report Test report shall be a 48 hour trend report verifying all temperature setpoints listed in the sequence of operation The trend 4 31 report should be printed from the EMCS server All systems AHU s ERV s CHWS HWS should be part of this section A copy of the project s approved final TAB Report Added by the Mechancical Contractor Division 23 Printouts of all control system programs including controller setup
313. ing to be a lot of anticipated movements where the students can potentially trip over the cables then the dongle can be mounted in the ceiling or be used with a weapon trunkline so that the cable run along side the sides of the room and out of the way of the students Since Bluefire weapons look very similar to its live weapon counterpart it is imperative that there is some kind of policy or procedure in place to prevent live weapons from entering into the FATS training room and Bluefire weapons from leaving the training room This may include a lockable cabinet for students to check in their live weapons before going into the FATS Training room If there are to be any props for students to practice cover drills with it is recommended to avoid all metal props or dividers because metal has a tendency to limit the range of any wireless link by shielding the RF signals This can cause problems in the operation of the weapon and system ATTACHMENT A Training Room Layout Drawings Training Facility Design Document Storage Area Location for CO2 Bottles Air Compressor Armory for Storage of Simulated Weapons Projector under raised deck Hole in raised deck for electrical air 4 or 5 Lane Single Screen System Recommended Facility Layout Training Facility Design Document Joss 1dtuoo iyys mog ZOO JO uoneoo7yeely BBEI0 S s Japun siolp loig yeoliiquun ireyiexuys r jno e1 ill9e3
314. ining Room Training room size should be sufficient to support use of additional training furniture such as simulated sandbags camouflage netting trenches etc These items are not part of the contract and would be constructed and installed by the customer If desired FATS can discuss things accomplished by other customers in this area Note Simulated Sandbags An actual sand bag filled with foam peanuts or another similar product This prevents the possibility of sand getting into the weapons and or electrical components It is recommended that you use wet sawdust sealed in a plastic bag then placed inside a sandbag 2 2 14 Air Flow Specifications Training Room The FATS system can use Compressed Air CO or Nitrogen N for simulated weapon recoil therefore no smoke or poisonous gases will be discharged from the simulated weapons FATS simulated weapons can operate using CO canisters Compressed air can also be used as a costed option If compressed air Training Facility Design Document is used it must be dry and filtered to prevent contamination Another issue vvith compressed air or nitrogen is that they will not last as long as the COz because they are stored as a gas where the COzis stored as a liquid and turns into a gas replenishing the gas suppiy Facility airflovv should be designed to support training room occupaney for up to 12 trainees 1 3 instructors and observers simultaneously Note If Compressed air or Nitro
315. installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor except at slab on grade at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction Type 35 guides using steel reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures atmospheric conditions and bearing loads encountered Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used 1 On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher a Type 39 saddle welded to the pipe may freely rest on a steel plate 2 On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield attached to the pipe or insulation may freely rest on a steel plate 3 On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield attached to the pipe or insulation may freely rest on a steel plate Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe
316. ion and Maintenance Data In addition to requirements of Data Package 5 include the folloving on the actual electricity meters and accessories provided a A condensed description of how the system operates b Block diagram indicating major assemblies c Troubleshooting information d Preventive maintenance e Prices for spare parts and supply list lt 6 WARRANTY The equipment items and software shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment and software on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract Page 4 1 7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 27 System Requirements Electricity metering consisting of meters and associated equipment vill be used to record the electricity consumption and other values as described in the requirements that follow and as shown on the drawings Communication system requirements are contained in a separate specification section as identified in paragraph entitled Communications Interfaces 2 Selection Criteria Metering components and softvare are part of a system that includes the physical meter data recorder function and communications method Every building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as required Contractor shall verify that the electr
317. ions are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS ASCE ASCE SEI 7 05 2006 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE ASHRAE 90 1 IP 2010 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings ASHRAE 93 2010 Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal Performance of Solar Collectors ASHRAE 96 1980 R 1989 Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal Performance of Unglazed Flat Plate Liquid Type Solar Collectors AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY AWS AWS A5 8 A5 8M 2004 Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B16 39 2009 Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions Classes 150 250 and 300 ASME B31 1 2010 Power Piping ASME B40 100 2005 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 2007 Addenda 2008 Addenda 2009 BPVC Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 1 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM INTERNATIONAL A193 A193M A194 A194M A216 A216M A351 A351M A792 A792M B 763 D 1570 D 903 E 1592 E 1646 E 1680 E 2140 E 283 ASTM
318. itch Astronomic dial type or electronic type arranged to turn ON at sunset and turn OFF at predetermined time betveen 8 30 p m and 2 30 a m or sunrise automatically changing the settings each day in accordance vith seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise Provide switch rated volts having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 7 hours following power failure Provide time switch with a manual on off bypass switch Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted NEMA 3R enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6 263 9 LED Luminaire Curfew Control Provide curfew control Curfew Control shall include after hours dimming control to reduce light levels to approximately 50 1 of full lumen output at a predetermined time This time setting will normally be after expected activity ends Design controls to fail to the ON full output position 2 3 10 LED Luminaire Occupancy Sensor Controls NEMA WD 7 UL 773A Provide passive infrared or microwave sensor with 360 coverage time delay that can be adjusted from 30 seconds to 30 minutes and designed to fail to the ON position Sensors shall be located to achieve coverage of areas indicated Coverage patterns shall be derated as recommended by manufacturer based on mounting height of sensor and any obstructions such as trees Do not use gross rated coverage in manufacturer s product literature Sensors integral to the luminair
319. iterrorism Standards for Buildings submittals for all building projects Additional and supplemental information may be used to further develop the review Insert N A after criteria which may be not applicable Provide this checklist with certification signatures in the project Design Analysis at each submittal Applicable Standards UFC 4 010 01 Chapter 1 2 Project Name Fill In Project Name Applicability The DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings apply to this project A New Construction This project consists of new construction Primary Gathering Billeting Inhabited Low Occupancy Expeditionary Temporary B Existing Building Cost exceeds 50 of Replacement Cost Cost less than 50 of Replacement Cost Primary Gathering Billeting Inhabited Low Occupancy Expeditionary Temporary C Building Addition 5096 or more of the Gross Area Less than 5096 of the Gross Area D Leased Building E Expeditionary amp Temporary Structures e Has Appendix D requirements been incorporated F National Guard Building G Tenant Bldgs on DOD Installations H Exempt Site Planning 1 Standard 1 Standoff Distance Appendix B 1 1 amp Table B 1 e Controlled Perimeter or Parking and Roadways w o Controlled Perimeter o Primary Gathering 148 Feet o Billeting 148 Feet o Inhabited 82 Feet e Parking and Roadways within a Controlled Perimeter o Primary Gathering 82 Feet o Billeting
320. ith USGBC and have the required LEED submittal documentation certified by USGBC to meet the required LEEDa Silver level rating Attachment 2 describes LEEDe credits as minimum measures that conform to the Executive Order requirements above For Navy and Marine Corps projects follow reference c for meeting LEEDa Silver rating certified by the USGBC as the minimum requirement for new buildings and major renovations where the work exceeds 50 percent of the building s plant replacement value PRV Building systems and features required for meeting the EPAct and sustainable development requirements will be included in the DD 1391 in accordance with guidance provided in attachment 3 For FY09 MILCON projects funds have been added to meet the requirements of EPAct E O 13423 registration with USGBC and USGBC LEEDe certification requirements For new buildings procured by reimbursable O amp M or funding other than MILCON ensure there is adequate funding to register the project with USGBC and meet the USGBC LEED submittal certification requirements Scope and funding for FY10 projects and beyond must support the requirements of EPAct E O 13423 registration with USGBC and USGBC LEEDa certification requirements Requirements will be identified as line items under EPAct Compliance LEEDa Silver in the DD 1391 Budget Estimate Summary Sheet and the total additional cost will be included in the EPAct Compliance LEEDa Silver line ite
321. ity of the primary tenants workers for office buildings customers for grocery stores supermarkets and students for K 12 schools are within the confines of the building Note Typically the operating hours of hotels and hospitals are 168 hours per week Does an employee kitchen or galley count as a cooking facility No In Portfolio Manager this question is used to determine whether it contains a cooking facility such as a Cafeteria where food is prepared and served to the primary occupants customers or guests Employee kitchens and galleys are outside the intent of this question Cafeterias that serve only to keep food warm that was prepared elsewhere should not be considered cooking facilities How should office buildings that have a large for example one half of one full floor full service cafeteria within the main office building structure be handled Is this space considered part of the primary office space or is it considered another space type such as restaurant Yes if the space serves the office building then it is considered part of the office space and should not be separated out If this cafeteria space is unrelated to the office building and is considered an independent operation such as a separate restaurant or catering service than it should be entered into Portfolio Manager as other In this case if the space is sub metered and less than 10 of the total square foot of the building then the energy consumpti
322. ive or motor 2 Power outage 3 Phase loss 4 Over voltage Under voltage f The ability shut down if inadvertently started into a rotating load without damaging the VFD or the motor g The ability to keep a log of a minimum of four previous fault conditions indicating the fault type and time of occurrence in descriptive text h The ability to sustain 110 percent rated current for 60 seconds i The ability to shutdown safely or protect against and record the following fault conditions 1 Over current and an indication if the over current was during acceleration deceleration or running 2 Over current internal to the drive 3 Motor overload at start up 4 Over voltage from utility power 5 Motor running overload 6 Over voltage during deceleration 7 VED over heat 8 Load end ground fault 9 Abnormal parameters or data in VFD EEPROM 2 6 6 Minimum Operating Conditions VFDs shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following service conditions a Ambient Temperature Range 0 to 120 degrees F b Non condensing relative humidity to 90 percent n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 33 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T 2 Ont Additional Features Provide VFDs with the following additional features a BACnet MS TP communication interf
323. ized horizontal illumination levels in lux footcandles at ground level taken every 130501 1610011 1 mm 10 20 Feet Include average maintained lux footcandle level and maximum and minimum ratio Provide Photometric Plan for project c Shielding as defined by IESNA RP 8 or B U G rating for the installed position as defined by IESNA TM 15 d Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family Include listing labeling and identification per NFPA 70 NEC Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration OSHA as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories NRTL and include CSA Canadian Standards Association ETL Edison Testing Laboratory and UL Underwriters Laboratory 1 4 4 Tests for Fiberglass Poles a Ultraviolet resistance tests Perform according to ASTM G 154 using a UV B lamp having a 313 nanometer wavelength operated at 54 degrees C 130 degrees F cycling the lamp on for 4 hours and off for 4 hours for a total test period of 1500 hours minimum with the following results Fiber exposure None Crazing None Checking None Chalking None Color May dull slightly Page 9 T b Flexural strength and deflection test Test loading shall be as a cantilever beam vith pole butt as fixed end and a force simulating vind load at the free end 4 5 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provi
324. k All devices using TCP IP or Ethernet connectivity require prior approval to be listed in the DITSCAP and SSA document b 2 22 EMCS Energy Management amp Control System The EMCS at Camp Lejeune is an nterprise system that actively receives energy and building condition information from multiple sources and provides load shedding electric metering alarming trending scheduling set point adjustment and device status of all supervisory building controllers for maintenance personnel The EMCS receives real time electrical utility pricing data and automatically manages to Camp Lejeune s energy target The existing Camp Lejeune EMCS is manufactured by Johnson Controls and incorporates the Metasys extended architecture system that communicates over the MRAN 1 2223 EMCS Owner The regional or local user responsible for managing all aspects of the BAS operation including network connections workstation management submittal review technical support control parameters and daily operation The BAS Owner for this project is Utility Monitoring amp Control UMAC Director n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 5 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T T 1 2 24 Ethernet A family of local area netvork technologies providing high speed netvorking features over various media Bas
325. l be sealed as indicated Pipes up to and including 10 inches in diameter passing through floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess anchor lugs flashing clamp device and pressure ring with brass bolts Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed 3 1 4 3 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors Where pipes or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing a groove 1 4 to 1 2 inch wide by 1 4 to 3 8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe fitting or drain The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 18 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 1 4 4 Pipe Penetrations Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air insects and vermin 3 1 5 Fire Seal Where pipes pass through fire walls fire partitions fire rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 3 1 6 Supports 3 1 6 1 General Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricate
326. l comply with enclosure 1 Projects currently under design shall be revised to comply where schedule and funds permit b Criteria NAVFAC CI will coordinate the revision of existing and the drafting of new Unified Facilities Criteria UFC documents to incorporate the provisions of enclosure 1 c References to ITG FY05 02 have been added by changes to the following documents UFC 1 200 01 Design General Building Requirements UFC 3 410 0 02N Design HVAC Systems UFC 3 100 10N Architectural UFC 3 400 10N Mechanical Quality Performance Quality Results Subi INTERIM TECHNICAL GUIDANCE ITG FY05 1 NAVFAC HUMID AREA HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Upon incorporation of Humid Area Design Criteria into existing and new documents the above ITG FY05 02 and references to it will be cancelled 4 Point of Contact For clarification or additional information related to this subject please contact Mr Thomas J Harris PE DSN 262 4206 Comm 757 322 4206 email thomas j harris navy mil S P GEUSIC By direction Distribution COMNAVFACENGCOM USACOE HQ USAF AFCESA USMC HQ COMNAVRESFOR COMNAVREG NORTHEAST COMNAVREG MID ATLANTIC COMNAVREG SOUTHEAST COMNAVREG NORTHWEST COMNAVREG SOUTHWEST COMNAVREG HAWAII NAVFAC ATLANTIC NORFOLK VA NAVFAC EFD SOUTH CHARLESTON SC NAVFAC EFD SOUTHWEST SAN DIEGO CA NAVFAC PACIFIC PEARL HARBOR HI NAVFAC WASHINGTON DC NAVFAC EFA SOUTHEAST NAVFAC EFA MED NAPLES IT NAVFAC MIDWEST GREAT
327. l devices including the word power in the label Number each pneumatic tube every six feet Label all terminal blocks with alpha numeric labels All wiring and the wiring methods shall be in accordance with UL 508A g For controller power provide new 120 VAC circuits with ground if not defined on the electrical drawings Provide each circuit with a dedicated breaker and run wiring in its own conduit separate from any control wiring Connect the controller s ground wire to the electrical panel ground conduit grounds are not acceptable h Surge Protection Install surge protection according to manufacturer s instructions Multiple controllers fed from a common power supply may be protected by a common surge protector properly sized for the total connected devices i Grounding Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Conduit grounding is not acceptable all grounding shall have a direct path to the building earth ground Ground sensor drain wire shields at the controller end 0 ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 37 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 T j The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all associated ground loop problems k Run wiring in panel enclosures in covered wire track 321 7 Access
328. l to exhaustthe airfrom the aimore infection isolation room to the outside the air may b retumad through HEPA Mitars to the air handling system exclusively sarving the isolation room ational Institut for Occupational Safety and H alth NIOSH Criteria Documents garding Occupational Exposure to Waste Anesthetic Gases and Vapors and Control of Occupational Exposure to Nitrous Oxide indicate a naad for both local w US EPA ENERGY STAR 29 Professional Engineer 5 Guide eu w B 65 9 w WH 1100 1006 Dry Bulb Temperature F 2009 Appendix G How to Apply for the ENERGY STAR Label How to Apply for the ENERGY STAR Label Follow the six steps below to qualify your building as ENERGY STAR 1 2 4 Determine if the building meets the eligibility requirements Login to Portfolio Manager and enter the required energy and building information Determine if the building achieves a rating of 75 or above Verify that all information provided on the following documents is true and accurate to the best of their ability Both documents must be signed and dated at the time of the site visit The Statement of Eneroy Performance must also be stamped by the Professional Engineer A Statement of Energy Performance Determine if the building meets industry standards for comfort and indoor air quality A Professional Engineer must verify that each of the indoor environment criteria requirements have been met and all informatio
329. lamp Specifications U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EPA Energy Star 1992 R 2006 Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 3 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 U S GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL USGBC LEED 2002 R 2005 Leadership in Eneroy and Environmental Design tm Green Building Rating System for Nev Construction LEED NC U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 40 CFR 50 12 National Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards for Lead PL 109 58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 EPAct05 2 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Rainwater harvesting System G Detail drawings consisting of schedules performance charts instructions diagrams and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code Detail drawings for the complete rainwater harvesting system including piping layouts and locations of connections dimensions for roughing in foundation and support points schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams Detail drawings shall indicate cl
330. langes Unions flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls ceilings or partitions Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2 1 2 inches and smaller flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger 3 1 3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials Connections between ferrous and non ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose 3 1 4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location 3 1 4 1 Sleeve Requirements Unless indicated otherwise provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements Secure sleeves in position and location during construction Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls ceilings roofs and floors A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulk
331. las to determine the horizontal seismic force are in the form of Fp Cs Wp where Fp seismic force Cs seismic coefficient Wp weight of the ducts or pipes Horizontal seismic forces may also is expressed as a percentage of the weight of the elements being braced It is this percentage that correlates to a desig nation utilized by SMACNA called the Seismic Hazard Level SHL that will be addressed later and is fully explained in Appendix A of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition The codes have formulas for calculating the percentage horizontal seismic force based on the seismic zone the importance factor and the type construction The percent horizontal seismic factor is expressed as F Fp Wp 100 and Cs Fp Wp Cs 100 More specifically the formula in the IMC and used in the Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc BOCA National Building Code 1996 Chapter 16 to determine the seismic force is Fp Av Cc P Ac Wc where Av Figure 1610 1 3 1 Cc Figure 1610 6 4 1 P Figure 1610 6 4 1 requires determination of SHEG SHEG Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Table 1610 1 5 Ac Figure 1610 6 4 2 Conveniently the percent horizontal seismic factor is expressed as F Wc 100 Av Cc P Ac 100 The Seismic Hazard Level SHL designation was developed specifically for the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition It is
332. latent cooling load at the design weather condition causes a system reheat requirement to maintain space conditions if total dehumidification were to be accomplished by 5 of 14 Enclosure 1 the system cooling coil The HVAC systems must provide the capability to condition ventilation air and maintain space relative humidity less than 60 percent over the full range of cooling load Where a separate system is provided to treat outdoor air the system must comply with 6 1 4 8 1 2 below 6 1 4 3 Psychrometric Design Analysis The HVAC design analysis for new facilities or renovation of existing facilities must include a psychrometric analysis of each system documenting that the system design meets the criteria in paragraph 6 1 4 1 The analysis must provide calculations of system cooling loads sensible and latent coil selections fan selections chiller or refrigeration system selections and a system psychrometric diagram and table indicating state point conditions of dry bulb wet bulb and dew point temperatures humidity ratios enthalpy and relative humidity of outside air mixed air supply air and return air flow streams 6 1 4 4 Equipment Compliance Construction specifications will require HVAC equipment submittals documenting that proposed equipment is in compliance with the design 6 1 4 5 Ventilation Air Supply ventilation air to satisfy ASHRAE 62 2004 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality for the number of occupants o
333. ld water at local groundwater temperature 326 FIELD TRAINING Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members Training shall be provided in accordance with solar energy collecting system manufacturer s requirements and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests The training shall include discussion of the system design and layout and demonstrations of routine operation and maintenance data and procedures This training shall include normal system operation and control flow balancing detection of a nonfunctioning system due to sensor controller and or mechanical failure filling draining and venting of the collector array replacement of sensors collectors and collector components collector cleaning and inspection for leaks and heat exchanger cleaning and expansion tank charging if applicable End of Section SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 22 T 2D COMBAT ENGIN ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkikkkikkkikkkikkkkkkkkkkkkkikkkikkkikkikikkkikkkkkkkkkkikkkikkkikkik kk k k k k This specification section applies to MCB Camp Lejeune and MCAS New River projects only k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k i k k k k k k k k k k PART 1 GENERAL
334. lding for steam equipment and pumps is good Provide exhaust fan ventilation with 20ac hr on cooling thermostat Ventilate hot rooms and electrical rooms sufficient to mitigate heat gain Do not ventilate cold equipment rooms Cold equipment rooms are those rooms with chilled water pumping cooling air handlers chillers etc These rooms should be unvented and with small dehumidifier Drain condensate to floor drain or other disposal location Summer dew point ranges from low to high 70 s at Camp Lejeune causing condensation on equipment and piping Do not permit 400 series refrigerants except 407C and 410A 400 series refrigerants are zeotropes and cause maintenance problems Use of 407C is discouraged as it is a short term stop gap measure that the manufacturers can drop into basically a R22 machine Designer shall research the availability of 410A and or 134A equipment If sufficient competition is available with 410A and or 134A prohibit the use of 407C and R22 5 22 09 Do not permit specify engine driven refrigeration equipment Outside air intakes should be in compliance with force protection criteria ie minimum of 10 above finished grade 25 26 27 28 29 30 A C terminal units vvith compressors shall be easily removed On vvater source equipment that means unions on the equipment side of the service valves Design and specify bladder type expansion tanks vvith automatic air relief valve on air separ
335. liance with these requirements 3 Policy amp Implementation Energy Efficiency Reference a requires that new Federal buildings shall be designed to achieve energy consumption levels that are at least 30 percent below the levels established in the current ASHRAE Standard reference f or the International Energy Conservation Code For major renovations where the work exceeds 50 percent of the building s plant replacement value PRV the designs shall achieve energy consumption levels that are at least 20 percent below the pre renovation 2003 baseline if life cycle cost effective Water Conservation For indoor water after meeting the baseline Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements calculated for the building employ strategies that use a minimum of 20 percent less potable water For outdoor water employ water efficient landscape and irrigation strategies including water reuse and recycling to reduce outdoor potable water consumption by a minimum of 50 percent over that consumed by conventional means plant species and plant densities FY08 Projects NAVFAC FYOS construction projects have been funded without any programmed amount for compliance with EPAct 2005 Projects with design starts and Request for Proposal RFP preparations started on or after 3 January 2007 must comply with EPAct 2005 as codified under US Code 10 CFR 433 amp 435 regardless of fund source Issue POC Mike Chapman 202 685 9175 2 o
336. ll building components and all installed mechanical or electrical system components b Only items that are directly related to the installation and operation of the elevator may be installed in the elevator machine room In addition pipes ducts and conduit not related to the elevator system must not penetrate the machine room 5 1 3 Machine Room Sound Level The acoustic output of any equipment in elevator machine room must not exceed 80 dBA measured at any point in the elevator machine room 5 2 Elevator Hoistway 5 2 1 Elevator Hoistvvay Ventilation Provide exterior ventilation of hoistway in accordance with IBC If ventilation is required provide a weatherproof louver with a minimum free area of 3 1 2 of the area of the hoistway pit but in no case can it be less than a free area of 3 square feet The hoistway wall 12 penetration must comply with the ASME A17 1 elevator safety code recess and setback requirements 5 2 1 1 For geographic locations with exterior conditions that are detrimental to the elevator hoistway equipment and to building conditions an automatic louver may be provided The automatic louver must be equipped with a mechanical spring device to apply opening pressure at all times The safety code allows the louver to be held in the closed position as long as it is monitored and controlled by the facility fire alarm panel 5 2 2 Mechanical Equipment Installation Only mechanical equipment and systems that are directly r
337. ll be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height Installation of colored metal disks shall follow SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 23 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 completion of the finished surface on vhich the disks are to be fastened The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 3 foot vidth 30 inches height and 1 2 inch thickness The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1 16 inch transparent plastic cover Unless othervise directed the color code symbols shall be approximately 3 4 inch in diameter and the related lettering in 1 2 inch high capital letters The color code board shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room The color code system shall be as determined by the Contracting Officer The color code shall meet base requirements 3 7 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping exposed to view passes through floors walls or ceilings except in boiler utility or equipment rooms Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin finish corrosion resisting steel polished chromium plated zinc alloy or polished chromium plated copper alloy Escutcheons shall be either one piece or split pattern held in place by internal spring tension or setscrev 348 PAINTING Paintin
338. ll be taken by the space HVAC equipment such as the outside wall load the interior corridor or mechanical chase load the fenestration load and the various internal loads such as lights cook top microwave ceiling fan motor washer dryer and personal items such a televisions computers etc Consider now only 2 persons in the apartment VAS still 60 CFM Space Latent Load 510 BTUHL Space Sensible Load 510 BTUHS A grHR BTUHL 0 68 CFM 510 BTUHL 0 68 X 60 12 5 grHR At Fdb BTUHS 1 08 X CFM 510 BTUHS 1 08 X 60 7 9 Fdb VAS HR Conditions must be Space HR 67 gr 12 5 gr 54 5 grHR Therefore The VAS cooling coil leaving conditions are about 52 8 Fdb 51 4 Fwb 50 4 Fadpt amp 54 5 grHR To maintain the VAS 70 RH in ductwork requirement of the ITG Encl 1 6 4 7 1 1 reheat is needed to obtain a VAS reheat coil leaving conditions of 62 4 Fdb 70 RH 55 4 Fwb 50 3 Fdpt amp 54 5 grHR Therefore Space temperature without other sensible loads would be VAS reheat coil leaving conditions of 62 4 Fdb 7 9 Fdb 70 3 Fdb with refrigerator heat added it will be 70 3 Fdb 5 75 Fdb 76 1 Fdb Therefore the VAS Exhaust systems need to sense the building room average conditions and reset the VAS cooling coil and VAS reheat coil leaving conditions based upon occupancy Consider a Relative Humidity or Dew point sensor sensing the building total bathroom EA airflow dew point and averaging it
339. lly used to control various equipment in mechanical rooms such as pumps heat exchangers and chillers 1 2 18 4 Supervisory Controllers Supervisory Controller is used to coordinate all equipment in a building input scheduling and is often used as a connection point for transferring configuration files to the other controllers 1 2 18 5 Supervisory Building Controller SBC Supervisory Building Controller SBC is used to connect the building s DDC system MS TP to Camp Lejeune s EMCS TC IP Depending on approvals and capabilities the SBC and supervisory controller may be combined into the same piece of hardware 1 2 19 Direct Digital Control DDC Digital controllers performing control logic Usually the controller directly senses physical values makes control decisions with internal programs and outputs control signals to directly operate switches valves dampers and motor controllers 1 2 20 DDC System A distribution network of digital controllers communication architecture and user interfaces A DDC system may include programming sensors actuators switches relays factory controls operator workstations and various other devices components and attributes 1 2 21 DITSCAP Department of Defense Information Technology Security Certification and Accreditation Process DITSCAP DISCAP and DIACAP are processes that approve IP base equipment that is connected and communicates on the base Ethernet networ
340. lve stems shall be stainless steel c Unless indicated otherwise provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate d Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves unless indicated otherwise 2567575 Valves for Hot Nater Service Valves for hot vater service belov 250 Degrees F a Bodies for valves 1 1 2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze with threaded or union ends Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3 inches inclusive shall be of brass bronze or iron Bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded connections Bodies for valves from 2 1 2 to 3 inches shall have flanged connections b Internal trim including seats seat rings modulation plugs valve n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 26 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 T stems and springs of valves controlling water above 210 degrees F shall be Type 300 series stainless steel C Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze Valve stems shall be Type 300 series stainless steel d Non metallic parts of hot water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature whichever is higher e Unless i
341. ly Uniformity should also be evaluated particularly next to walls in corners and parking garages where security and safety might be of question Areas with occupant supplied task lights de lamped fixtures or numerous burned out lamps should receive additional scrutiny as these are areas that may be under lit The PE should be able to make a professional judgment on whether appropriate illumination exists through a subset of measurements in a representative sample of spaces within the building 12 5 6 Illumination Q amp A If the measured illumination levels of a single occupied space are below the minimum recommended levels as defined in the IESNA Lighting Handbook is that in and of itself sufficient grounds to fail the building for inadequate illumination Generally no the assessment of illumination should take into account measurements and observations of all spaces and is not necessarily contingent upon one occupied space meeting the minimum recommended levels Based on observations at the time of the site visit the PE must determine whether the building lighting system meets the minimum recommended illumination levels for the current occupancy 13 Module 6 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 6 1 Objective The PE must verify that minimum ventilation rates and acceptable indoor air quality are provided according to industry standards as part of the review for the ENERGY STAR label to help assur
342. m nrnna 5 2 4 2 Power Requirements Compressor 6 2 4 3 Environmental Requirements Storage Room n 6 2 4 4 Lighting Requirements Storage U U 6 2 4 5 Access Compressor ROOM cccccececeeeeeeneeceeeeeeesecaanaeceeeeeeedeneanaeceeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeteseenaees 6 20 OR S 6 2 6 Safety 649 1 1 1 05955060500000000000000 6 2 7 BLUEFIRE 6 ALARDI qay dana 6 ATTACHMENT A Training Room Layout Dravvings 7 Training Facility Design Document 1 INTRODUCTION This Recommended Training Facility Design Document contains information to be used in the planning stages for construction of a training facility for housing the FATS Virtual Trainer 2 PREPARING THE TRAINING FACILITY This section provides information that is required for preparing the site for installation and operation of the FATS Virtual Trainer in the single and multiple screen configurations 2 1 GENERAL FACILITY LAYOUT FATS recommends a facility layout that includes a Training Room s Weapon Storage Room Compressor Room and Office e Training Room All training will be conducted in the Training Room which houses all simulation equipment e Weapon Storage Room The Storage Room provides for simul
343. m facilities and laboratories vocational technical or trade schools The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as administrative space conference rooms kitchens used by staff lobbies cafeterias gymnasiums auditoria laboratory classrooms portable classrooms greenhouses stairways atria elevator shafts small landscaping sheds storage areas etc Medical Office Medical Office applies to facility space used to provide diagnosis and treatment for medical dental or psychiatric outpatient care The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as kitchens used by staff laboratories lobbies atria conference rooms and auditoria fitness areas for staff storage areas stairways elevator shafts etc Additional guidance Healthcare Classification Document Z AAGKB Office Office applies to facility spaces used for general office professional and administrative purposes The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as kitchens used by staff lobbies atria conference rooms and auditoria fitness areas for staff storage areas stairways elevator shafts etc Parking The Parking space type is intended for any area connected to the building that is used for parking vehicles This includes parking lots fully enclosed parking structures and unenclosed parking structures that are open on all sides and may or may not include roof parking All parking areas
344. m in Box 9 of the DD 1391 For new buildings Issue POC Mike Chapman 202 685 9175 3 of 4 ECB posted at https portal navfac navy mil pls portal url page ci ecb ssue No 2008 01 13 December 2007 Type Guidance procured by reimbursable or Special Project funding programmers must ensure there is adequate funding to meet the mandatory energy performance levels 4 Action This policy and implementation is effective immediately Changes to criteria documents and NAVFAC standard contract templates to reflect this policy have been implemented Project managers and contracting officers will ensure that all applicable contracts are in compliance with this guidance Capital Improvements will coordinate with the NAVFAC Acquisition Office to address policy issues related to final payment and contractor performance assessments This document has been reviewed by Headquarters U S Marine Corps and is fully applicable to all USMC installations E GOTT P E higf Engineer and Director Capital Improvements Acting Issue POC Mike Chapman 202 685 9175 4 of 4 ECB posted at https portal navfac navy mil pls portal url page ci ecb Attachment 1 Energy Policy Act 2005 Design and Construction Requirements EPAct 2005 Section 103 Provide utility meters on all nevv federal buildings Paragraph 2 6 of UFC 3 400 01 Energy Conservation currently requires metering of each utility serving the building EPAct 2005 Section 108 U
345. m potable water the non potable water shall be dyed with a purple color Pantone 522 and Tembossed or integrally stamped or painted CAUTION RECLAIMED WATER DO NOT DRINK Provide this notice at all hose bibbs connected to the rainwater harvesting system The non potable water piping system shall have its own particular identification color and pipe ID code name The identification color shall be in accordance with local codes The non potable water system shall have a potable water back up for supplement during dry spells Provide potable water back up via air gap or reduced pressure back flow preventer and a pressure reducing station with level controls in accordance with the plumbing codes NC building code NCDENR requirements North Carolina Administrative Code and EPA requirements Provide drainage of cooled condensate to rainwater collection system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERTALS The requirements for pressure piping and fittings are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in the rainwater harvesting system Rainwater collection piping located outside the building shall be as specified in Section 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIHS 2 Miscellaneous Materials Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the folloving a Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction ASTM B 370 b Asphalt Roof Cement ASTM D 2822 c Hose Clamps SAE J1508 d Hypo
346. machine room 3 1 3 Elevator Machine Room Access A clear access route must be provided from the facility exterior entrance to the elevator MR door The route must have a minimum width of 36 and a minimum height of 84 3 1 3 1 A stairway with a maximum inclination of 45 degrees must be provided for vertical access to an elevator MR Vertical ladders ships ladders and alternating step tread designs must not be used for MR access Steps must be designed with a maximum riser height of 8 and a minimum step tread depth of 8 as measured from each adjoining step nose to nose The height of the access stairs may not exceed a rise of 10 without an intermediate landing 3 1 4 Elevator Machine Room Floor Differences For any difference in the height of the machine room floor provide a standard railing on the upper floor level 3 2 Elevator Hoistway 3 2 1 Elevator Hoistway Pit Entrapment Protection The design of the elevator and hoistway must provide a minimum horizontal clearance of 20 between the side of the elevator platform cab and any one wall of the elevator hoistway A horizontal clearance of 20 Deep X 30 Wide must be maintained from the pit floor to the top of the hoistway entrance assembly at the lowest landing 3 2 2 Elevator Hoistway Plans Develop detailed plan and section drawings for elevator hoistway Show location of all support beams in the hoistway For multiple elevators in the same hoistway provide divider be
347. mance Verification Testing Plan and the Pre PVT Checklist specified under the paragraph PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING f Perform the Performance Verification Testing g Submit and receive approval on the PVT Report h Submit and receive approval on the Training Documentation specified under the paragraph INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL and VFD Service Support Submit at least 30 days before training i Deliver the final Controls System Operators Manuals and VFD Service Manuals j Conduct the Phase I Training and VFD on site hands on training k Conduct the Phase II Training 1 Submit and receive approval of Closeout Submittals PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 DDC SYSTEM Provide a networked DDC system for stand alone control in compliance with the latest revision of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard Include all programming objects and services required to meet the sequence of control Provide BACnet MSTP communications between the DDC system and native BACnet devices furnished with HVAC equipment and plant equipment such as boilers and chillers when provided with BACnet MSTP communications DDC controllers provided shall be certified in the BACnet n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 14 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC E PROJECT W O No 80511 Testing Laboratories BTL Product Listing BACnet over IP is
348. manually feed chemicals in the event of pool controller failure If chemical feed is controlled by energizing de energizing the receptacle supplying the feed pumps each pump shall have a separate independent and labeled receptacle 7 2 09 102 Minimum chemical storage for an indoor Olympic size pool shall be 300 gallons of sodium hypochlorite and 150 gallons of sulfuric acid Chemical storage shall be proportional to pool size Outdoor pools require increased storage capacity All chemical storage tanks shall have secondary containment Chemical rooms shall be mechanically vented dedicated to chemical storage and large enough to increase the storage by 50 Chemical rooms shall be located with easy access by delivery tanker truck Entrances to chemical room shall be labeled with Hazmat Placard 7 2 09 103 Do not use brass saddles at chemical injection points Use PVC 104 Do not locate normally serviced equipment such as pumps backflow preventers lint traps etc in pits Equipment that requires regular operation service or maintenance shall not be located in confined spaces 7 2 09 105 The contractor shall modify the front end software at the water plant to receive and display the new pool a Wallace creek recreation center shall transmit to the building 20 water plant b The wounded warrior pool shall transmit to the building 670 water plant 106 Swimming pools shall comply with 15A NCAC 18 A2500 North Carolin
349. ment plates to structural elements of a reinforced slab Bracing of non vibration isolated suspended equipment such as small in line pumps fan coils mixing boxes water source heat pumps and the like involves nothing more than to keep the equipment from swaying into adjacent equipment pipes ducts or structure Anti sway bracing may be accomplished by use of slack cables or steel struts ASHRAE recommends use of prestretched aircraft quality cable Additional information can be found in ASHRAE A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint Seismic Restraint of Equipment with Vibration Isolators Seismic restraint for equipment mounted on vibration isolators is more complex since the isolators tend to amplify seismic forces Amplification occurs because vibration isolators usually have the same natural resonant frequency as an earthquake energy peak To quell the amplified movement of equipment on vibration isolators snubbing devices or sway braces are employed Considerations on the use of snubbers and sway braces include o Clearances around snubbers should be about 6 mm 1 4 Larger gaps will permit high inertia forces that will increase load on equipment Smaller gaps could hinder the effectiveness of vibration isolators o Chillers and boilers etc can be directly mounted on seismic snubbers with built in vibration isolators o Floor mounted lightweight equipment not having adequate stiffness may require supplemental structural bases
350. mergency power buss 2 3 2 1 Elevators that are not designed for emergency power operation must be designed and equipped with an emergency battery lowering system that will run the elevator to the next available landing open the doors and shut the elevator off at that landing 2 3 3 Building Telephone and Communication Systems Emergency communication is required from the elevator cab to an emergency response desk that is manned 24 hours a day The emergency response communication system must be answered by emergency personnel and not by an automated answering system In addition the elevator cab communication device must provide communication between the elevator MR and the elevator cab 2 4 Contract Options and Documentation 2 4 1 Contract Type Contract types for new construction projects typically include either Design Build or Design Bid Build 2 4 1 1 For Design Build Contracts the design team develops a Request for Proposal RFP using the Design Build Template that is located on the Whole Building Design Guide 2 4 1 2 For Design Bid Build Contracts the design team develops full plans and specifications for the project Plans and specifications will be developed either in house or through contract with an A E firm 2 4 2 Uniform Facilities Guide Specifications For all contracts utilize the complete and most current version of the Naval Facilities Guide Specifications NFGS for elevators to specify the project elevators The NFGS
351. methodology outlined in the UFC 3 400 01 5 Optimize the Building Envelope Optimize the exterior building envelope to reduce energy This goes hand in hand with ASHRAE 90 1 Increase the wall insulation and roof insulation Exceed the latest ASHRAE 90 1 requirements NAVFAC MIDLANT is incorporating this on current design projects 6 Optimize the Window Requirements Optimize the window strategy to reduce energy even further Utilize latest version of ASHRAE 90 1 requirements and exceed them Consider additional thermal insulation capabilities insulated frames shading effects and consider shading devices such as overhangs to reduce the solar load on the windows 2018 NAVFAC MIDLANT is incorporating this on current design prolects Consider reducing vvindovv size unless it impacts LEED factors for daylighting 7 Radiant Barriers in the Walls Incorporate radiant barriers in the wall systems to reduce the radiant heat transfer and reduce the energy transfer through the walls NAVFAC MIDLANT is incorporating this on current design projects 3 of 8 6 Radiant Barriers in the Roof ncorporate radiant barriers in the roof system to reduce the radiant heat transfer and reduce the energy transfer through the roof This will require a major attention to the attic and roof design The roof materials must be considered because the radiant barrier will increase the roof temperature 9 Increase Building Envelope Tightness Incorpora
352. mit frequency Acceleration and Deceleration rate Variable torque volts per Hertz curve Starting voltage level Starting frequency level Display speed scaling Enable disable auto restart feature Enable disable soft stall feature Motor overload level Motor stall level Jump frequency and hysteresis band PWM carrier frequency Protective Features VFDs shall have the following protective features a An electronic adjustable inverse time current limit with consideration for additional heating of the motor at frequencies below 45Hz for the protection of the motor An electronic adjustable soft stall feature allowing the VFD to lower the frequency to a point where the motor will not exceed the full load n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 32 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 amperage when an overload condition exists at the requested frequency The VFD will automatically return to the requested frequency when load conditions permit C A separate electronic stall at 110 percent VFD rated current and a separate hardware trip at 190 percent current d Ground fault protection that protects the output cables and motor from grounds during both starting and continuous running conditions e The ability to restart after the following faults 1 Overcurrent dr
353. mption that is life cycle cost effective At no time shall the designed energy consumption level exceed the applicable standard ASHRAE Standard 90 1 2004 or IECC EPAct 2005 Section 553 All energy using products or systems procured shall be Energy Star products or FEMP Federal Energy Management Program designated products This affects built in and collateral equipment such as HVAC lighting transformers office equipment food service equipment appliances and all other energy consuming products NAVFAC presently complies with this requirement through references in Unified Facility Criteria for mechanical and electrical equipment Ensure these requirements are written into all contract scope of work statements including Category 3 amp Category 4 projects 1 Attachment 1 Attachment 2 MOU High Performance Credits Executive Order Strengthening Federal Environmental Energy and Transportation Management dated 24 January 2007 references the Memorandum of Understanding MOU on Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings The MOU represents a commitment by 21 federal agencies including the Department of Defense to reduce energy demands and employ appropriate sustainable design strategies that are life cycle cost effective Specific goals and measures were identified in the MOU that typically have high return on investment These goals and measures satisfy the requirements of the Energy Policy Act 2005 E
354. n akaqa z ARA yaaa aksa 2 X CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURAL 4 1 Elevator Machine Room 2 X 4 2 Elevator To siWaya uasuuns s a uu BARBARA D la B 2 X 4 3 Elevator Hoistyyay Pit Lesner nien ner Ee nEn Ink RSSRA EE REER 2 X CHAPTER 5 MECHANICAL 5 1 Elevator Machine Room a aaasssessysssasqyasssqpassqassaswaqyashassswasksssqsyssssss 2 X 5 2 Elevator HO st Way isis na R SAYAR ER E E Ei 2 X 5 3 Elevator Hostway Pit iiciscse cesccsssccncicecsenazcanedieeduncuenssadcnseedaascsensedilivesepnearecnceacdeevenes 2 X CHAPTER 6 ELECTRICAL 6 1 Elevator Machine Room ccccccsseesseeseeeeceeeceseceecaecaecaeecaeecaeeeeeeseecseeeeeeeeeeereeeees 2 X 6 2 Elevator Hostway subst sed EREEREER EE EE 2 X 6 3 Elevator Hoist way PIt uy a uaaaaasyassawasaawakaasaaqasapasuyqayqas aasawa 2 X CHAPTER 7 FIRE PROTECTION 7 1 Fite ss s EE EErEE 2 X 7 2 Fire Protection System orarie esea TE E E R ERE ER 2 X CHAPTER 8 ELEVATOR SYSTEMS and COMPONENTS 8 1 Elevator Machine Room 2 1 8 2 Elevator HO st Way E EE EEEO EEEE 2 X 8 3 Elevator Cab and Landing FIXf ur S_ 2 X 8 4 Elevator Car and Counterweight 5
355. n service or maintenance of elevators 8 1 2 1 2 The elevator controller manufacturer must provide comprehensive factory training to include controller installation adjustment service and maintenance The training must be identified as available to any licensed elevator contractor The manufacturer must have an established and documented schedule with pricing for factory training classes that have been provided for a period of one year prior to contract award date of the applicable project 8 1 2 1 3 The elevator controller must be identified as available for purchase and installation by any licensed elevator contractor In addition all parts diagnostic tools and software must be available for purchase and installation and use by any licensed elevator contractor exchange only provisions for the purchase of spare parts are not acceptable 8 1 2 1 4 The elevator controller manufacturer must publish an industry competitive price listing for all controller parts diagnostic tools and software 8 1 2 1 5 A desktop PC must be provided with complete elevator controller interface capability and with the manufacturer s comprehensive package of installation and diagnostic software The PC and software system must provide unrestricted access to all parameters all levels of adjustment and all flags necessary for installation adjustment maintenance and troubleshooting of the elevator Expiring software degrading operation and key
356. n Cost Tool and has been expanded to include worksheets for seven facility types common to the Department of Defense Each facility worksheet recommends Energy Conservation Measures ECMs for building components and systems which are identified for specific climate zones 1 Commissioning Provide Enhanced Commissioning The change to Enhanced Commissioning is located at LEED NC latest version EA Credit 3 Enhanced commissioning requires the involvement of the Commissioning Agent CA to review the building operation for 10 months and resolve the issues NAVFAC MIDLANT s policy is for the Contractor and the CA to optimize all of the electrical and mechanical systems to the system peak operating efficiencies as an Energy feature however change the time from 10 months to 12 months Enhanced commissioning resolves by keeping the project on design target and goals keeps construction from deviating from design fine tunes systems ensures that operators are trained ensures that systems are maintained and improves energy efficiency 2 ECB 2008 03 Acceptance Testing of Critical Systems dated 25 Sept 08 Incorporate the requirements of the engineering Construction Bulletin ECB 2008 03 in the acceptance testing of critical systems Why Ver 2 October 2009 Attachment The ECB requires focus towards NAVFAC s technical oversight of acceptance testing during construction of five critical areas electrical fire and life safety mechanical
357. n display information bi directional communication ability compliance with interoperability schedule expansion capacity handling of alarms events scheduling and trend data and single device capability not depending on multiple devices for exchanging information from either side of the gateway Notebook Computer G Sensors and Input Hardware G Output Hardware G Surge and transient protection G Duct smoke detectors G Variable frequency motor drives G SD 05 Design Data Performance Verification Testing Plan G Pre Performance Verification Testing Checklist G SD 06 Test Reports Performance Verification Testing Report G SD 07 Certificates Contractor s Qualifications G SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Pre PVT Checklist G SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 12 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROJECT W O No 80511 T Comply with requirements for data packages in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA except as supplemented and modified in this specification BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems Data Package 4 G Controls System Operators Manuals Data Package 4 G VFD Service Manuals Data Package 4 G SD 11 Closeout Submittals DDC Software G Training documentation G Gl 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANC 1 6 1 Standard Products Provide
358. n provided on the Statement of Energy Performance is true and accurate B Data Checklist New Requirement Also during the site visit the PE must verify all information listed on the Data Checklist The Data Checklist is meant to summarize all building information for both the owner operator of the building and the Professional Engineer The document is especially meant to assist the Professional Engineer during the site visit of the label application process by providing all the information about the building in question including physical operational and energy information Read and understand the ENERGY STAR Identity Guidelines Mail the signed Letter of Agreement and signed and stamped Statement of Energy Performance SEP to EPA postmarked within 120 days of the Period Ending Date Please note an official Letter of Agreement will be provided for download in Portfolio Manager Do not mail to EPA a Letter of Agreement that displays a watermark that reads SAMPLE Please do not use company letterhead to print the Letter of Agreement NOTE The ENERGY STAR is awarded for a specific year A building that has earned the ENERGY STAR becomes eligible to reapply one year after the last energy data included in the SEP submitted as part of the previous year s application ENERGY STAR Label Application for Buildings should be mailed to ENERGY STAR Label for Buildings C o The Cadmus Group Inc 1600 Wilson Boulevard Suite 500 Arlington V
359. n the sequence of operations g Schedule Display and Modification Show the ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for the calendar year Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege h Archival Storage of Data Show that data archiving is handled by the operator workstation server and local trend archiving and display is n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 45 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T accomplished with BACnet Trend Log objects i Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters Show that an operator with sufficient privilege can change the logged data points sampling rate and trend duration j Device and Network Management Show the following capabilities 1 Display of Device Status Information 2 Display of BACnet Object Information 3 Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data 4 Time Synchronization 5 Remote Device Reinitialization 6 Backup and Restore Device Programming and Master Database s 7 Configuration Management of Half Routers Routers and BBMDs 8 Demonstrate load shed operations if commanded by the EMCS 255 Execution of Sequence of Operation Demonstrate that the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of op
360. n the analysis 1 Type and Use of Building 2 Size and Height of Building 3 Building Population 4 Exterior Traffic Considerations 5 Anticipated Traffic Flow 6 National Elevator Industry Inc Vertical Transportation Standards 7 LEED Certification Design Considerations 2 2 2 Passenger or Freight Classification The designer and client must decide whether a passenger elevator or freight elevator is most appropriate for each elevator in the facility This decision will be based on anticipated usage of each elevator If the elevator will be used for the movement of personnel it must be designed as a passenger elevator Any elevator that is a component of a handicapped accessibility route must be designed as a passenger elevator If the elevator will be used strictly for the movement of materials it may be classified and designed as a freight elevator 2 2 2 1 ASME A17 1 allows a freight elevator to have a greater platform area than a passenger elevator given the same load rating Because of this if an elevator is designed and installed as a freight elevator that decision cannot be reversed at a later date and the elevator may never be utilized for passenger use This classification severely limits the flexibility of use that is provided by the passenger elevator classification 2 2 3 Handicapped Accessibility All passenger elevators must be designed to accommodate handicapped accessibility 2 2 4 Emergency Medical Services Acce
361. n the event of compelling design conditions the use of a roped hydraulic elevator may be appropriate Approval for use of a roped hydraulic elevator design may be requested on an individual project by submission of a written Request for Approval to the NAVFAC VTE Program FEC Lead Certifying Official LCO The LCO is authorized to grant an exception to this restriction The roped design is similar to the standard hole less elevator design The difference is that a wire rope sheave is mounted to the top of the hydraulic plunger and steel hoist ropes are attached to the eylinder base run over the sheave and dovvn to the cab frame As the eylinder runs up the 1 2 roping moves the elevator cab tvvice the distance of the plunger travel Car speed is 150 feet per minute and maximum travel length is 48 feet 14630 mm The cost of acquisition maintenance and service for a roped hydraulic elevator is substantially greater than for the direct plunger types 2 5 2 Electric Traction Elevators Electric Traction Elevators may be used for all facilities There are tvvo types of electric traction hoist machines geared and gearless In addition there is a smaller more efficient gearless elevator machine design that is relatively new to the elevator industry The building height and travel of the elevator will determine the most effective application of each type 2 5 2 1 The basic design is similar for each of the types of elevator drive machines Steel hoi
362. n this Elevator Design Guide are applicable to both continental United States and overseas projects however the technical commercial reference standards ASME NEC ADAAG listed in this document will be different in Europe APPENDIX B NAVFAC VTE PROGRAM POC NAVFAC VTE Program Manager Kevin P Morse 757 322 4653 kevin p morse navy mil NAVFAC VTE Deputy Program Manager Dale Hughes 757 322 8216 dale hughes navy mil NAVFAC Facility Engineering Command FEC Lead Certifying Officials NAVFAC Washington NAVFAC Northwest NAVFAC Hawaii Michael Bruegging LCO Monte McPherson David Cole LCO 30 202 685 8412 NAVFAC Southeast Robert Gober LCO 904 542 4558 NAVFAC Midlant VVilliam Landon LCO 757 462 4750 NAVFAC Marianas Mauro Narvarte mauro narvarte fe navy mil 360 476 5097 NAVFAC Midwest Charlie Farmer 812 854 5386 NAVFAC Far East Hisao Igarashi DSN 243 7507 31 808 471 4742 NAVFAC Southwest Joseph Ortiz LCO 619 542 8568 NAVFAC Eur SWA Alessandro Comiti LCO alessandro comiti IT eu navy mil L OUTDOORS INDOORS CHEMICAL nc BYPASS FEEDER y h Wt STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATER NO lt CWS KEYED NOTES o INSTALL SOLAR COLLECTORS IN SERIES UP TO 6 UNITS THEN IN REVERSE FLOW PARALLEL MANIFOLD UP TO 24 UNITS Q SOLAR CONTROL AND PUMP STATION CONNECT TO ALL RTD S MIXING VALVE A ROUTE T amp P RELIEF VALVE
363. nal Building Code f or Seismic Hazard Exposure Group classifications 2 Includes boilers furnaces incinerators water heaters and other equipment utilizing combustible energy sources 3 The horizontal seismic factor percentage exceeds 50 SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition cannot be used Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Check the structural system to determine the type structure from which ducts and pipes are supported If SHL A has been specified determine the connection level e When working in SHL A one of two con nection levels to the supporting structure must be selected o Connection Level 2 is the most strict condition Must be used in the State of California within the jurisdiction of OSHPD California hospitals and the Office of the State Architect OSA California schools Conservatively use this connection level for any area of structural concrete O Use of Connection Level 1 may be used if it is substantiated May be used anywhere except when connecting into concrete within the jurisdiction of OSHOD California hospitals and the Office of the State Architect OSA California schools Find the detail in the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition Chapter 4 which corresponds to the type duct or pipe restraint required Notes in the detail will refer to the table where member sizes and connections can be found Determine which chapter of the
364. nate light reflection Please Note The Ceiling will need to be higher if ceiling mounts are used and may add another foot to the overall ceiling height If a ceiling mount for the projector is being used please ensure the mount hangs at the same level as the TOP of the screen and centered left to right 2 2 5 Door Requirements Training Room One rear entry door should be provided to provide for personnel access to the Training Room This door should be electric key unlock normally locked solid sound attenuating Door will lock only from outside This personnel access door should be an interior door to minimize potential exterior noise environmental conditions and debris All FATS equipment is designed to fit through standard door openings There should be no light passing through the door when closed i e no light transmission detected in darkened Training Room when viewing door using standard night vision device Ideally no light should reflect on the screen when any outside doors are opened Please check with local fire evacuation regulations 2 2 6 Wall Finish Requirements Training Room All walls in the Training Room should be painted with flat black paint to minimize light reflections that could interfere with the Virtual Trainer hit detect system Please Note Instead of using the supplied screen you can paint the wall the one behind the screen flat white and use it in place of the screen for system controlled we
365. nce Environmental and energy efficiency considerations Comiort suitability of the item Delivery terms Your administrative costs Training needed or provided Technical qualifications Compatibility with existing furniture Products Technology circle appropriate category 3 3 13 23 2311 4 0 000 Other specify 13 Best Value Determination A narrative justification for each box checked above for other than low price selection must be attached Describe the evaluation factor how the recommended best value contractor s offer met or exceeded the standard for each factor and why the offeror represents the best value to the Government compared to the other offerors SUBMITTING OFFICIAL PRIME CONTRACTOR S INTERIOR DESIGNER In accordance with FAR 8 404 b all agency specific regulations and statutes applicable to this purchase are attached I have reviewed the findings and documentation attached and have affirmatively determined them to be complete and accurate Name Title Date Telephone Email Signature Mar 09 FURNITURE PROCUREMENT DATA SHEET DIVISION NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND PROJECT LOCATION PROJECT TEM ITEM CODE FSC GRP GSA MARKET FED STOCK MANUFACTURER ORDERING ADDRESS SHIP TO ADDRESS if applicable PHONE NUMBER ANY VARIANCE OR MODIFICATION OF THIS SPECIFICATION WILL BE COORDINATED THROUGH DIVISION NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND
366. ncrete Poles ASTM E 2129 2005 Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment Of Building Products ASTM G 154 2006 Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION CEN CENELEC EN 60529 1991 Al 2000 Degrees of Protection Provided By Enclosures IP Code ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA IESNA IESNA HB 9 2000 Errata 2004 Errata 2005 Errata 2006 IES Lighting Handbook IESNA LM 79 2008 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid State Lighting Products IESNA LM 80 2008 Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources IESNA TM 15 2007 Addendum 2009 Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires IESNA RP 8 2000 Errata 2004 R 2005 Errata 2007 Roadway Lighting INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms IEEE C2 2007 Errata 06 1 TIA 07 1 TIA 07 2 TIA 07 3 Errata 07 2 TIA 08 4 TIA 08 5 TIA 08 6 TIA 08 7 TIA 08 8 TIA 08 9 TIA 08 10 TIA 08 11 TIA 09 12 TIA 09 13 TIA 09 14 Errata 09 3 TIA 09 15 TIA 09 16 TIA 10 17 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C62 41 2 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC Page 2 IEC 60068 2 14
367. nd will be filled in by base personnel on the job site The meter s nameplate shall include Meter ID number Rated voltage Current class Metering form Test amperes Frequency Catalog number Manufacturing date OO 1 OY UT IS Q N P On switchboard style installations provide switchboard case with disconnect means for meter removal incorporating short circuiting of current transformer circuits Meter covers shall be polycarbonate resins with an optical port and reset Backup battery shall be easily accessible for change out after removing the meter cover The normal billing data scroll shall be fully programmable Data scroll display shall include the folloving Page 9 Number of demand resets End of interval indication Maximum demand Nev maximum demand indication Cumulative or continuously cumulative Time remaining in interval Kilovatt hours 1 OY UT E Q N HM The register shall incorporate a built in test mode that allovs it to be tested without the loss of any data or parameters The following quantities shall be available for display in the test mode 1 Present interval s accumulating demand 2 Maximum demand 3 Number of impulses being received by the register Pulse module simple 1 0 board with programmable ratio selection Meters shall be programmed after installation via an optical port Optical display shall show TOU data peak kWh semi peak kWh
368. ndard 62 1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality Section 1 2 7 and 1 2 9 of ANSI ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 14 each subiect to their ovvn restrictions The first ventilation system design path is based on a Ventilation Rate Procedure This is a prescriptive procedure in vvhich outdoor air intake rates are determined based on space type application occupancy level and floor area Minimum ventilation rates for people related sources and area related sources are based on contaminant sources and source strengths that are typical for most space types as listed in Table 6 1 of ASHRAE Standard 62 1 Section 6 2 Table 6 1 is not shovvn here because the values in the table are not valid in isolation they must be used in coniunction vvith other applicable requirements of the standard The second type of design compliance is based on the Indoor Air Quality IAQ Procedure in which outdoor air intake rates and other system design parameters are based on an analysis of contaminant sources contaminant concentration targets and air quality acceptability targets In other words controls that remove contaminants e g air cleaning devices or controls that can reliably demonstrate the maintenance of acceptable indoor air quality resulting in indoor contaminant concentrations equal to or lower than those achieved using the Ventilation Rate Procedure are given credit For each contaminant of concern a target
369. ndicated otherwise provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate f Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves unless indicated otherwise 2 3 2 6 Valves for High Temperature Hot Water Service Valves for hot water service 250 Degrees F above a Valve bodies shall conform to ASME B16 34 Class 300 Valve and actuator combination shall be normally closed Bodies shall be carbon steel globe type with welded ends on valves 1 inch and larger Valves smaller than 1 inch shall have socket weld ends Packing shall be virgin polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE b Internal valve trim shall be Type 300 series stainless steel c Unless indicated otherwise provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design flow rate 2 3 3 Actuators Provide direct drive electric actuators for all control applications except vhere indicated othervise 250601 Electric Actuators Each actuator shall deliver the torque required for continuous uniform motion and shall have internal end svitches to limit the travel or be capable of vithstanding continuous stalling vithout damage Actuators shall function properly within 85 to 110 percent of rated line voltage Provide actuators with hardened steel running shafts and gears of steel or copper alloy Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torque
370. ndustry 8 1 1 1 2 The elevator hoist machine manufacturer must provide comprehensive factory training to include installation adjustment service and maintenance The training must be identified as available to any licensed elevator contractor The manufacturer must have an established and documented schedule with pricing for factory training classes that have been provided for a minimum period of one year prior to contract award date of the applicable project 8 1 1 1 3 The elevator hoist machine must be identified as available for purchase and installation by any licensed elevator contractor In addition all parts diagnostic tools and software must be available for purchase installation and use by any licensed elevator contractor exchange only provisions for the purchase of spare parts are not acceptable 8 1 1 2 The elevator hoist motor must be designed and installed so that motor amperage does not exceed nameplate motor amperage when the elevator is running in any direction or loading condition 8 1 2 Elevator Controller The elevator controller must be located in the elevator MR 20 8 1 2 1 Non Proprietary Controller The elevator controller must be a non proprietary microprocessor controller The controller equipment software and manufacturer must comply with the following paragraphs 8 1 2 1 1 The controller must be manufactured and sold by an elevator controller manufacturer that does not engage in installatio
371. ne room 3 3 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit Fall Protection For pit depths of 6 or greater a fall protection system must be designed and installed adjacent to the hoistway pit ladder for personnel access into the hoistway pit 10 CHAPTER 4 STRUCTURAL Structural design must be in accordance with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design must comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 4 1 Elevator Machine Room 4 1 1 Locate the elevator hoistway and elevator machine room on the same side of all building expansion joints 4 2 Elevator Hoistway 4 2 1 In all seismicity regions ensure adequate structural support for the attachment of the elements of the elevator support system as required by the elevator manufacturer s design applicable codes and UFC 3 310 04 4 2 2 Clay tile or brick shall not be used in the construction of hoistway walls Hollow block if used must be filled solid with concrete or motar 4 3 Elevator hoistway Pit 4 3 1 Hoistway drawings must indicate water stops in the walls and waterproofing for elevator pit floor and walls if these items are not shown on architectural drawings 4 3 2 Hoistway pit structure must be designed for all static and reaction loads that it will be subjected to by the elevator system Indicate details for sump pump pit and the impact of the s
372. nels Provide vritten copy of certification program and approval letter from roofing manufacturer SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Solar thermal collecting system SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Submit in accordance vith Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Section 01 78 24 05 20 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION Solar thermal collecting system Data Package Photovoltaic Pover System Include equipment data sheets and installation operation manuals for all major components SD 11 Closeout Submittals Posted operating instructions for solar energy system and Photovoltaic Pover System 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE For brazing and soldering procedure qualification conform to ASME B31 1 for preparation and procedures for joints conform to ASME B31 1 1 4 1 Photovoltaic Power System Manufacturer s Qualifications The manufacturer of the photovoltaic panels shall have a minimum of 10 years of successful experience continuously manufacturing solar electric panels of the type specified herein 1 4 2 Field Seam Metal Roof Panels Manufacturer s Qualifications The roofing manufacturer shall have been in SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 6 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 the business as a roofing manufacturer for at least 10 years Installer Qualifications Shall have been in the roofing installation business for a minimum of 5 years Contractor must also be certified and
373. nergy that is developed when the elevator is running in an overhauling load condition The drive converts the mechanical energy into electrical energy and feeds it back to the facility power grid This control system should be considered for all facilities with electric traction elevators 2 3 Building Supporting Systems There are multiple building systems that interface with the elevator design and control system The interface design is determined by the requirements of the International Building Code and numerous safety codes and standards 2 3 1 Building Fire Alarm Panel All elevators must be equipped with Firefighters Emergency Operation The system provides an automatic elevator operational response to fire detection devices in the elevator machine room MR elevator lobbies and sometimes in the elevator hoistway Design of the fire protection system is identified in the NAVFAC Fire Protection UFC 2 3 2 Emergency Power The Designer of Record must determine if the client requires elevator operation under emergency power The design of the elevator emergency power operation must address the following 1 How many and which elevators will run simultaneously 2 Location of elevator MRs and possible control wiring interconnections for sequential elevator operation 3 Design of the electrical control circuit from the Automatic Transfer Switch ATS to the elevator controller 4 Ensure all elevator mainline disconnects are fed from the e
374. ng and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc Atlanta Georgia www ashrae org ANSI ASHRAE Standard 62 1 2007 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc Atlanta Georgia www ashrae org Note Healthcare facilities may use either ASHRAE Standard 62 or AIA 2006 Guideline for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities 5 Lighting Handbook Reference amp Application 9th Edition Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IESNA 120 Wall Street 17th Floor New York NY 10005 Tel 212 248 5000 Web URL www iesna org E mail iesna iesna org 18 Appendix B Professional Engineer Qualifications To validate the Statement of Energy Performance a Professional Engineer PE must possess a current license and be in good standing The PE should also have A license in a discipline related to commercial building systems such as mechanical or electrical engineering and Working knowledge of building systems ASHRAE Standard 55 ASHRAE Standard 62 1 and the IESNA Lighting Handbook Territorial engineering licensure laws and regulations vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction Before offering or performing services it is recommended that PE s understand the engineering professional practice and ethics requirements contained in the state and territorial laws and regulations 19 OMB No 2060 0347 STATEMENT OF ENERGY PERF
375. ng the Design Heating Day outside air conditions At all other than design day occupied times maintain the space within the Winter conditions shown in ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals 2001 Chapter 8 Figure 5 but not more than 70 Fdb 21 1 Cdb Space thermostat typically set at 70 Fdb 2 Fdb dead band 21 1 Cdb 1 Cdb Admin spaces vvith Process heating Space Design conditions are to be determined by the requirements of the respective processes to be utilized vvithin Note Spaces requiring comfort heating shall be maintained at temperatures no higher than 70 Fdb 21 1 Cdb During unoccupied hours temperatures shall be set no higher than 55 Fdb 12 8 Cdb IAW OPNAVINST 4100 5D 6 1 4 1 3 Inside Design Conditions for Laboratories Shops Warehouses etc Space Design conditions during the Design Heating Day outside air conditions shall be 65 Fdb 18 3 Cdb for areas with moderate activity employment 60 Fdb 15 5 Cdb for areas with heavy activity employment and 50 Fdb 10 Cdb for storage areas Spaces with Process heating Space Design conditions are to be determined by the requirements of the respective processes utilized within Note Temperatures shall be maintained to minimize energy consumption with 55 Fdb 12 8 Cdb being the maximum for heating purposes in storage spaces AW OPNAVINST 4100 5D 6 1 4 2 System Design Provide HVAC systems to separately dehumidify and precondition ventilation air if the
376. nization responsible for testing products for compliance vith the BACnet standard operated under the direction of BACnet International n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 3 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 T 1 2 12 Bridge Network hardware that connects two or more network or BACnet internetvork segments at the physical and data link layers A bridge may also filter messages 1 213 Broadcast A message sent to all devices on a network segment 1 2 14 DADMS DON Applicaiton and Database Management System DADMS is a listing of digital applications approved for purchase and use 1 2 15 Device Any control system component usually a digital controller that contains a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices See also Digital Controller 1 2 16 Device Object Every BACnet device requires one Device Object whose properties represent the network visible properties of that device Every Device Object requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork This number is often referred to as the device instance 1 2 17 Device Profile A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex L Standard device profiles include BACnet Operator Workstations B OWS BACnet Buildin
377. nnections and interface with other products As Built Drawings Include solar thermal collector structural supports solar thermal collector control sequences and instrument mounting and interconnections SD 03 Product Data Piping Instrumentation Valves Piping specialties Pumps Solar hot water storage tanks Solar Thermal System Collectors Heat exchangers Solar boosted domestic water heaters Collector heat transfer fluid Field Seam Metal Roof Panels Manufacturer s catalog data detail sheets and specifications for each type of product provided Photovoltaic Power System Include electrical diagram and installation drawings of the complete photovoltaic components including photovoltaic modules inverter transformer fuses cables conductors connectors and all other related equipment Provide complete Photovoltaic material list as provided by photovoltaic manufacturer SD 04 Samples Roofing panel SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 5 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 Submit a 12 inch long by full vidth section of typical panel For color selection submit 2 by 4 inch metal samples in color finish and texture specified SD 06 Test Reports Inspection and Testing SD 07 Certificates Solar thermal collecting system installation Submit technical representative s certification that the solar energy system installation has been done as recommended by the manufacturer Field Seam Metal Roof Pa
378. not permitted 2 1 1 Supervisory Building Controller SBC Provide an SBC that communicates betveen the DDC system and the Camp Lejeune EMCS server Provide all necessary hardware drivers software material and equipment which shall allow communication and control between the SBC and the field DDC controllers using BACnet on the MS TP bus The SBC shall be capable of upload download to and from the EMCS server All SBC information shall transfer back to the EMCS system via the Ethernet TCP IP level 1 network All IP addresses and network drops shall be furnished by base telephone Supervisory Building Controllers SBC must be listed and approved on the Marine Corps DADMS and listed in the sites DITSCAP SSAA documents When the SBC is disconnected from the enterprise system for maintenance access to the SBC shall be via a laptop computer with Internet Explorer and not require any proprietary licensed software or license key 22 22 Direct Digital Controllers Direct digital controllers shall be UL 916 rated Deed Digi I O Point Limitation The total number of I O hardware points used by a single stand alone digital controller including I O expansion units shall not exceed 64 Place I O expansion units in the same cabinet as the digital controller 2 1 2 2 Environmental Limits Controllers shall be suitable for or placed in protective enclosures suitable for the environment temperature humidity
379. not limited to the following 1 Between the wall air barrier and the roof air barrier 2 Between the wall air barrier and the foundation or under slab air vapor barrier 3 Between the slab on grade under slab air vapor barrier and the foundation or wall air barrier 4 Between different substrate or exterior cladding materials systems 5 Between the various different air barrier products systems 6 At masonry control joints 7 At expansion joints including airtight connection to adjacent air barriers 8 Between the wall air barrier and window frames storefront frames wall louvers etc 9 Between the wall air barrier and door frames 10 Between the air barrier and any penetrations including penetrations by piping conduit duct structural members and similar 11 Masonry ties screws bolts and similar penetrations 12 All other air leakage pathways in the building air barrier envelope c Exterior wall systems behind metal panel 1 Temperature resistant Provide high temperature resistant materials and installation methods so assure barrier performance and life cycle requirements 2 UV Resistance Metal panel systems with open joints shall require the barrier membrane and bridging materials to provide permanent resistance to UV exposure 3 Life Safety Performance Verify if Surface Burning Characteristic Testing per ASTM E 84 is a code requirement and if so include all components of
380. ns manufacturer accreditation contractor accreditation installer training and accreditation documentation and reporting third party audits and database tracking b ABAA Accredited Contractors The Contractor shall have met the ABAA s mandatory quality assurance and training requirements and shall be accredited through the ABAA prior to installation of products that form part of the air barrier system Failure to meet this requirement shall be grounds for the Contracting Officer to stop the work c ABAA Certified Installers The Installer s shall have met the ABAA s mandatory quality assurance and training requirements and shall be accredited through the ABAA prior to installation of products that form part of the air barrier system b d On Site Quality Control The Installers are required to undertake quality control measures ona daily basis They shall have completed air barrier training and shall utilize equipment to inspect and test the quality of their vork to ensure the installation of products that form a part of the air barrier system conform to the standards outlined in the ABAA QAP 8 2 Documentation and Reporting Installers shall document th ntire installation process on daily job site reports These Test Reports include information on the Installer substrates substrate preparation products used ambient and substrate temperature the location of the air barrier installation the results of the quality
381. ns by structural members conduits electrical boxes pipes and ducts p Typical penetrations by masonry ties screws bolts and similar Any non conforming mock ups shall be corrected and become the standard of quality and construction for all subsequent similar conditions n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 7 1 43 Coordination vith Third Party Audit Agency The Contractor shall coordinate with the Third Party Audit Agency performing required inspections tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested The Contractor shall notify the Third Party Audit Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to the following a Provide access to the Work b Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests c Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the third party audit agency in taking samples d Deliver samples to testing laboratories e Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site s O THIRD PARTY AUDIT AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES The third party audit agency engaged to perform inspections sampling and testing of the air barrier system materials components and assemblies specified throughout the different specification sections shall coordinate vith
382. nt Bracing Appendix B 4 5 e Are overhead mounted features weighing 31 lbs or more located to minimize falling and injuring building occupants 20 26 Are these items mounted to resist forces of 0 5 times the component weight in any direction and 1 5 times the component weight in the downward direction Standard 21 Under Building Access Appendix B 4 6 Are accesses to crawl spaces utility tunnels and other means of under building access controlled Standard 22 Mass Notification Appendix B 4 7 amp UFC 4 021 01 Has amass notification system been provided in the new building If required the design must comply with Standard 22 The MNS must integrate with existing Base MNS Point of Contact Provost Marshal Office Physical Security Section Mr Zack parks at 910 451 5810 Has amass notification system been provided in existing primary gathering billeting and high occupancy family housing buildings If required the design must comply with Standard 22 The MNS must integrate with existing Base MNS Point of Contact Provost Marshal Office Physical Security Section Mr Zack parks at 910 451 5810 Certification of Force Protection Requirements Preparers of this document certify the accuracy and completeness of the Antiterrorism Force Protection features for this project in accordance with the attached completed form s This Review and Certification for DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings Ch
383. ntal Design Green Building Rating System for New Construction LEEDe NC Version 2 2 dated October 2005 d Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings Memorandum of Understanding MOU dated 24 January 2006 e Assistant Secretary of the Navy Installations and Environment Memorandum Energy and Utilities Development in MCON and Special Projects dated 4 August 2006 f American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers Inc ASHRAF and the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IESNA Standard 90 1 2004 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Attachments 1 Energy Policy Act of 2005 Design and Construction Requirements 2 MOU High Performance LEED Credits 3 Budget Cost for Energy Policy Act of 2005 and LEEDa Silver Compliance Cancelled Engineering amp Construction Bulletin ECB 2007 05 Energy Policy Act of 2005 Implementation dated 26 January 2007 1 Purpose Provide guidance for complying with the design and construction requirements of the Energy Policy Act EPAct of 2005 reference a and the Executive Order 13423 reference b Additionally provide guidance on achieving LEEDa Silver level performance and USGBC certification described in reference c 2 Background The EPAct of 2005 reference a includes design and construction requirements and energy performance standards for new Federal buildings The provisions of the Act that affect de
384. ntegrated with the planning and design requirements of UFC 3 210 10 Low Impact Development When Marine Corps installations are located in arid and high wind environments all structural operation and maintenance requirements shall be considered Extensive vegetative roofs are recommended since they are more cost effective less complex and require less maintenance compared to intensive vegetative roofs Vegetation will be selected based on sustainability and compatibility with the site s natural environment F Other Sustainable Technologies Use other sustainable technologies and Energy Star products as appropriate and life cycle cost effective ex recycled materials and insulation components G Life Cycle Cost Analysis Use of above listed solar technologies is directed as required scope and not discretionary based on life cycle cost effectiveness Life cycle cost analysis can be used to optimize the mix of solar thermal and photovoltaic systems Links to some cost effectiveness tools can be found at https portal navfac navy mil portal page portal che che_communities che_communities_me chanical cime_project_team_tab H MILCON e Provide line item cost estimate for solar thermal and or photovoltaic system in DD1391 Block 9 Use local cost data where available note average costs for FY 10 projects were approximately 32 00 square feet e Ensure total project square footage includes additional building components and spaces
385. nth period preceding the test Test shall be witnessed by Contracting Officer No loss of pressure shall be allowed Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested Caulking of joints shall not be permitted 3 5 4 3 System Flushing For the final inspection the system shall be thoroughly flushed in no case for less than 2 hours of all foreign matter until a vhite linen bag installed in a strainer basket shovs no evidence of contamination The vhite linen bag shall be in the strainer basket during the entire flushing operation prior to its being presented to the Contracting Officer for approval The Contracting Officer vill inspect the linen bag prior to completion of flushing and approve the flushing operation System shall be drained prior to final filling 3 5 4 4 System Filling System shall be filled through indicated connections with propylene glycol SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 21 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 solution Solution shall be mixed externally to the solar system and consist of 50 percent propylene glycol and 50 percent distilled vater by volume Air shall be vented from the system after filling System pressure at the high point on the roof shall be as indicated by solar energy collecting system manufacturer 3 5 4 5 Operational Test Operational test shall occur over a period of 48 consecutive hours vith sufficient solar isolation to ca
386. ntion s the use of other standards or guidelines acceptable in evaluating outside air ventilation requirements All building types are subject to ASHRAE Standard 62 1 with one exception Healthcare facilities may use either ASHRAE Standard 62 1 OR AIA 2006 Guideline for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities 16 US EPA ENERGY STAR Professional Engineer s Guide 2009 17 Appendix A Contact nformation Mailing Address ENERGY STAR Label for Buildings U S Environmental Protection Agency 6202J 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue NW Washington DC 20460 Contact information for questions E mail energystarbuildings epa gov Web site www energystar gov Go to Buildings and Plants More on Portfolio Manager http www energystar gov benchmark Applying for the ENERGY STAR Label http Avww energystar gov eslabel Technology Standards Referenced in The Guide American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc ASHRAE Publication Sales Department 1791 Tullie Circle NE Atlanta GA 30329 Tel 404 636 8400 Web URL www ashrae org ASHRAE standards are updated on a continual basis EPA recommends that a Professional Engineer use the latest version of these standards when undergoing the review process for an ENERGY STAR label application ANSI ASHRAE Standard 55 2004 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy American Society of Heating Refrigerati
387. num surfaces need not be painted Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces Clean the surfaces to remove dust dirt rust oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal Where more than one coat of paint is specified apply the second coat after SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 24 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 3 the preceding coat is thoroughly dry Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray a Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F Immediately after cleaning the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0 3 mil one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat b Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils c Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat resisting paint applied t
388. o a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils 9 TESTS FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION 9 1 Rainvater Harvesting System The folloving tests shall be performed on the rainvater harvesting system in accordance with ICC IPC and North Carolina Building Codes a Rainwater Harvesting system Test b Water Supply Systems Tests 9 Test of Backflov Prevention Assemblies Backflov prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies Gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the University of Southern California s Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection Manual M 14 Report form for each assembly shall include as a minimum the following Data on Device Data on Testing Firm Type of Assembly Name Manufacturer Address Model Number Certified Tester Serial Number Certified Tester No Size Date of Test Location Test Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges If the unit fails to meet specified requirements the unit shall be repaired and retested 3 9 2 Defective Work If inspection or test shows defects such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 25 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 repeated Repairs to piping
389. o the 750K congressional approval threshold Energy Star reflective roof products shall be used in combination with roof top solar thermal and photovoltaic systems unless determined by the installation to be exorbitantly cost prohibitive or not technically feasible White roofs shall be used on flat or low slope portions of the roof and considered on sloped portions of the roof where aesthetics is not a concern and will not impact heat load in adjacent buildings e Vegetative roofing systems shall be considered on a case by case basis e Ground mounted photovoltaic systems shall be considered where available roof area is less than 15 000 square feet and or improperly oriented for maximum solar use DD Form 1391 instruction design criteria and best management practices are provided in attachment 1 5 Waivers There are two waiver paths to these requirements 1 technical waivers and 2 mission operational waivers 1 Technical waivers and exceptions related to the design construction and modification will be submitted to NAVFAC Headquarters Office of the Chief Engineer CHE via the NAVFAC component chain of command 2 The Installation Commanding Officer can grant mission and operations waivers related but not limited to inadequate building orientation extreme climate conditions historic preservation requirements and extraordinary costs to install the solar feature 6 Points of Contact For Marine Corps Energy Policy
390. o the DDC system in the field and at other site locations as necessary Upon completion of the Phase II Training each trainee should fully understand the project s DDC system operation The training session shall include the following a A walk through tour of the mechanical system and the installed DDC components controllers valves dampers surge protection switches thermostats sensors etc b Adding and removing network devices End of Section n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 48 ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING 02 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE TEBE C2 2007 TIA 2007 1 TIA 2007 2 TIA 2007 3 TIA 2007 4 TIA 2007 5 Errata 2006 1 Errata 2007 2 Errata 2009 3 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C37 90 1 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2004 Standard for Surge Withstand Capability SWC Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus IEEE CB7 13 2008 Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers IEEE Stds Dictionary 2009 IEEE Standards Dictionary Glossary of Terms amp Definitions INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA
391. object types within the device Minimum BACnet Object Requirements Use of Standard BACnet Objects in accordance with existing Camp Lejeune standards For the following points and parameters use standard BACnet objects where all relevant object properties can be read using BACnet s Read Property Service and all relevant object properties can be modified using BACnet s Write Property Servic all device physical inputs and outputs all set points all PID tuning parameters all calculated pressures flow rates and consumption values all alarms all trends all schedules and all equipment and lighting circuit operating status BACnet Object Description Property The Object Description property shall support 32 minimum printable characters For each object complete the description property field using a brief narrative plain English description specific to the object and project application For example HW Pump 1 Proof Document compliance length restrictions and whether the description is writeable in the device PICS Analog Input Output and Value Objects Support and provide Description and or Device Type text strings matching signal type and engineering units shown on the points list Binary Input Output and Value Objects Support and provide Inactive Text and Active Text property descriptions matching conditions shown on the points list Calendar Object For devices wit
392. ocuring Contract Office for new procurement replacement or overhaul of the following WHE 1 Any capacity portal crane hammerhead crane derrick floating crane tower crane mobile boat hoist or rubber tired gantry crane 2 Overhead traveling cranes gantry cranes wall cranes jib cranes davits pillar cranes pillar jib cranes monorails and hoists with rated capacities of 20 000 pounds or greater 3 Any capacity WHE including portable powered hoists used in the following applications a Ordnance handling b Molten metals c Special Purpose Service SPS as defined in NAVSEA Publication 0989 030 7000 d Hazardous Area Applications as defined in the National Electrical Code e Precision handling operations requiring complex or synchronized lifting capacity 4 Any capacity WHE requested by foreign countries under the Military Assistance Program when specifically authorized by the cognizant DoD Agency Overhaul for purpose of determining the required Procuring Contract Office is defined as renovation or modernization of cranes that directly affect multiple major components or systems and involve more than one engineering discipline b NAVCRANECEN performs the following services on a NAVCRANECEN WHE procurement NAVCRANECEN INSTRUCTION 11450 1A 1 Confirm WHE scope of work budget and schedule An initial site visit is usually required For WHE being installed in new facilities NAVCRANECEN
393. of lock shield and loose key pattern stops for supplies with threaded sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting Exposed supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall unless otherwise specified under the item Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown 3 3 1 Backflow Prevention Devices Plumbing fixtures equipment and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC and the North Carolina Building Codes at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water syst
394. ol and longevity of chillers Chiller manufacturers recommend 2 to 7 minute water loop return times use a minimum of 5 minutes to size inertia tanks and or increase pipe sizing length Provide primary secondary pumping systems on multiple building chiller systems and on systems larger 150 tons Keep flow thru the chiller constant Do not use variable primary flow 2 22 10 Ensure primary loop has sufficient thermal inertia Be aware that the secondary loop has little influence on staging cycling during low load conditions 6 20 8 HVAC equipment should not be installed in attics or above suspended ceilings unless absolutely necessary When placement in an attic is dictated by necessity provide stairs to access the attic and maintenance access to and space around equipment ships ladders are undesirable Provide drain pan float switch to shut down condensing unit or close chilled water valve to the coil 6 26 9 Air handling unit filter access doors should be specified as hinged with non tool captive latching devices ie captive thumb screws quarter turn latches etc Do not specify or approve access panels that are unhinged and or retained by sheet metal screws Require contractors to provide a listing of the HVAC filters for each piece of equipment along with their dimensions width height and thickness and types permanent washable throwaway etc Do not use plastic preinsulated pipe for buried dual temperature water distribution u
395. ol measures been provided on access roads required for the operation of the building Standard 5 Parking Beneath Buildings or on Rooftops Appendix B 1 5 amp UFC 4 023 03 s parking beneath the building or on roof top required o If yes has access control Measures been provided o Are floors beneath or roofs above inhabited areas designed to prevent progressive collapse Appendix C Recommended Additional Measures Appendix C 1 1 thru C 1 10 e Has recommendations 1 thru 10 been considered o 1 Vehicle Access Points 2 High speed Vehicle Approaches o 3 Vantage Points 4 Drive up Drop Off o 5 Building Location o 6 Railroad Location 7 Access Control for Family Housing 8 Standoff for Family Housing 9 Minimize Secondary Debris o 10 Building Separation Structural 7 Standard 6 Progressive Collapse Avoidance Appendix B 2 1 amp UFC 4 023 03 15 building 3 or more stories NOTE Basements are considered a story if one or more walls are exposed f yes are walls columns and floors in accordance with UFC 4 023 03 Design of Buildings to Resist Progressive Collapse 8 Standard 7 Structural Isolation Appendix B 2 2 s new building addition structural system independent from the adjacent adjacent existing building s inhabited portion of new building structurally independent from the uninhabited portion o
396. on can be separated out Is the PE expected to count each required input such as occupants PCs or rooms to verify the quantity in a given space No The PE may verify this information by asking credible parties who have a detailed knowledge of the building or cross checking information within a Portfolio Manager account However it is good practice to verify in person any questionable information Additionally all physical and operating characteristics of the building must be verified in some form To aid this process please see the checklist provided at the end of the document 2 6 Checklist Verification of Operating Characteristics of a Building NEW REQUIREMENT For more on the verification process of the Data Checklist new PE requirement for purposes of applying for the ENERGY STAR label effective October 25th 2008 please refer to Section 1 7 Module 3 Energy Consumption 3 1 Obiective All recorded energy consumption for each type of fuel used within a building must be verified on a Statement of Energy Performance for a building applying for the ENERGY STAR label 3 2 Background and Expectations of PE To assess the performance of a building all sources of energy within the building must be entered and verified through Portfolio Manager Currently acceptable fuel sources include the following electricity natural gas fuel oil diesel fuel district steam or hot water district chilled water propane coal coke kero
397. onnected notebook computers 2 1 4 12 Device Diagnostics Each controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power communication and device fault condition The DDC system shall recognize and report a non responsive controller Z2 1 4213 Pover Loss Upon restoration of pover the DDC system shall perform an orderly restart and restoration of control 1 4 14 Access Control Provide at least five levels of passvord protection for operator interfaces The lowest level only allowing viewing of graphics The second level allows viewing graphics and changing space temperatur setpoints The third level allows the previous level s capability plus changing operating schedules The fourth level allows access to all functions except passwords The highest level provides all administrator rights and allows full access to all programming including setting new passwords and access levels Provide the BAS Owner with the highest level password access Provide automatic log out if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected after a user defined time delay Ze As 15 Configuration Tool Provide the software with the manufacturer s installation CDs and licenses Licenses shall allow unrestricted use and reproduction for use at the Camp Lejeune Complex Software shall not require the use of software keys or dongles Configure the software according to the DDC SECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 20 T
398. onnection including polarity d Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight e Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact 2 Electrical Tests Verify proper operation by reviewing the meter configuration report Potential Transformers 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Verify potential transformers are rigidly mounted b Verify potential transformers are the correct voltage Page 14 2 2 c Verify that adequate clearances exist between the primary and secondary circuit 2 Electrical Tests a Verify by the meter configuration report that the polarity and phasing are correct System Functional Verification Verify that the installed meters are working correctly in accordance with the meter configuration report a b The correct meter form is installed All voltage phases are present Phase rotation is correct Phase angles are correct The new meter accurately measures power magnitude and direction and can communicate as required by paragraph entitled Communications Interfaces End of Section Page 15 CI MECHANICAL TDC 04 Nov 2009 Ver 4 Naval Facilities Engineering Command NAVFAC MID ATLANTIC Design Strategies for Energy Use Reduction to Consider During DD Form 1391 And Development of Construction Solicitation Documents Criteria 1 ASHRAE IESNA Standard 90 1 2007 Energy Standard for Buildings E
399. onstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control drawings Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller s location using the BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic and floor plans Nameplates and Tags Show the nameplates and tags are accurate and n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 44 2D COMBAT ENGIN T ERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC W O No 80511 3s permanently attached to control panel doors devices sensors and actuators EMCS Server Operation a Show points lists agree with naming conventions b Show that graphics are complete Show the UPS operates as specified 5 8 BACnet Communications and Interoperability at the EMCS Server Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing alarm and event management trending scheduling and device and network management If available or required in this specification use a BACnet protocol analyzer to assist with identifying devices viewing network traffic and verifying interoperability These requirements must be met even if there is only one manufacturer of equipment installed Testing includes the following a Data Presentation On each BACnet Operator Workstation demonstrate graphic display capabilities b Reading of Any Property Demonstrate the ability to read and display any used readable object pro
400. or area should include all supporting functions such as stairways connecting corridors between buildings medical offices exam rooms laboratories lobbies atria cafeterias storage areas elevator shafts and any space affiliated with emergency medical care or diagnostic care Facilities that use 51 or more of the gross floor area for 24 long term care skilled nursing and or ambulatory surgical centers are not eligible for a rating at this time but can benchmark vvithin Portfolio Manager using the Other space type category No unique space uses should be entered other than parking computer data centers or svvimming pools All of the other facility and or campus characteristics should be aggregated under the Hospital Acute care Children s space use classification within Portfolio Manager Additional guidance Healthcare Classification Document E AA6KB Hotel Hotel applies to buildings that rent overnight accommodations on a room suite basis with a bath shower and other facilities in most guest rooms The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as food preparation and restaurant space laundry facilities conference and banquet space health club spas lobbies atria elevator shafts stairways storage areas etc K 12 School K 12 School applies to facility space used as a school building for Kindergarten through 12th grade students This does not include college or university classroo
401. or machine room These items must be located outside of and adjacent to the machine room Actuation of the flow switch shall remove power to the elevator by shunt trip breaker operation Shunt trip actuation shall be instantaneous the flow switch must not have time delay capability 7 2 2 Top of Elevator Hoistway Sprinkler protection with a dedicated sprinkler line must be provided at the top of the hoistway only for the following a for hydraulic elevators with cylinder or supply piping extending above the second finished floor elevation b for all elevators that are not designed with a 2 hour fire rated hoistway 7 2 2 1 A supervised shut off valve check valve flow switch and test valve must be provided in the sprinkler line feeding the top of the hoistway These items must be located outside of and adjacent to the top of hoistway Actuation of the flow switch shall remove power to the elevator by shunt trip breaker operation The flow switch must not have time delay capability 7 2 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit Provide a sprinkler in the pit only for hydraulic elevators that do not have a sprinkler at the top of the hoistway Locate the sprinkler head no more than 2 0 609 mm above the pit floor Provide a dedicated sprinkler line for the hoistway pit only 7 2 3 1 A supervised shut off valve shall be provided in the sprinkler line feeding the pit Locate the valve outside of and adjacent to the pit Actuation of the pit sprinkler shall n
402. oration or other damage to the finish furnishings or parts of the building due to the Contractor s failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor Automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer s instructions Comply with ASHRAE 90 1 IP for minimum efficiency requirements Unless more stringent local requirements exist lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 50 12 Part 141 80 c 1 The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building 3 9 4 Operational Test Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures the Contractor shall subject the rainwater harvesting system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation connections adjustments and functional and operational efficiency Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system a Time date and duration of test b Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures c Operation of each fixture and fixture trim d Operation of each valve hydrant and faucet e Pump suction and discharge pressures SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 26 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENAN
403. ors names contract numbers and business size reviewed Identify the contractor recommended as the best value When you sought additional price reductions were they received YES Ino E Identify price with discounts for the recommended best value contractor Is installation site preparation design or ancillary services included in this project YES Jno If yes be sure that the installation site preparation design or ancillary services are included as separate line items in each quote Mar 09 10 Are you selecting the lovvest priced item YES Elxo O If no indicate in addition to price those factors listed below considered in your decision Price Special features required in effective program performance Trade in considerations Probable life of the itern selected as compared with that of a comparable item Warranty considerations Maintenance availability Past performance Environmental and energy efficiency considerations Comfort suitability of the item Delivery terms Your administrative costs Training needed or provided Technical qualifications OOOOOOOODOOOUOOO Compatibility with existing furniture Products Technology circle appropriate category D Other specify 11 Best Value Determination A narrative justification for each box checked above for other than low price selection must be attached Describe the evaluation factor how the recommended best value contractor
404. ors pressure test assembly and other related accessories Check and balance flow rates as needed Verify that the manifold is mounted properly located in an easily accessible location and fasteners are tight SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 13 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 2 FIELD SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS Supply all material labor and equipment to complete a Installation of standing seam metal roofing Pans Support Structure b Preparation of Standing Seam Metal Roofing Pans for application of Photovoltaic peal and apply Laminates as described in paragraph PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER SYSTEM c Application of Standing Seam Metal Roofing Pans and special roofing trim as needed to Support Structure and over the Building Integrated Solar Thermal System as described in paragraph SOLAR THERMAL COLLECTING SYSTEM 2 2 1 Structural Roofing Panel System a Mechanically Seamed Panels 1 Profile 2 inch standing seam heavy duty interlock clips a Width 16 inches b Double lock 180 degree seam c Wind Uplift Resistance UL 580 Class 90 d Hydrostatic Head Resistance No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2140 e Air leakage Passed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 Water Penetration None when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646 g Flame Spread Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 h Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 1592 De
405. ors in accessible locations with appropriate space for periodic service Shop air compressors are serviced by the building occupants and 6 26 09 should not be installed within mechanical rooms since occupant access is prohibited by base maintenance Shop air compressors should be provided with sufficient cooling ventilation Install air compressors associated with building HVAC controls within mechanical rooms Air compressor receivers over 5 cubic feet 37 4 gal are unfired pressure vessels that must under go hydrostatic and operational tests witnessed by the base boiler inspector 5 19 8 Air Compressors should be mounted on vibration pads mounts Specify show flexible connectors on the piping 10 22 08 Where practical provide hose bibs near all HVAC coils for wash down cleaning purposes Provide floor drains in all mechanical rooms Provide trap primers on all floor drains except locations that are expected to get regular use thru out the year Trap primer shall be pressure type installed on a cold water line and shall not be installed on a flush valve 2 27 9 Provide sectional shut off valves for domestic hot amp cold water for each bathroom group Do not permit lever type control handles on pressure balance shower valves in BEQ s This type of handle invites the user to pull for volume control thereby breaking the handle Avoid frost proof hose bibs Provide strainers on RPZ back flow preventers Double Check and RPZ
406. ot remove power to the elevator by shunt trip breaker operation 7 2 4 Flow Switch Test Valve and Piping For each inspector s test valve discharge piping must be provided and shall discharge to a drain location that can accept full flow Discharge to janitor sinks or similar plumbing fixtures is not permitted 7 2 5 Fire Extinguisher A fire extinguisher must be provided and installed on the wall inside the elevator machine room on the strike side of the machine room door Indicate location on MR drawings 19 CHAPTER 8 ELEVATOR SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS Design and installation of all elevator systems and components must be in accordance vvith this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design shall comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 8 1 Elevator Machine Room 8 1 1 Elevator Hoist Machine The elevator hoist machine including hoist motor and assembly must be located within the elevator machine room MR 8 1 1 1 Non Proprietary Elevator Hoist Machine The elevator hoist machine must be a non proprietary product and must comply with the following paragraphs 8 1 1 1 1 The elevator hoist machine configuration and installation design must be mechanically and electrically interchangeable with a minimum of 3 other elevator manufacturer s hoist machines that are readily available in the elevator i
407. otection panel 6 1 3 MR 120 VAC Lighting and Receptacle Circuit A separate 120 VAC branch circuit must be provided for the elevator MR lighting and receptacles The MR lighting shall not be equipped with automatic controls or be fed from the load side of a GFCI circuit 6 1 3 1 A minimum of two 2 light 1 2 m 4 ft long fluorescent lighting fixtures must be provided for lighting of the elevator MR The fixture must have a one piece molded high impact clear acrylic diffuser with a secure seal against dust and moisture MR lighting must provide a minimum of 19 fc at floor level in all areas of the MR 6 1 4 Separate branch Circuits For each of the following circuits provide a separate dedicated branch circuit with a fused disconnect or breaker in the elevator MR Individual disconnects and breakers must be designed to be lockable in the open position only a Elevator 120 VAC circuit for elevator cab lighting and receptacles b Elevator cab HVAC equipment circuit if provided c Elevator hoistway pit sump pump power and control system 6 1 4 1 For all MR disconnects provide a permanent sign on each disconnect to identify the location of the supply side overcurrent protective device 6 1 5 Emergency Power If emergency power is provided comply with the requirements of Section 6 1 and the following a b The MR disconnecting means must disconnect both normal and emergency power Emergency power system must be design
408. over several hours and controlling the VAS cooling coil control valve to open upon a rise in EA dew point and to close upon a fall in EA dew point By averaging over a long period of time the influence of showers and clothes washing are damped out and the system responds to the long term building occupancy driven latent load This will Page 12 of 14 Enclosure 2 maintain the VAS cooling coil leaving devv point at the desired value to maintain the space conditions Consider a Thermostat sensing the building total bathroom EA temperature and averaging it over several hours and controlling the reheat coil control valve to close upon a rise in EA temperature and to open upon a fall in EA temperature By averaging over a long period of time the influence of shovvers and clothes vvashing are damped out and the system responds to the long term building occupancy driven sensible load This will maintain the VAS reheat coil leaving temperature at the desired value to avoid overcooling the spaces under low load conditions This control scheme attempts to minimize the VAS cooling use of new energy while protecting the building and contents from mold It also attempts to use the reheat to minimize new energy use in the space cooling equipment while not over cooling the spaces under low load Both the VAS and EA Systems must run continuously in order to protect the building from mold and mildew growth Even if the building is to be vacated these s
409. ovided every 3 m 10 ft vertically up the hoistway The fixture at the top of the hoistway must be mounted on the ceiling 16 6 2 1 1 For control of the hoistway lighting circuit provide two 3 vvay switches inside the elevator hoistway at a height of 48 above the top and bottom elevator landings Mount the switches on the hoistway wall adjacent to the hoistway entrance strike jamb The lower level lighting switch must be located adjacent to the hoistway pit access ladder 6 2 1 2 Pit lighting must provide a minimum of 10 fc at the pit floor in all areas of the pit 6 2 2 General Wiring Requirements 6 2 2 1 Only electric wiring raceways and cables used directly in connection with the elevator are permitted inside the hoistway Allowable wiring includes wiring for signals lighting heating air conditioning and venting of the elevator cab also for fire protection for pit sump pump and for heating lighting and venting of the hoistway 6 2 2 2 All conductors and optical fibers in the hoistway except traveling cable must be in conduit 6 2 2 3 Traveling cables must be suspended by a self tightening webbed hanger or internal suspension member 6 3 Elevator Hoistway Pit 6 3 1 Sump pump Receptacle Provide a dedicated simplex receptacle without GFI protection to supply the permanently installed sump pump Mount sump pump receptacle 5 0 1524 mm above elevator pit floor Provide LED light to verify circuit is energized 6
410. p L Facilities Memorandum Roofing System Design and Construction for MILCON Building Projects and Major FSRM Roof Replacements 16 OCT 2009 b Assistant Deputy Commandant I amp L Facilities Memorandum Roof Design for New Construction and Major Renovations Change 1 3 MAR 2010 c Public Law 110 112 Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 19 December 2007 Attachment 1 Design Guidance Instructions for filling out DD1391 Criteria and Best Management Practices for Roof Top Solar Thermal Photovoltaic and other Energy Saving Features Purpose Provide the NAVFAC planning and design community vvith guidance for implementing Marine Corps policy established in references a and b requiring solar technologies be incorporated in 1 new building construction and 2 major building renovations involving complete roof replacements The Marine Corps is relying on NAVFAC as its principal design and construction agent to identify and implement measures to maximize the use of solar energy generation and technology within their facilities Background The best time to install a solar thermal and or photovoltaic system is during nevv construction or complete roof replacement Incorporating solar technologies into the design and construction of buildings on Marine Corps installations reduces the carbon footprint provides a hedge against volatile energy costs and makes a visible environmental statement Applicabilit
411. papuswwosey 5 Z UE OL 10 8 Training Facility Design Document Armory for Storage of Simulated Weapons Hole in raised deck for electrical air umbilical Projectors under raised deck s o 5 wo LL 2250 Sh gt G Xo o 5 u s 8 N D 4
412. per foot Determine the site and economic feasibility of using ground mounted photovoltaic systems in combination with or as an alternative to roof mounted systems during project planning and design C Reflective Coatings Use energy saving reflective or Energy Star roof coatings unless determined to be exorbitantly cost prohibitive or not technically feasible in combination with roof top solar thermal and or photovoltaic technologies Consider energy saving reflective or Energy Star coated modified bitumen roof coating where roof insulation does not meet R 20 minimum per ASHRAE 90 1 2007 and where roof traffic is minimal and not shaded Attachment 1 Issue No 2010 05 8 July 2010 Type Policy e sim o a sm s a e Use white roofs on flat or low slope roofs e Raised or highly visible white roofs will over time show dirt which impacts building aesthetics The use of reflective coatings on raised roofs shall be considered for standing seam metal roofs and coordinated with the USMC installation to ensure all architectural energy and maintenance issues are documented and addressed D Day Lighting Use day lighting techniques when technically feasible and cost effective for energy conservation E Vegetative Roofing Consider vegetative roofing systems for storm water mitigation energy conservation and acoustical benefits Vegetative roofing systems shall be i
413. perty of any device on the network c Setpoint and Parameter Modifications Show the ability to modify all setpoints and tuning parameters in the sequence of control or listed on project schedules Modifications are made with BACnet messages and write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics or by completing a field in a menu with instructional text d Peer to Peer Data Exchange Show all BACnet devices are installed and configured to perform BACnet read write services directly without the need for operator or workstation intervention to implement the project sequence of operation and to share global data e Alarm and Event Management Show that alarms events are installed and prioritized according to the BAS Owner Demonstrate time delays and other logic is set up to avoid nuisance tripping e g no status alarms during unoccupied times or high supply air during cold morning start up Show that operators with sufficient privilege can read and write alarm event parameters for all standard BACnet event types Show that operators with sufficient privilege can change routing BACnet notification classes for each alarm event including the destination priority day of week time of day and the type of transition involved TO OFF NORMAL TO NORMAL etc f Schedule Lists Show that schedules are configured for start stop mode change occupant overrides and night setback as defined i
414. pment i e clothes dryers must be vented to the exterior Take advantage of the ASHRAE allowed reduced bathroom toilet ventilation requirements due to provision of continuous operation see 2001 ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals Chapter 26 Table 3 Note Vent less Clothes Dryers are not acceptable in Humid Area locations 6 1 4 8 1 4 Air Balance for Bachelor Housing Continuous VAS of 15 cfm 0 007 cms per person for 4 persons maximum wartime loading will be 60 cfm 0 0028 cms Continuous bathroom exhaust of 20 cfm 0 009 cms ASHRAE recommendation will allow the remaining 40 cfm 0 019 cms to pressurize the spaces to reduce infiltration The bathroom will dry a little more slowly with the continuous exhaust airflow but the VAS at 55Fdpt 12 8 Cdpt will ensure that it dries satisfactorily Bedrooms and kitchen spaces will remain dry due to pressurization reducing infiltration loads from humid outside air during door openings Clothes dryer operation if provided will temporarily create an additional 150 cfm 0 071 cms exhaust flow which will be satisfied by the 40 cfm 0 019 cms VAS pressurization air flow plus 110 cfm 0 052 cms of infiltration during the approximately one hour drying cycle The other 23 hours of 40 cfm 0 019 cfm exfiltration of VAS will transport the infiltrated moisture back outside the space thereby protecting these spaces from moisture accumulation and resultant mold growth 6 1 4 8 1 5 Heat Recovery Use heat r
415. port a Warranty Provide the VFDs with a minimum 24 month full parts and labor warranty The warranty shall start when the contract s HVAC system is accepted by the Government Include warranty documentation dates and contact information with the VFD on site service manuals b VED Service Manuals Provide the VFDs with all necessary installation operation maintenance troubleshooting service and repair manuals in English including related factory technical bulletins Provide the documents factory bound in sturdy 3 ring binders or hard bound covers Provide a title sheet on the outside of each binder indicating n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 30 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 the project title project location installing contractor contract number and the VFD manufacturer address and telephone number Each 2 binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed dividers with all material neatly organized The documentation provided shall be specifically applicable to this project shall be annotated to reflect the actual project conditions and shall provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed work Provide a storage cabinet on or near the VFD large enough to hold all of the documentation Have the cabinet s proposed installation site approved in advance by the Contracting
416. products to total dollar value of products included in project Fixtures LEED List of installed fixtures with manufacturer model and flow rate Rainwater Control System G Modular Storage Tank G Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank G Submersible Feed Pumpl G Debris Filterl G Initial Runoff Filterl G Rainwater Sediment Filters G Rainwater Ultraviolet Purification System G Dye Injection System G Chlorine Injection System G Unpressurized Holding Tank G Booster Pump 11 Packaged Pump Systeml G Hydropneumatic Tankl G Backflow Preventers G Domestic Water Service Meters G Vibration Absorbing Features G Details of vibration absorbing features including arrangement foundation plan dimensions and specifications Rainwater Harvesting System G SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 5 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 A Diagrams wiring diagrams for power signal and control wiring dimensioned outline drawings of equipment and system instructions and other sheets proposed for posting Manufacturer s recommendations for the installation of the rainwater harvesting system including piping tanks pumps and controls SD 06 Test Reports Tests Flushing and Disinfection Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance c
417. quipment is properly installed connected and adjusted Conduct an operating test to show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section Page 24 End of Section Page 25 fals VIRTUAL TRAINING SOLUTIONS COMPANY RECOMMENDED TRAINING FACILITY DESIGN DOCUMENT For the FATS Virtual Trainer Version 1 2 11 August 2011 PREPARED BY FATS Inc 7340 McGinnis Ferry Road Suwanee Georgia 30024 U S A Tel 770 813 0180 Fax 770 813 0741 Training Facility Design Document TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTIONS aua ak l ay l s k 1 2 PREPARING THE TRAINING FACILITY L 1 2 1 GENERAL FACIEITY LAY OUT oi 1 22 TRAINING ROOM 1 2 2 1 Overview Training Room a a 1 2 2 2 Size Requirements Training Room a ua tirna NNNNA SKANNA EnA 1 2 2 3 Flooring Requirements Training Room 5 2 2 2 4 Ceiling Requirements Training Room U u 2 2 2 5 Door Requirements Training Room n n ai amaya 2 2 2 6 Wall Finish Requirements Training Room
418. quirements Training Room The simulated firing audio system is fitted with a volume control to adjust the audio volume level for weapon shot sounds battlefield sounds and normal scenario feedback When training is being conducted the sound of the simulated weapons and scenario sounds should be loud enough for realism However for safety purposes the audio volume of the Virtual Trainer is designed not to exceed a peak exposure generally shot sounds of 110 dBA to prevent damage to the operator and or trainee s hearing The level of noise that escapes from the Training Room during operation depends on the amount of sound insulation materials used in construction of the facility dry wall sound lagging insulation materials thickness of walls and bulkheads etc An air conditioned facility and use of normal building materials typically are adequate to reduce noise shot sounds etc from the trainer to building exterior 2 2 10 Power Requirements Training Room The FATS Virtual Trainer operates using 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz power The Virtual Trainer will auto switch but there are some components that may need to be changed by a FATS Technician prior to installation A 100 240 VAC Transformer may also be supplied with the system Training Facility Design Document 1 Instructor Station Power dedicated filtered circuit i e Virtual Trainer power should be isolated from power circuits supplying other equipment within the facility 1
419. r central heating plant provide one graphic to depict the entire plant Indicate th quipment piping ductwork dampers and control valves in the installed location Include labels for equipment piping ductwork dampers and control valves Show the direction of air and water flow Include dynamic display of applicable object data with clear names in appropriate locations 4 Sequence of Operation Provide a graphic screen displaying the written out full sequence of operation for each piece of HVAC equipment Provide a link to the sequence of operation displays on their respectiv quipment graphics Include dynamic real time data within the text for setpoints and variables b Graphic Title Provide a prominent descriptive title on each graphic page c Dynamic Update When the workstation is on line all graphic I O object values shall update with change of value services or by operator selected discrete intervals d Graphic Linking Provide forward and backward linking between floor plans sub plans and equipment e Graphic Editing Provide installed software to create modify and delete the DDC graphics Include the ability to store graphic symbols in a symbol directory and import these symbols into the graphics f Dynamic Point Editing Provide full editing capability for deleting adding and modifying dynamic points on the graphics 2 2 n ENSORS AND INPUT HARDWAR Gl
420. r 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisemen period Sec ts manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year tion 23 03 00 00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section vith additions and modifications specified herein SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 6 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 I 3 1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a two year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer s factory or laboratory tests can be shown 3 2 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment ona regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 3 3 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuou
421. r as required to meet exhaust air requirement plus 15 percent for pressurization whichever is larger Ventilation air must be 115 5 percent of exhaust air for all spaces with direct mechanical exhaust Exception Ventilation for military family housing is normally satisfied by infiltration or natural ventilation and is designed per Energy Star requirements 6 1 4 6 Filtering Filter ventilation air before it enters an air handler heat recovery equipment or preconditioning equipment Use extended media filters with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value MERV of 7 or greater in accordance with ASHRAE 52 2 1999 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size 6 1 4 7 Duct Seal Seal all ducts to SMACNA Seal Class B and leak test in accordance with UFGS 15950N Duct Air Leakage Testing DALTS Ducts shall also be sealed at all penetrations through the building enclosure and continuous air barrier and at all connections to equipment louvers registers and grills Registers and grills shall also be sealed to the space interior wall surfaces Louvers shall be sealed to exterior wall surfaces Seal all seams within the air paths including within air moving equipment Where units or ducts penetrate the exterior wall seal all thru wall sleeves between the exterior wall and the sleeve at both the exterior and interior wall surfaces Also seal all thru wall sleeves between the units and ducts and t
422. ract for tank fill up after BOD of project Designer shall specify size of the tank typical sizes are 123 500 amp 1000 gallon size and location of the concrete pad and placement number of protective bollards Bollards shall be place to protect from the grass cutters each open corner and nearby traffic may require intermediate bollard spacing Design shall comply with all applicable codes As a reminder 500 gallon tank shall be minimum of 10 from the building 1000 gallon tank shall be minimum of 25 from the building The long axis of the tank shall be parallel with the building AROICC will notify Camp Lejeune metering amp LP tank inspector currently Brian Soo 545 9222 of the need timing of tank placement and tank fill after BOD On LP systems first stage regulator is located at the LP tank and should be set for 10 psig The second stage regulator should be located on the exterior of the building wall in a protected location Provide a building shut off valve on all systems 1 19 2010 Size interior gas piping with a 15 safety buffer I E Size the piping for 15 more demand than anticipated 1 28 10 Common interior gas pressures are 7 2 psi and 5 psi Use 7 if 2 or smaller piping can serve the load otherwise use 2psi with regulators at each appliance 1 28 10 CONTROLS 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Avoid use of economizers dry bulb or enthalpy High humidity and poor control rel
423. rator to gateway communications Provide 2 backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify download backup and restore gateway configuration 1 3 Notebook Computer Provide a notebook computer complete with the project s installed DDC software configuration files and applications database to fully troubleshoot and program the project s devices Provide the notebook computer with ballistic nylon carrying case with shoulder strap with all necessary cables and interface hardware needed for setup and communication with the controllers and control system components At a minimum the notebook computer shall include Common Access Card reader a Microsoft XP Professional operating system processor with capability and speed required by application software 40 giga byte hard drive 512 mega byte RAM 2 USB 2 0 ports 10 100 network interface card internal V 92 modem 15 inch display keyboard 3 hour battery with charger 52X internal CD RW drive with CD creator software and Microsoft Office bundled software Provide all original licenses installation media documentation and recovery CDs capable of restoring the original configuration Provide the manufacturer s 3 year next business day on site warranty with the Government listed as the warranty owner Provide a CAC card access port 214 Softvare 1 4 1 Programming Provide programming to execute the sequence of operation indicated
424. requirement yes no 3 Tdentify the Navy Furniture BPA or other Federal Supply Schedule utilized or indicate not applicable 4 Was UNICOR included in the review YES _ no _ 5 Provide evidence of affording all BPA holder and or Federal Supply Schedule holders the opportunity to compete Also provide evidence that UNICOR was solicited 6 List the name s and contract numi of contractors who responded to th for proposal for this requirement List contractors names contract numbers and business size for those who responded 7 Provide copies of all quotes received and reviewed 8 Identify the contractor recommended as the best value 0 When you sought additional price reductions were they received YES L No m 10 Identify price with discounts for the recommended best value contractor Mar 09 11 Is installation site preparation design or ancillary services included in this project YES Jno m If yes be sure that the installation site preparation design or ancillary services are included as separate line items in each quote 12 Are you selecting the lowest priced item YES Lino If no indicate in addition to price those factors listed below considered in your decision Price OO Special features required in effective program performance Trade in considerations Probable life of the item selected as compared with that of a comparable item Warranty considerations Maintenance availability Past performa
425. ringing or forcing Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top bottom or side of main using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions Supply pipes valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1 2 inch between finished covering on the different services Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice Change in direction shall be made with fittings except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed The center line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe Bent pipe showing kinks wrinkles flattening or other malformations will not be acceptable 31 1 5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping Allowance shall be made throughou
426. riteria completion and testing of the installed system Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies G Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the the the state to perform such tests If no state requirement exists Contractor shall have the manufacturer s representative test device to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests SD 07 Certificates Materials and Equipment Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code the design fabrication and installation shall conform to the code SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Rainwater Harvesting System G Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 24 05 20 FACILITY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION 3 STANDARD PRODUCTS Specified ma manufacturer terials and equipment shall be standard products of a regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed sa tisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use fo
427. ronze as indicated and pigment shall provide uniform coloration throughout entire wall thickness Finish surface shall be pigmented polyurethane having a minimum dry film thickness of 0 038 mm 1 5 mils Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of the pole is inherently ultraviolet inhibited Minimum fiberglass content shall be 65 percent with resin and pigment comprising the other 35 percent material content 8 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS ANSI C136 3 ANSI C136 13 and ANSI C136 21 as applicable Pole brackets shall be not less than 31 75 mm 1 1 4 inch galvanized steel pipe aluminum secured to pole Slip fitter or pipe threaded brackets may be used but brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided and brackets for use with one type of luminaire shall be identical Brackets for pole mounted street lights shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height indicated Mount brackets not less than 7320 mm 24 feet above street Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and Page 21 shall be of metal vhich vill not promote galvanic reaction vith luminaire head 2 9 POLE FOUNDATIONS Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 344 5 MPa 50 000 psi the top 305 mm 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 A153M Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 31 00 00 10 CAST IN PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
428. roofing and underwater structures to ensure the constructed facility performs as intended and meets the needs of the supported commands to define the use of Post Construction Award Services PCAS funding as it applies to the Capital Improvements Business Line CIBL in house acceptance testing and technical support efforts This supplements the Enhanced Commissioning Here is the link for the ECB https portal navfac navy mil portal page portal docs doc store pub ecb2008 03 pdf 3 ENERGY STAR Labeled facility Provide ENERGY STAR Label facility Why This is a major energy feature This feature registers the project as an ENERGY STAR Label facility It offers national recognition and a posting on the Department of Energy DOE web site NAVFAC MIDLANT proposes that the Contractor and A E provide facilities that meet or are better than the Department of Energy s requirements for ENERGY STAR Label for Commercial Buildings Provide for a minimum target overall rating of 90 After one year of operation the Contractor CA and the A E shall accumulate the required energy usage data and submit applications to obtain the Energy Star label for each facility The Contractor shall apply the label to each facility and register the facility as an ENERGY STAR Label facility A copy of 2009 Professional Engineer s Guide to the ENERGY STAR Label for Commercial Buildings is available on the DOE web site All equipment provided shall have the ENERGY
429. roper line of sight is maintained from the instructor to student and projection screen FATS suggest an optimal placement for the Instructor s Station and the associated hardware and controls as indicated in the facility diagrams in Attachment A That location will allow the instructor to have an unobstructed view of the screen and the firing line and at the same time have access to the rooms electrical controls such as thermostat fluorescent and dimmable lights If the customer desires a different location please discuss the desired new location with FATS to avoid potential problems Please Note If Mortars or a Mk 19 are being used on the system please allow approximately 4 x 4 1 2192m X 1 2192m for the Mortar MK 19 platforms The projector distance may vary depending on the model purchased Please check with FATS Inc for specific distances for your projector Training Facility Design Document 2 2 3 Flooring Requirements Training Room It is recommended that a 2 0 6096m raised firing platform be constructed for the trainees t should be made out of solid wood or another material that minimizes vibrations due to people walking and moving about on the floor since vibration can adversely affect the shooters performance The firing platform should have a crawl space underneath it to allow for running system cables and hoses to reduce clutter It should also have openings at the indicated locations for the projector and for acces
430. rridors elevators Copy Rooms stairs 5 Mail Sorting 50 3 Front desk 50 Private Offices 50 5 Lobby general lighting 10 Open Plan Offices 30 to 50 5 Linen room general 10 Lobbies Reception Areas 10 3 Retail Stairways and Corridors 5 Fitting areas 100 30 Stocks rooms Restrooms 5 3 wrapping packaging 30 5 General merchandise Educational Facilities display 50 10 Reading whiteboards 000007 5 Reading chalk boards 50 Shelving 50 10 Reading pen typed print 2 30 7 pencil Meat processed 50 10 Reading keyboard 30 2 Meat fresh 50 10 Science Labs 50 30 Produce 50 10 Art Rooms 50 30 Dairy 50 10 Lecture Halls 100 50 Health Care Facilities Anesthetizing 50 10 Autopsy general 50 10 Cardiac function laboratory 50 10 Work areas general 30 5 Operating areas delivery recovery amp lab suite and service 50 3 Critical care areas 5 Recovery room general 10 3 Emergency outpatient general 50 10 Occupational therapy 30 Patient rooms observation 5 Surgical Suite general 300 1000 50 Surgical Holding Room 50 10 Parking Facilities and Enclosed Parking Garages The illuminance requirements for all parking facilities depend largely on pedestrian needs and perceived personal security issues Lighting for parking lots should provide not only the recommended minimum illuminance levels but also good color rendition uniformity and minimal glare From a security standpoint ligh
431. rs and controls must be installed in the elevator machine room 5 3 2 Elevator Hoistway Pit Sprinkler Protection In buildings protected with an automatic sprinkler system provide sprinkler in the pit for hydraulic elevators except in Italy Locate sprinkler head no more than 2 0 609 mm above the pit floor 13 CHAPTER 6 ELECTRICAL Design and installation of all electrical wiring and equipment must be in accordance with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design must comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 6 1 Elevator Machine Room 6 1 1 Elevator Power Supply For each elevator a separate electrical power service must be provided from the main building electrical distribution panel to the elevator machine room The electrical service must comply with the following a The elevator electrical service must include a fourth wire dedicate earth ground b The electrical power supply must provide a balanced 3 phase power supply with a maximum voltage variation of 5 between any two phases c Designer must consider type of elevator drive specified i e SCR VVVF etc and design service accordingly 6 1 2 Elevator Disconnecting Means Locate the elevator disconnecting means on the wall inside the MR on the strike jam side of the MR door within sight of the elevator equipment it controls
432. rs and storage tanks without moving parts are simply bolted to the floor Equipment such as exhaust fans and small pumps mounted in non vibration sensitive locations may also be simply bolted to the floor or slab The calculated seismic force determines the specific means of anchorage The engineered anchorage must address the type and size of the anchor bolts with particular attention given to the clearance around the bolt Excessive clearances betvveen bolts and equipment may lead to anchor failure due to shea r during earthquakes Neoprene grommets or epoyy fillers should be used fill the clearances Anchorage to steel wood and concrete requires additional considerations o Anchorage to steel Consult the American Institute of Steel Construction Manual for the actual strength of the anchor bolts o Anchorage to wood The strength of an anchor to wood depends on the type and grade of wood as well as the embedment Generally a 15 mm 1 2 to 20 mm 3 4 diameter lag bolt with a depth of 50 mm 2 to 75 m m 3 provides adequate anchorage o Anchorage to concrete Set in concrete anchor bolts are not practical Use post drill anchors where practical ASHRAE A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint provides specific information on their use Anchorage for large equipment gt 11 metric tons in high seismic zones may make the use of numerous post drill anchors impractical Other solutions may include the connection of embed
433. rting Structural Elements 14 Standard 11 Building Entrance Layout Appendix B 3 2 e Does building main entrance face away from the installation perimeter or other uncontrolled vantage point o If no provide means to screen Lines of site 15 Standard 12 Exterior Doors Appendix B 3 3 all exterior doors from inhabited areas open outwards e Does glazing in doors meet Provisions of Standard 10 above 16 17 18 19 Standard 13 Mailrooms Appendix B 3 4 amp B 4 2 s mailroom located on the exterior perimeter of the building Is mailroom located as far away from heavily populated areas as possible Is mailroom sealed between its envelope and other portions of the building in which it is located o Does mailroom have a hard ceiling or does mailroom walls extend full height and are sealed to underside of structure above o Does mailroom door have weather stripping on all four edges Standard 14 Roof Access Appendix B 3 5 Are external roof access points controlled Standard 15 Overhead Mounted Architectural Features Appendix B 3 6 Are overhead mounted features weighing 31 lbs or more mounted to minimize falling and injuring building occupants Are these items mounted to resist forces of 0 5 times the component weight in any direction and 1 5 times the component weight in the downward direction Appendix C Recommended Additional Measures Appendix C 2 2 thr
434. ry clinics See Appendix E for definitions 1 5 Hints amp Tips Original specifications design documents and as built drawings can be used to confirm certain physical characteristics However because the actual physical characteristics of the building can vary significantly from these plans and records any review of documentation should always be combined with a physical inspection of the building 1 6 Physical Characteristics Q amp A Are buildings that are owned by U S based companies or by the Federal Government but that are located outside of the United States eligible to apply for the ENERGY STAR label Buildings located on foreign lands but owned by U S based companies are not eligible to apply for the ENERGY STAR label However buildings that are located on foreign lands but that are owned and occupied by the United States government and that meet U S construction codes are eligible s Are common areas to be included when determining the floor area of the building or a given space for example office space Yes the user entered value for area must be the gross interior area of the building or in the case of a user specified office block the gross interior area of the office block This includes all principal exterior surfaces of the enclosing fixed walls and includes all supporting functions such as kitchens and break rooms used by staff storage areas administrative areas elevators stairwells atria vent shafts
435. s and air flows within the range of the calibrated equipment In the test report test points shall be shown in graphical form on a log log scale with pressure in inches water column displayed on the horizontal axis and flow in cfm displayed on the vertical axis A report shall be submitted for each leak test whether successful or not 4 THERMOGRAPHY TEST The building envelope shall be tested using Infrared Thermography technology The thermography testing shall be completed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 1060 and ISO 6781 and the Building Air Thermography Survey Procedures The Contracting Officer shall witness the testing The contractor shall note any areas of compromise in the building envelope and shall note all actions taken to correct those areas The thermography shall be used to demonstrate the problem areas have been corrected End of Section n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 11 CAPITAL MPROVEMENTS Naval Facilities Engineering Command ENGINEERING amp CONSTRUCTION Bulletin Issue No 2008 01 13 December 2007 Type Guidance Subject Energy Policy Act of 2005 Implementation and USGBC LEEDe Certification References a Energy Policy Act EPAct of 2005 Public Law 109 58 dated 8 August 2005 b Executive Order 13423 Strengthening Federal Environmental Energy and Transportation Management dated 24 January 2007 c US Green Building Council USGBC Leadership in Energy and Environme
436. s and supports shall conform to MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 except as modified herein a Types 5 12 and 26 shall not be used b Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe c Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms Dbefore concrete is placed Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts d Type 19 and 23 C clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP 69 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer Field fabricated C clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable e Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable iron steel plate or adapter SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 19 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger vhen the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe Type 40 shields shall 1 Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches 2 Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less 3 Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP 69 and a support shall be
437. s interfaces Ethernet connections telephone lines For each typical meter installation provide a diagram b One line diagram including meters switch es current transformers potential transformers protocol modules communications interfaces Ethernet connections telephone outlets 11 and fuses For each typical meter installation provide a diagram 4 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products vhich are of equal material design and vorkmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening The 1 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product or an earlier release of the product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the prior 1 period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer hovever the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 4 3 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified othervise sb MAINTENANCE 521 Additions to Operat
438. s less than 16 inch pounds Provide two position actuators of single direction spring return or reversing type Provide modulating actuators capable of stopping at any point in the cycle and starting in either direction from any point Actuators shall be equipped with a switch for reversing direction and a button to disengage the clutch to allow manual adjustments Provide the actuator with a hand crank for manual adjustments as applicable Actuators without spring return may only be used on terminal fan coil units terminal VAV units convectors and unit heaters Spring return actuators shall be provided on all control dampers and all control valves except terminal fan coil units terminal VAV units convectors and unit heaters unless indicated otherwise Each actuator shall have distinct markings indicating the full open and full closed n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 27 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 position and the points in between 2 3 4 Output Signal Conversion 2 3 5 Output Svitches 2 9 0cl Control Relays Field installed and DDC panel relays shall be double pole double throv UL listed vith contacts rated for the intended application indicator lioht and dust proof enclosure The indicator light shall be lit vhen the coil is energized and off when coil is not energized Relays shall be the
439. s offer met or exceeded the standard for each factor and why the offeror represents the best value to the Government compared to the other offerors SUBMITTING OFFICIAL PRIME CONTRACTOR S INTERIOR DESIGNER In accordance with FAR 8 404 b all agency specific regulations and statutes applicable to this purchase are attached 1 have reviewed the findings and documentation attached and I have affirmatively determined them to be complete and accurate Name Title Date Telephone Email Signature Mar 09 Enclosure 2 BEST VALUE DETERMINATION GUIDELINES Greater than 150 000 Schedule Purchases are subject te FAR 8 4 DFARS 208 4 and DFARS PGI Supplement 208 405 70 FAR 2 101 FAR 8 4 required that you make a best value determination before placing Multiple Award Schedule MAS orders above the micro purchase limit currently 3 000 Navy Furniture BPAs shall be the primary source for FF amp E Refer to Specification Section E20 orders greater than 150 000 ali BPA holders for the applicable schedule shall be given an opportunity to compete for the requirement In addition UNICOR shall also be solicited DFARS PGI 208 405 70 FAR 2 101 Seek additional price discounts from the contractor offering the best value FAR 8 405 1 d 1 Brief Description of Item System or Component to be Procured 2 were all BPA holders and or Federal Supply Schedule holders given the opportunity to propose on the
440. s place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 3 4 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of Similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer 34421 Definitions For the International Code Council ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory the word should shall be interpreted as Shall Reference to the code official shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer For Navy owned property references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer For leased facilities references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the lessor References to the permit holder shall be interpreted to mean the Contractor 3 4 2 Administrative Interpretations For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents the provisions of Chapter 1 Administrator do not apply These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this proyect References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1 shall be
441. s than 0 25 degrees F The total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0 5 degrees F Allow an additional 0 5 percent accuracy for averaging sensors 2 2 1 3 Temperature Sensor Details a Room Type Provide the sensing element components within a decorative protective cover suitable for surrounding decor Provide room temperature sensors with timed override button setpoint adjustment lever digital temperature display Provide a communication port for a portable operator interface like a notebook computer or PDA b Duct Probe Type Ensure the probe is long enough to properly sense th air stream temperatur c Duct Averaging Type Continuous averaging sensors shall be one foot in length for each 4 square feet of duct cross sectional area anda minimum length of 6 feet d Pipe Immersion Type Provide minimum three inch immersion Provide each sensor with a corresponding pipe mounted sensor well unless indicated otherwise Sensor wells shall be stainless steel when used in steel piping and brass when used in copper piping Provide the sensor well with a heat sensitive transfer agent between the sensor and the well interior e Outside Air Type Provide the sensing element on the building s north side with a protective weather shade that positions the sensor approximately 3 inches off the wall surface does not inhibit free air flow across the sensing element and protects the sensor from snow i
442. s that can be activated by either the differential temperature controller or by manual override Hand Off Automatic Each pump suction and discharge connection shall be provided with a pressure gauge as specified 2 1 6 Solar Hot Water Storage Tanks The solar hot water tanks shall be sized to accommodate the thermal systems output and furnished by the manufacturer as part of the balance of system The two 2 solar system hot water storage tank s shall have a storage volume of 450 gallons and shall be as shown on the drawings Solar system storage tank shall conform to specifications for hot water storage tanks in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE Tank penetrations shall be designed to allow for connections to copper piping without risk of corrosion due to dissimilar metals and shall be factory installed as indicated SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 10 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 217 Tank Insulations and Jackets Comply vith Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Separate aboveground tanks from supports vith insulation 1 8 Mounting and Assembly Hardvare Mounting brackets and hinges shall be aluminum or stainless steel Assembly hardware including all bolts washers and nuts shall be stainless steel 1 9 Solar Thermal System Collectors Site built solar thermal collection system shall be designed to occupy a one 1 inch of space between the waterproo
443. s to the crawl space In this configuration all weapon umbilicals run to the front of the firing line eliminating floor clutter Speaker and intercom cables can also be routed to positions in front of the firing line where they do not interfere with the trainee s view of the screen The Training Room floor should be smooth and level to within 1 0254m between any two points The Training Room floor including the firing platform should be covered with short closed pile anti static textured dark gray or black commercial carpet Carpet controls dust and feels more like the ground when firing from a prone position It is especially important to have the floor carpeted or covered with rubber mats when using Bluefire weapons where the magazines or weapon itself such as the OC spray are allowed to fall on the floor to simulate reloading or out of chemical drills Please Note In the floor mount configuration the bottom of the screen and the projector should be at the same level In the ceiling mount configuration the top of the screen and the projector inverted should also be at the same level 2 2 4 Ceiling Requirements Training Room The minimum height of the ceiling in the training room should provide sufficient room to raise the screen Add an additional 2 0 6096m for the raised platform making the top of the screen 10 12 3 048m 3 657m off the floor The ceiling should be painted flat black to match the walls and elimi
444. se preinsulated copper pipe HDPE is acceptable for chilled water applications 6 13 8 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Do not specify mineral fiber or flexible unicellular insulation on chilled water pipes Use rigid insulation on all pipes subject to being stepped on or damaged Cellular glass or polyisocyanurate up to 1 72 inches 40 mm thick is preferred on chilled water pipes and other pipes below ambient temperature including domestic cold water 1 25 10 Use solids from water separators on all hydronic systems regardless of pipe material steel or copper Automatic flow control balancing valves should only be used in conjunction with piping systems employing solids from water separators regardless of piping material 6 26 09 Isolate steam mechanical rooms from building All steam equipment is more prone to leaking thus making the room humidity saturated Provide the steam room with an exterior door do not provide a door s to adjacent spaces Keep electrical equipment out of this room If possible separate steam rooms from cold equipment rooms Minimize controls in steam mechanical rooms Only controls necessary for equipment in the room shall be allowed If it is convenient put controls in adjacent room It is preferable to keep air handlers out of this room also Do not run high pressure steam outside the steam room ie steam entrance should be directly into steam mechanical room Separate bui
445. se recovered mineral components in concrete fly ash blast furnace slag etc NAVFAC complies with this requirement with cement replacement materials and rates currently specified in the Unified Facility Guide Specifications EPAct 2005 Section 109 All new federal buildings with designs started on or after January 3 2007 must comply with EPAct 2005 Section 109 as codified by DOE under US Code 10 CFR 433 amp 435 Specifically all new federal buildings shall be designed to achieve energy consumption levels that are at least 30 percent below the levels established in the ASHRAE 90 1 2004 standard for commercial or multi family high rise buildings or the 2004 International Energy Conservation Code IECC for residential buildings If a 30 reduction level is not life cycle cost LCC effective alternative designs must be evaluated to achieve the most energy efficient level that is life cycle cost effective for that building This section applies to new buildings regardless of location occupancy size funding source client or temporary nature Currently Section 109 requirements do not apply to major renovations If the 30 reduction level is not life cycle cost effective based on the analysis the Designer of Record DOR shall use an iterative procedure as described in the Rules and Regulations Federal Register Vol 71 No 232 Department of Energy Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy to find the lowest level of energy consu
446. sene and wood On site electricity production and on site renewable energy should be treated from the perspective of the curb That is only energy that crosses the curb and enters the building should be included On site generation of electricity typically consumes either natural gas or diesel fuel In this case include the consumption of natural gas or diesel fuel but do NOT include the amount of electricity generated on site Renewable energy generated on site would not be included because no energy flows across the curb Effectively renewable energy acts to offset the consumption of energy that would otherwise cross the curb Buildings or facilities that distribute energy produced on site to other buildings or onto the electricity grid should remove the impact of this additional energy use To accomplish this a meter should be included in the Portfolio Manger record as having negative monthly values for each fuel type that is leaving the building for consumption off site at another location Similarly if a building shares fuel with an adjacent building e g district heat or cooling that fuel must be apportioned and metered according to each building s actual consumption The PE is expected to review energy consumption documentation for each energy source used in the building to validate the energy consumption values reported on the SEP and Data Checklist Documentation must include monthly energy consumption for each energy source spanning
447. seven feet overburden with a safety factor of 5 1 against general buckling Tank shall be designed rated and ASME BPVC code stamped The tank and all components and accessories shall be manufactured with materials conforming to the requirements of NSF standard 61 Provide the tank with a vent to the atmosphere The tank shall be manufactured with 100 resin and glass fiber reinforcement Provide FRP anchor straps Provide as recommended and specified by the tank manufacturer all the required types and number of anchors strap locations strap sizes and number of straps With the tank provide the following FRP accessories with all necessary supports Internal pump platforms drop and fill downcomer tubes submersible pumps and ladders flanged manways minimum of two Manway extensions and covers a4 Submersible Feed Pump Provide a submersible pump for the rainwater storage tank The pump shall be capable of providing the flow quantities at the conditions indicated on the drawings Pump motor shall be the high efficiency type The pump shall be rated for potable water and shall have the required certifications and shall be NSF listed for the service intended Provide the pump with a floating type extractor with screen and a float type level control to shut down the pump when tank level is below safe level for pump operation SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 11 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 2 5 5 Debris F
448. shall be made with new materials Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable 3 9 3 System Flushing 3 9 3 1 During Flushing Before operational tests or disinfection potable and non potable water piping system shall be flushed with potable water Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system In the event that this is impossible due to size of system the Contracting Officer or the designated representative shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration 3 9 3 2 After Flushing System shall be drained at low points Strainer screens shall be removed cleaned and replaced After flushing and cleaning systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean fresh potable water Any stoppage discol
449. shall conform to the following requirements a b Continuous with all joints made air and water tight Structural Integrity ABS shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement and shall transfer the load to the structure Shall not displace adjacent materials under full load Shall be joined in an air tight watertight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval information only The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 05 20 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Building Air Tightness Test Procedures G The Contractor shall submit no later than 60 days after Notice to Proceed detailed test methods procedures test apparatus and analysis methods to be employed for the Building Air Tightness Test Building Air Thermography Survey Procedures G The Contractor shall submit no later than 60 days after Notice to n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 3 Proceed detailed test methods procedures test app
450. should be combined into one parking space The purpose of combining all of these areas into one space is to avoid double counting and simplify the process By apportioning the square foot of the parking area into these three categories Portfolio Manager can properly assign lighting and ventilation allowances Retail Store This space type applies to stores of at least 5 000 square feet in gross floor area used to conduct the retail sale of consumer products goods The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions 25 such as kitchens and break rooms used by staff storage areas administrative areas elevators stairvvells atria etc Stores must be free standing or located in strip centers Stores located in enclosed malls are not eligible with the exception of mall anchors Retail segments typically eligible for benchmarking include Department Store Discount Store Supercenter Warehouse Club Drug Store Dollar Store Home Center Hardware and Apparel Hard Line Specialty i e books clothing office products toys home goods Retail segments not eligible for benchmarking include Electronics Stores Supermarket The Supermarket Grocery Store space type applies to facility space used for the retail sale of food and beverage products It should not be used by restaurants which are not eligible for a rating at this time The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as kitchens and break rooms used by
451. sign Criteria 130 MPH winds computed in accordance with ASCE SEI 7 05 i Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 330 j FM Tested Class 4471 wind uplift testing with a minimum rating of FM I 90 k Class A Fire Rating UL 790 1 Florida Building Code approval 2 222 Materials a Galvalume ASTM A792 A792M AZ 50 aluminum zinc alloy coating 1 Base Metal Structural quality 50 ksi yield point 52 ksi tensile strength 2 Thickness 24 gauge 3 Finish Fluorocarbon Kynar 500 Hylar 5000 coating nominal 1 0 mil SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 14 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 thickness comprised of 0 8 to 0 9 mil fluorocarbon full strength 70 percent Kynar 500 finish coating over 0 2 to 0 3 mil urethane primer Specular Gloss shall be 25 40 percent vhen held measured at a 60 degree angle Coatings shall be cool colors or Ultra Cool for energy efficiency 2 2 Underlayment Materials a Rubberized Asphalt Strips Rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene 40 mil total thickness with strippable treated release paper 1 Physical Properties a Load strain properties at 77 degrees F maximum load lbs inch MD XD 64 88 Elongation at maximum load MD XD 52 24 b Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 22 degree F c Peel Resistance on plywood ASTM D 903 11 41b ft d Maximum Service Temperature 240 degree F e Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 E 96M perm
452. sign and construction are described in attachment 1 Reference b was signed by the President on 24 January 2007 Section 2 paragraph f Goals of Agencies requires agencies to comply with the Guiding Principles of the Federal Issue POC Mike Chapman 202 685 9175 1 of 4 ECB posted at https portal navfac navy mil pls portal url page ci ecb ssue No 2008 01 13 December 2007 Type Guidance Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings Memorandum of Understanding reference d The Assistant Secretary of the Navy Installations amp Environment ASN amp E issued reference e directing Navy and Marine Corps Commanders programmers and sponsors to plan program and budget for and meet the requirements of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 and policies noted The memorandum includes a requirement to support achieving at least LEEDa Silver level rating performance The use of the LEEDa rating system in the planning design and construction of facilities can address and satisfy the requirements of the EPAct 2005 and the Executive Order Credits that directly address the Guiding Principles of the 2006 MOU are identified in attachment 2 Given the reporting requirements of references a and b there is a need for more accurate and accountable measurement than provided by self certification NAVFAC has determined that the USGBC LEEDa certification process can provide cost effective assurance of achieving comp
453. sions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of Similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 4 6 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products vhich are of equal material design and vorkmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer Component parts of the item shall be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated othervise in this section 42644 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roa
454. ss engraved laminated plastic or engraved anodized aluminum indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves Tags shall be 1 3 8 inch minimum diameter and marking shall be stamped or engraved Indentations shall be black for reading clarity Tags shall be attached to valves with No 12 AWG copper wire chrome plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose All hose bibbs connected to the rainwater harvesting system shall be identified with signs that say CAUTION RECLAIMED WATER DO NOT DRINK The letters on the sign shall be at least 1 2 high 3 6 2 Pipe Color Code Marking Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 6 3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings The color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling The operable components shall include valves and switches The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks Each colored metal disk shall be approximately 3 8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view The fasteners sha
455. ss will be employed on NAVFAC construction contracts in accordance with BMS Process B 1 6 11 NAVFAC Red Zone The NRZ initiative is focused on identifying all issues that could adversely impact contract completion and initial operating capability The process addresses elements of construction completion facility delivery activities and contractor Client and NAVFAC actions The process establishes business practices such as checklists scheduling tools meetings and other tools to mitigate potential delays and costs and enable timely delivery of the completed project Clear expectations for facility turnover will be established at the Post Award Kickoff meeting The NRZ process will begin within the last 25 of contract time or three to six months before Beneficial Occupancy Date BOD whichever comes first and extend to contract closeout 4 Deployment All NAVFAC field activities will immediately implement this policy as prescribed in BMS process B 1 6 11 The PM DM will incorporate NRZ requirements for contracts in Pre award and the CM will incorporate meetings checklists and milestones on contracts that are awarded The point of contact for this policy is Bob Silver bob silver navy mil higf Engineer and Director Capital Improvements Acting Issue POC Bob Silver P E 202 685 9170 1 of 1 ECB posted at https portal navfac navy mil pls portal url page ci ecb DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY n NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING C
456. ssibility For all buildings a minimum of one passenger elevator must be designed to accommodate emergency medical services access to all floors of the building The elevator shall be of such a size and arrangement to accommodate a 24 inch by 84 inch 610mm by 1930mm ambulance stretcher in the horizontal open position and shall be identified by the international symbol for emergency medical services star of life If the facility is equipped with emergency power this elevator must be powered by the emergency power system 2 2 5 Elevator Operational Features The client survey must include choices for elevator operational features including a Emergency Commandeering Service b Security and Access Control Systems 2 2 6 LEED Certification Design Options a High Efficiency Gearless Machine and A high efficiency gearless machine has been developed and incorporated into elevator design within the elevator industry This type is similar to traditional gearless traction machines However the high efficiency gearless machine utilizes an electric motor design that uses permanent magnets to increase the energy efficiency of the drive machine This type of elevator should be considered for all facilities Regenertive Drive Motor Control Regenertive Drive motor control systems have been developed for electric traction elevators are incorporated into elevator design within the elevator industry This motor control system uses the e
457. ssure differential of 0 3 w g 75 Pa in accordance with ASTM E779 2003 or E 1827 96 R2007 Accomplish tests using either pressurization or depressurization or both Divide the volume of air leakage in CFM 0 3 w g L s 75 Pa by the area of the pressure boundary of the building including roof or ceiling walls and floor to produce the air leakage rate in CFM SF 0 3 w g L s m2 75 Pa Do not test the building until verifying that the continuous air barrier is in place and installed without failures in accordance with installation instructions so that repairs to the continuous air seal barrier if needed to comply with the required air leakage rate can be done in a timely manner B Test the completed building using Infrared Thermography testing Use infrared cameras with a resolution of 0 1deg C or better Performtesting on the building envelope in accordance with ISO 6781 1983 and ASTM 1060 90 R2003 Determine air leakage pathways using ASTM E 1186 03 July 2009 Attachment R2009 Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Seal Barrier Systems and perform corrective vvork as necessary to achieve the vvhole building air leakage rate specified in above C Notify the Government at least three working days prior to the tests to provide the Government the opportunity to witness the tests Provide the Government written test results confirming the results of all tests 2 of 2 SECTIO
458. st ropes wire ropes are suspended in the elevator hoistway and supported by the elevator drive machine The elevator cab is fastened to one end of the hoist ropes and the elevator counterweight is fastened to the other end of the hoist ropes The counterweight is used to counterbalance the weight of the elevator cab Minimum car speed requirements are identified for each type of electric traction elevator machine 1 Geared Traction Machine The elevator drive motor and geared machine are located in the elevator machine room The motor drives a worm and ring gear assembly in the elevator drive machine The ring gear turns the drive sheave which runs the elevator cab up and down in the hoistway This type of electric traction elevator may be used for mid rise applications of 4 to 10 floors Car speed must be a minimum of 350 feet per minute 2 Gearless Traction Machine The elevator gearless drive machine is located in the elevator machine room The motor connects directly to the drive sheave there is no gear reduction unit This type of electric traction elevator may be used for mid rise applications and must be used for high rise applications of greater than 10 floors Car speed must be a minimum of 350 fpm for mid rise and 500 fpm for high rise applications 3 High Efficiency Gearless Machine This type is very similar to the gearless traction machine above However the high efficiency gearless machine utilizes an electric motor design that
459. st three DDC systems installations of a similar design to this project and programmed similar sequences of operation for at least two years Submit the name of the technician proposed to make n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 13 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 additions alterations to the EMCS servers Submit supporting documentation demonstrating their qualifications 1 6 Modification of References The advisory provisions in ASME B31 1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory Substitute shall for should vherever it appears and interpret all references to the authority having jurisdiction and owner to mean the Contracting Officer 1 6 Project Sequence The control system work for this project shall proceed in the following order a Submit and receive approval on the Shop Dravings Product Data and Certificates specified under the paragraph entitled SUBMITTALS b Perform the control system installation work including all field check outs and tuning c Provide support to TAB personnel as specified under the paragraph TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT d Submit and receive approval of the Controls System Operators Manual specified under the paragraph CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS e Submit and receive approval of the Perfor
460. staff storage areas refrigerated and non refrigerated administrative areas stairwells atria lobbies etc Swimming Pool Swimming Pool applies to heated swimming pools that operate on the premises and on the same energy use meter as the primary building This category applies to any heated swimming pools located inside or outside of the facility Swimming pools are categorized by size and whether they are an indoor our outdoor pool Warehouse Refrigerated or Unrefrigerated The warehouse space type is intended to define facility space that is only used to store goods manufactured products merchandise or raw materials Space types defined as Warehouse Refrigerated or Unrefrigerated must not contain any onsite manufacturing If the space is part of an industrial campus the space defined as warehouse must be a separate structure that is separately metered from any adjacent processing plants Refrigerated warehouse specifically denotes space designed to store perishable goods or merchandise under refrigeration at temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit Unrefrigerated warehouse specifically denotes space designed to store non perishable goods and merchandise The total gross floor area should include all supporting functions such as offices lobbies stairways rest rooms equipment storage areas elevator shafts etc 26 Appendix F Outdoor Air Ventilation Rates for Health Care Facilities Healthcare facilities using the AIA 2006 Guidel
461. steam and a control valve on the condensate discharge in lieu of a steam control valve thereby omitting the need for a steam pressure regulator steam pressure safety valve steam control valve and a condensate pump Coordinate with the Public Works project manager to coordinate the use of the traditional steam system or the flooded vertical heat exchanger on each project Contact the mechanical branch manager to get the standard detail and about application 1 28 10 FIRE PROTECTION 93 94 95 96 Require as built shop drawings of sprinkler systems both as a printed copy on mylar and as an electronic file on CD in Autocad dwg 12 31 07 Interim policy for fire protection systems in Hadnot Point industrial and French Creek Areas does not include Wallace Creek Camp Lejeune has planned projects to increase system pressures from 50 60 psi to 70 80 psi All fire protection systems that require fire pumps shall be designed to operate without the fire pumps with a 70 psi system pressure The exception to this is if UFC requirements can not be met even with the higher pressure 1 19 2010 When installing more than one riser require a check valve alarm check on each riser to reduce the chance of all risers alarming vvhen ever one riser flovvs Shovv the backflovv preventer test header on the riser diagram 1 28 10 Require the use of tvvo piece ceiling cup plate for sprinklers installed in lay in ceilings This permits future replacem
462. straint of HVAC equipment will depend on how the equipment is isolated and whether it is supported on the floor or from the wall or overhead e Seismic Design Requirements e General Requirements Use either cable or solid bracing for all situations Do not mix bracing types All runs must have a minimum of two transverse braces and on longitudinal brace A run is defined as a length of duct or pipe without any change in direction except as allowed by offsets see Chapter 4 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition Duct Bracing Brace all ducts with a cross sectional area of 0 56 sm 6 ft or greater Rectangular ductwork less than 0 56 sm 6 ft in cross section does not require seismic restraint Round duct less than 710 mm 28 diameter does not require seismic restraint Brace flat oval ducts in the same manner as rectangular ducts No bracing is required if the duct is suspended by hangers 305 mm 12 or less in length as measured from the top of the duct to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached Hangers must be attached to the duct within 50 mm 2 of the top of the duct with a minimum of two M5 x 0 8 10 sheet metal screws Transverse bracing must occur at intervals specified in tables in Chapters 5 6 and 7 of the SMACNA Restraint Manual Second Edition or at both ends if the duct run is less than the specified interval Transverse bracing will be installed at each duct turn and
463. submittal This document is currently being updated however the current version will provide a good overview of what DWQ looks for in the submittal packages Federal and Coastal wetlands must be identified on project sites by a qualified wetland specialist Wetland delineation s must be drafted onto the plans It is recommended that the federal wetland delineation from an independent source be verified certified by the Corps of Engineers and the coastal wetland delineation be field verified by the Division of Coastal Management If there are no wetlands on the project area include a note on the plans stating that there are no wetlands along with the name title of the individual who made the determination See the Application Checklist for other features that must be on the plans such as streams mean high water and required buffers 12 The review fee for a stormwater application package in the regular stormwater program is 505 00 The application package may be mailed in to the Wilmington Regional Office for review Two folded blueprint plans or plan sets and one original application supplements O amp M and calculations plus the check made payable to NCDENR are required Please refer to the Submittal Requirements listed on the application for additional requirements There is also an Express Review option available The review fees for the Express Program are based upon the type of project For example the fee for a low density project rev
464. such as water tanks and battery storage areas e Maximize Leadership in Energy amp Environmental Design LEED Green Building Rating System points obtained under EA Credit 2 On Site Renewable Energy Attachment 1 STORMWATER AT CAMP LEJEUNE NORTH CAROLINA 1 Camp Lejeune is located in Onslow County North Carolina Onslow County is a coastal county Camp Lejeune is located in the White Oak River Basin 2 New projects at Camp Lejeune must be designed to meet the Coastal Stormwater Rules that went into effect in October 2008 To access the Rules go to the Division of Water Quality web site http h2o enr state nc us Under Stormwater Runoff amp Non point Source Pollution click on Coastal Stormwater Rules For the specific design requirements of the Coastal Rules click on Session Law 2008 211 Senate Bill 1967 Direct link http www ncleg net Sessions 2007 Bills Senate HTML S1967v4 html If the project is a modification to an existing stormwater permit or redevelopment please check with the Division of Water Quality Wilmington Regional Stormwater Staff to determine design criteria 3 In order to design a stormwater plan one must know the classification of the water body that the project drains to USGS Quad Sheets are helpful in determining the name of the stream that the project drains to Camp Lejeune appears on the following Quad Sheets Sneads Ferry Camp Lejeune New River Inlet Hubert and Jacksonville South The
465. sure test manifold must be attached to the upper side of the cylinder mounting plate for pressure testing of the liner and evacuation tube The pressure test manifold must include a one way compressed air inlet valve and a 138 kPag 20 psi safety relief valve d The complete system must be designed and built to withstand a pressure test of 207 kPag 30 psig The pressure test must be performed after complete assembly and installation of liner cylinder and liner evacuation system e Gaps between casing liner and cylinder must be sealed with 4 thick 21 MPa 3000 psi grout The top of the grout must be flush with the finish floor of the pit 8 5 6 3 In Ground Hydraulic Cylinder Liner Moisture Sensor System Moisture and oil sensors must be installed inside the cylinder liner for detection of oil and or water at the bottom of the cylinder liner The monitoring system controls and audible and visual alarms must be installed in the elevator machine room and must include separate visual alarms for water and for oil 8 5 6 4 Cylinder Liner Pressure Test Following the complete assembly and installation of the cylinder liner protection system the entire assembly must be pressure tested to ensure the integrity of the fully sealed unit For safety code compliance periodic pressure testing is used to verify the integrity of the system Comply with the following 27 a Perform a 30 minute pressure test at the beginning of the Acceptance Test
466. t FEB 09 Communicate the Plan and general requirements NAVFAC FEAD Awareness Update Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design LEED training on line training to expand on LID and future program requirements Develop Regional requirements approaches LANT PAC FECs Develop interim Cost Guidance Develop interim Regional Criteria Guidance Send a data call on LID projects 1 Oct 2008 Submit LID report to DASN E by 15 November 2008 Phase 2 FEB 09 JUL 09 Goal Issue Policy and Criteria for FY11 project design target MAY JUN 09 Update UFC incorporating Regional requirements EPA and DASN I amp E Policy requirements Navy Marine Corps only Publish Policy and Criteria Engineering and Construction Bulletin ECB and UFC Phase 3 MA Y 09 SEP 09 Goal Finalize Criteria and Reporting Guidance Update NAVFAC Business Management System BMS Design Build Master DBM templates Performance Technical Specifications PTS etc Update Refine cost guidance Develop reporting tracking Mechanism TBD Develop a waiver process Follow on requirements Develop inspection evaluation and maintenance processes to maintain feature viability over the design life Evaluate maintenance budget impacts and develop CNIC funding needs Tri Service unification of criteria DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY THE ASSISTANT SECRETARY OF THE NAVY INSTALLATIONS AND ENVIRONMENT 1000 NAVY
467. t for expansion and contraction of water pipe Risers shall be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion evenly divided toward the ends Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough SECTION 22 14 00 00 22 Page 16 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 to allov for expansion vithout straining 3 1 2 Joints Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended eee eee Threaded Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1 20 1 Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound or with an inert filler and oil or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied 3 1 2 2 Unions and F
468. t life cycle cost effective system The systems shall be evaluated on the basis of life cycle cost on the following factors over a time period of 40 years 1 First cost or cost of installation and materials Cost of maintenance and repair Cost of operation Energy usage and cost d ee S Energy Savings and Cost in savings 6 Cost of replacement The four systems to be evaluated vary in first cost operation cost maintenance cost replacement cost life cycle cost and energy costs and offer corresponding increases in energy efficiency and the systems are as follows Pour AC systems vary in frst Cost and offer corresponding Increases in energy efficfeney and a VAV Systems High efficiency air cooled chiller s and natural gas Consider using Chilled water with variable primary pumping and hot water loops with variable flow System shall consist of VAV air handling units serving VAV fan powered terminal units throughout the facility and a dedicated outdoor air system with 100 exhaust air energy recovery using total enthalpy heat wheel s Perform life cycle cost calculations b Variable refrigerant flow VRF cooling and heating systems using multiple packaged outdoor heat recovery units with digital variable speed scroll compressors and multiple split indoor evaporators with simultaneous heating and cooling capability using heat recovery and supplemental hot water coil Include primary secondary pumping for hot water loops Provid
469. t must have a minimum size of 20 W X 12 D X 30 H and must be sized large enough to accommodate all O amp M Data and documentation 8 1 5 Corrosion Protection All phosphorus metal elevator equipment and building components in the elevator machine room must be painted with a minimum of one coat of enamel paint 8 2 Elevator Hoistway 8 2 1 Elevator Hoistway Entrance Assemblies 8 2 1 1 For a two hour fire rated hoistway a minimum 1 2 hour fire rated hoistway entrance assembly must be installed at every landing 8 2 1 2 For every landing a one piece nickel silver stainless steel or nickel bronze entrance sill must be installed The top of the landing sill must be flush within 1 16 with the top of the finish floor The same material must be used for all hoistway and elevator cab entrance sills EXCEPTION Freight elevators with vertical bi parting doors must be equipped with a minimum 12 deep diamond plate steel sill at each landing Hoistway doors must be equipped with steel trackable sill angles 8 2 1 3 For every landing the hoistway entrance assembly door frame must be solidly grouted to a height of 5 above the landing sill 8 2 1 4 For every landing a hoistway door unlocking device must be installed to allow elevator and trained emergency personnel to open the hoistway door from the landing 8 2 1 4 1 For all jurisdictions that do not permit a hoistway door unlocking device a keyed escutcheon hole insert must
470. t seal to reduce the duct losses Use max seal class A 24 Mechanical System Insulation Increase thermal insulation on mechanical systems and utilize radiant barriers to reduce thermal losses 25 DX Systems Minimize the use of DX systems Consider using Variable refrigerant flow VRF cooling and heating systems See Item 16 above For split DX systems Use where they are required Specify high efficiency split system units Use at least 13 SEER Prefer high efficient heat pump systems When required using Centralized Direct Expansion DX Consider packaged cooling with VAV and heating from the available energy supply Primary secondary pumping for hot water loops VAV air handling units serving VAV terminals throughout the facility Dedicated 100 outdoor air conditioning system feeding neutral air to the VAV air handlers using direct expansion DX cooling hot water heating and energy recovery from exhaust air using total enthalpy heat wheel Hot water heating will be from the available energy supply This approach has to beat the other four systems above in item 16 26 Optimize the Boiler sizing Use 85 combustion efficiency or higher may have to change boiler type In optimizing the boiler efficiency include some form of burner control which allows for fully modulating burners with variable frequency drives and fans Provide for low NOx emissions Consider multiple packaged boilers for higher operation efficiency Multiple
471. t transformer wiring to be changed without removing power to the transformer The wiring blocks shall be located where they are accessible without the necessity of disconnecting power to the transformer c Voltage monitoring circuits shall be equipped with disconnect switches to isolate the meter base or socket from the voltage source Provide fuse protection in accordance with paragraph entitled Voltage Requirements 1 6 Installation Methods a Transformer Mounted XFMR in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base shall be located outside on the secondary side of the pad mounted transformer b Stand Mounted Adjacent to Transformer STAND in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base shall be mounted on a structural steel pole approximately 1 2 meters 4 feet from the transformer pad This can be used for multiple meters associated with a single transformers c Building Mounted BLDG in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base shall be mounted on the side of the existing building near the service entrance d Panel Mounted PNL in Metering Systems Schedule Meter shall be mounted where directed e Commercial meter pedestal PED in Metering Systems Schedule 22 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES Meter shall have two way communication with the existing data acquisition system DAS Provide a communications interface utilizing Refer to Section for the communication interface requirements for these meters Provi
472. tandard 55 for the purposes of the Statement of Energy Performance should be determined based on the mode of the HVAC system at the time of the assessment However the presence and prevalence of personal comfort items noted above should always factor into the decision of the PE as to whether or not both heating and cooling systems are operating as intended s Are temperature and humidity measurements required for every occupied space within the building No The PE should take a representative sample of the occupied spaces Several factors might influence a PE s decision or require further measurement For example if many of the spaces measured are barely meeting the temperature and humidity conditions then more measurements may be needed Similarly if there are a significant number of personal comfort devices for example fans heaters and window a c units or damaged and or occupant altered HVAC equipment for example diffusers and thermostats the PE should consider additional measurements in these areas Ifthe measured temperature and or humidity of a single occupied space are outside the acceptable thermal conditions listed in ASHRAE Standard 55 is that in and of itself grounds to fail the thermal comfort check Generally no The assessment of thermal comfort should take into account all measurements and observations and does not depend upon one occupied space not meeting the temperature and humidity requirements After consid
473. tative and the EMCS Owner to acknowledge successful completion 25 3 PVT Sample Size Test all central plant equipment primary air handling unit controllers and fan coil unit controllers unless otherwise directed Use the DDC system to verify all VAV boxes are controlling as specified The Government may require testing of like controllers beyond a statistical sample if sample controllers require retesting or do not have consistent results The Government may witness all testing or random samples of PVT items When only random samples are witnessed the Government may choose which ones 5 4 Pre Performance Verification Testing Checklist Submit the following as a list with items checked off once verified Provide a detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified a Verify all required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and all HVAC equipment is working correctly or will be by the time the PVT is conducted b Verify HVAC motors operate below full load amperage ratings c Verify all required control system components wiring and accessories are installed n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 42 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 d Verify the installed control system architecture matches approved drawings e Verify all
474. te building envelope tightness building design to reduce air infiltration by providing sealing throughout the envelope This requires specific details on the drawings as well as specifications for the sealing and testing techniques Provide building air tightness by reducing the air infiltration through the envelope to 0 25 CFM per envelope area square feet at 0 3 inches water gauge pressure This reduces the effect of energy from reducing infiltration 10 Water Heater Efficiencies Consider 80 to 90 or greater Current design is based on 80 combustion efficiency which is standard Changing the water heater design to a condensing type will increase the efficiency to 90 or greater 11 Supplement Hot Water with Energy Recovery Provide energy recovery with hot water utilize the hot water storage tank Recover energy from the Chiller condenser to supplement the hot water storage heating source 12 Hot Water Distribution System Provide Variable Speed pumping for hot water pumps Provide high efficiency pumps and motors 13 Chiller Optimize the chiller plant including the chilled water pump a Look at increasing the chiller efficiency Increase the Chilled Water temperature difference from 10 degree rise to 11 or 12 degrees For Constant speed chillers for every 1 degree increase in chilled water temperature can increase the chiller energy efficiency by 1 to 2 Increase the pump efficiency and motor efficiency Consider variabl
475. te interval and initially set to a 15 minute interval It shall have provisions to be programmed to calculate demand on a rolling interval basis Meter readings shall be true RMS The meter electronic register shall be of modular design with non volatile data storage Downloading meter stored data shall be capable via an optical port Recording capability of data storage with a minimum capability of 89 days of 15 minute 2 channel interval data The meter shall be capable of providing at least 2 KYZ pulse outputs dry contacts Default initial configuration unless identified otherwise by base personnel shall be First channel kWh Second channel kVARh KYZ output 1 kWh KYZ output 2 kVARh 1 2 3 4 All meters shall have identical features available in accordance with this specification The meter schedule identifies which features shall be activated at each meter location Enable switches for Time of Use TOU pulse and load profile measurement module at the factory Meter shall have an optical port on front of meter capable of speeds from 9600 to a minimum of 19 2k baud and shall be initially set at 9600 baud Optical device shall be compatible with ANSI C12 18 Meters shall be 120 480 volts auto ranging Provide blank tag fixed to the meter faceplate for the addition of the meter multiplier which will be the product of the current transformer and potential transformer ratio a
476. te the design coil fin density on the equipment schedules not to exceed a maximum of 8 fins per inch 8 fins per 25 4 millimeters to ensure a cleanable coil and competitive bidding For other than VAS cooling coils with typical depth of less than 4 rows indicate the cooling coil fin density on equipment schedules at a maximum of 14 fins per inch 14 fins per 25 4 millimeters To preclude moisture carryover coil face velocities must not exceed 550 feet per minute 167 6 meters per minute Ultraviolet lights may be considered to control growth of mold within the coil air handling unit and ductwork and may be especially suitable for use with deep 4 row or more cooling coils 6 1 4 9 2 Specify the minimum number of cooling coil rows in the equipment schedules The number of rows will be based on a comparison of data from at least three manufacturers and must ensure that latent cooling loads can be met or exceeded 6 1 4 9 3 Cooling coil design entering and leaving air conditions must be specified wet and dry bulb temperatures at the design airflow rate 6 1 4 9 4 Select equipment with a cooling capacity closest to the design load no safety factors meeting the conditions of paragraph 6 1 4 1 Over sizing the cooling equipment inhibits dehumidification capability Heating equipment capacity SHOULD INCLUDE appropriate safety factors 6 1 4 9 5 Several options for equipment types are available to accomplish dehumidification Select equipm
477. termining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows Curtain Walls SECTION 22 33 31 05 22 Page 2 2D COMBAT ENGINEER BATTALION OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 616306 and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E 330 2002 R 2010 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows Doors Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 84 2010b Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 96 E 96M 2010 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM F 1199 1988 R 2010 Cast All Temperatures and Pressures and Welded Pipe Line Strainers 150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum ASTM F 876 2010 Crosslinked Polyethylene PEX Tubing ASTM F 877 2007 Crosslinked Polyethylene PEX Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 519 1992 R 1993 Errata 2004 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Pover Systems MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS MSS SP 110 2010 Ball Valves Threaded Socket Welding Solder Joint Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP 25 2008 Standard Marking System for Valves Fittings Flanges and Unions MSS SP 58 2009 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials Design and Manufacture Selection Application and Installation MSS SP 69 2003 Pipe H
478. th a 0 10V dimmable driver 257 LED Luminaire Photocell Switch UL 773 or UL 773A hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated volts ac 60 Hz with single throw contacts Single pole double throw spdt contacts for mechanically held contactors rated 1000 1800 watts designed to fail to the ON position Switch shall turn on at or below 32 lux 3 footcandles and off at 43 to 107 lux 4 to 10 footcandles A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition Provide switch a Compliant with Reduction of Hazardous Substances RoHS b Utilizing an ambient light sensing technology which inherently minimizes the contribution of typical high power LED light sources to the sensed light level c With a rated life expectancy of 90 000 hours continuous operation el In a high impact resistant noncorroding and nonconductive molded plastic housing with a fixture mounted locking type receptacle conforming to ANSI C136 10 and rated 1800 VA minimum l e In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide Page 17 2 rated 1800 VA minimum l In a U V stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide rated 1800 VA minimum Integral to the luminaire rated 1000 VA minimum l 3 8 LED Luminaire Time Sv
479. the BACnet network will write to Describe this interoperability in terms of BACnet services or Interoperability Building Blocks BIBBS defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex K Provide two year minimum warranty for each gatevay including parts and labor The following minimum capabilities are required a Gateways shall be able to read and view all readable object properties listed in the interoperability schedule on the non BACnet network to the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable b Gatevays shall be able to write to all writeable object properties listed in the interoperability schedule on the non BACnet network from the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable c Gateways shall provide single pass only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols translation from the non BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa d Gateways shall meet the requirements of Data Sharing Read Property DS RP B Data Sharing Write Property DS WP B Device Management Dynamic Device Binding B DM DDB B and Device Management Communication Control DM DCC B BIBBs in accordance with ASHRA Gl 135 0 ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 17 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 e Gateways shall include all hardware software software licenses and configuration tools for ope
480. the Contractor and the Contracting Officer The third party audit agency shall notify the Contractor and the Contracting Officer of any irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during the performance of its services The third party audit agency is not authorized to release revoke alter or enlarge the requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work The third party audit agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING The Contractor shall coordinate between subcontractors required to provide an airtight building enclosure customized fabrication and installation procedures and the following a Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to provide assemblies Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with joints and transition materials to provide a whole building air barrier system b Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections of the specifications Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard products It is the Contractor s responsibility to ensure that each subcontractor is adequately and satisfactorily performing the quality assurance documentation tests and procedures required by each section c Specified inspections tests and related actions do not limit the Contractor s quality control procedures
481. the barrier system 322 Performance Requirements The air barrier to be furnished shall be constructed to perform as a continuous barrier that will remain adhered in place and durable for the life of the building and conform to the following requirements a Building Air Barrier System The completed building shall have an air n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 2 leakage rate that does not exceed 0 25 cfm ft2 at a pressure differential of 0 3 w g 1 57 psf or 75 Pa when tested in accordance with the USACE Test Protocol Air Barrier Materials Air Permeance Not to exceed 0 004 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 0 3 w g 1 57 psf or 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 Air Barrier Assembly Air Permeance Not to exceed 0 040 cubic feet per minute per square foot under a pressure differential of 0 3 w g 1 57 psf or 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357 ABS shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing for airtight barrier across building expansion and control joints ABS shall accommodate changes in substrate and perimeter sealing conditions Different air barrier products shall be permanently joined together where they meet in a manner approved by both manufacturers to provide an airtight juncture These materials shall be compatable in both adhesion and chemical mackup The installed building Air barrier System
482. the bore map must include the existing ground elevation at each boring For infiltration systems and open bottom sand filters the report should include the soil type and expected infiltration rate at each proposed BMP location For projects proposing an infiltration system the SHWT elevation must be field verified by the State s Soil Scientist If an infiltration system is proposed please request a copy of the Infiltration Site Visit Request form from the Stormwater Staff in the Wilmington Regional Office Once the completed form and soils report have been submitted to the Wilmington Regional Office DENR s soil scientist will schedule a site visit A consultant involved in the soils analysis must be present during the site visit The submittal package will need the stormwater application form as well as the applicable supplements and operation and maintenance O amp M agreements which are also located on the BMP website One supplement and one O amp M agreement must be submitted for each BMP The only exception to this is the level spreader and filter strip O amp M where one may be submitted for the entire site When printing out the supplement remember to print out and complete Section the Required Items Checklist which is located on a separate sheet of the electronic supplement file It is strongly recommended that the designing engineer review the Application Review Checklist which is also located on the BMP website prior to
483. the drawings Provide Meter configuration template b Replace all existing meter bases For socket arrangements use meter and base form of 9S unless installation specific limitations require the use of a different form type For panelboards switchboards and Page 5 sul switchgear match the existing installation with the new meter base Existing meter bases can be re used if they are electrically functional in physically good condition and show no signs of corrosion on the electrical contacts If the existing meter base is usable the meter base determines meter form factor If a new meter is being installed use meter and base form factor of 9S unless installation specific limitations require the use of a different form type If use of a socket adaptor arrangement has been approved by the activity contractor shall verify that all clearances are met and doors are able to be properly closed Meter shall have NEMA 3R 3R stainless steel enclosure for surface mounting with bottom or rear penetrations Surge withstand capability shall conform to IEEE C37 90 1 Use 12 SIS XHHW or equivalent wiring with ring lugs for all meter connections Color code and mark the conductors as follows Red Phase A CT Cl Orange Phase B CT C2 Brown Phase C CT C3 Gray with white stripe neutral current return CO Black Phase A voltage V1 Yellow Phase B voltage V2 Blue Phase C voltage V3 White Ne
484. the indi catad changas on a psychrometiic chart Shaded area is acceptable ranga iyh r temperature rangas am indicated tha syst ms shall be capable of main taining the rooms at any point within the range during normal operation A single figue indicates a heating or cooling capacity of at least the indicated t mp ra ture This is usually applicable when patients may be undressed and require a warmerenvironment Nothing in thasa guidelines shall b construed as pr clud ing the use of temperatures lower than those notad when the patients comfort and medical conditions m k lower tempera turas desirable Unoecupied araas such as storage rooms shall have temperatures appropriate for the function intended s p K exhaust scavenging systems and g n ral ventilation of the amas in which the respective gasas ar utilized some surgeons may raquire room tamperaturas that are outside of the indi catad range All operating room design conditions shall be developed in con sultation with surga ons anasthasinlogists and nursing staff 5Th tarm trauma room as used here is the operating room space in theamer g ncy department or othar travma ception ama that is usad for emargancy surgery The first aid room and or amergancy room usad for initial treatment of accidant victims may b ventilated as noted forthe treatment room Treatment rooms used for bronchoscopy shall ba trated as bronchoscopy rooms Tr
485. the most recent 12 months including dates of each entry The PE must also verify that no fuel was excluded Each item must be verified to be true and accurate on the Statement of Energy Performance and Data Checklist 3 3 Hints amp Tips First review actual monthly energy bills provided by the management or owners Other sources of energy consumption data such as spreadsheet tracking and Energy Management Control System EMCS output might be incomplete or not record all fuels or meters within the building Before reviewing the building record on the SEP and Data Checklist or performing the building walk through you should do the following Get copies of actual energy bills and any record of monthly EMCS output s Determine the number of energy sources used within the building Ask about the energy sources for any equipment that uses something other than electricity for example domestic water heaters and back up electrical generators 3 4 Energy Consumption Q amp A To verify the monthly energy consumption must monthly bills from the utility company be independently obtained No If the PE is confident based on his her walk through that all of the energy sources and meters are accounted for than independently obtained monthly utility bills are not required In all but the rarest of cases the review of existing monthly energy bills that have been provided by the building management or owner is sufficient Are monthly
486. the outside and not recirculated to other areas Note that individual circum stancas May m quim spacial consideration for air axhaustto the outside e g in intensive care units in which patients with pulmonary inf ction ar teated and rooms for burn patients T Recirculating room HVAC units Is to those local units that ar used prima rity for heating and cooling of air and not disinfection of air Bacause of clean ing diffculty and potential for buildup of contamination recirculating room units shall not be used in areas marked No However for airborne infaction control air may be recirculated within individual isolation moms if HERA Titers ar usad Isolation and intensive care unit rooms may be ventilated by reheat induction units in which only the primary air supplied from a cantral system passes through the heat unit Gravity type heating or cooling units such 35 radiators or convactors shall not ba used in oparating rooms and other spe cial care areas Saa footnote at the bottom of the paga for a dascription of recirculation units to ba used in Solation rooms ma rangas listed are the minimum and maximum limits wher control is specifically needed The maximum and minimum limits are not intended to be independent of a space 5 associated tamparature The humidity is axpacta d to be at the higher end of the ranga when the temperatura is also at the higher nd and vice versa Sa Figum 2 1 1 for a graphic representation of
487. ting for parking garages need higher illuminances than open parking facilities Good lighting uniformity is most important in parking garages since access aisles are used by pedestrians for 11 walking between cars stairways and elevators The recommended maintained illuminance levels for both open parking lots and enclosed garages are noted below Recommended Maintained Illuminance Values for Parking Minimum Minimum Horizontal fc Vertical fc Open parking lots Basic 0 2 0 1 Enhanced Security 0 5 0 25 Parking garages Basic 1 0 0 5 Ramps Day 2 0 1 0 Night 1 0 0 5 Entrance Areas Day 50 0 25 0 Night 1 0 0 5 Stairways 2 0 1 0 5 5 Hints amp Tips When measuring illuminance remember to position the light meter at the proper height on the work surface at the task location either vertical or horizontal Avoid shadowing the meter with your body and avoid reflections off of clothing Allow thirty minutes between system switch on and the first measurement to ensure that the lighting system has reached a stable condition Daylight effects should be eliminated by performing the lighting survey after dark or with the blinds closed and measuring the day lighting contribution with the lights off and subtracting its contribution to the electric lighting llumination should be checked both directly under the fixture and between fixtures both laterally and longitudinal
488. ttach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping 8 4 Nameplates Provide 0 125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates black matte finish vith vhite center core for equipment gages thermometers and valves valves in supplies to faucets vill not require nameplates Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block lettering into the white core Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1 0 by 2 5 inches Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule PART 3 EXECUTION 3 s GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA 01 The rainwater harvesting system shall be installed complete with necessary equipment fittings valves and accessories Rainwater harvesting system piping shall be extended 5
489. turer and model shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site Software shall be submitted on CD ROM and hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests 6011 G 11 System functional verification G G 11 Building meter installation sheet per buildingl G G 1 11 Completed meter installation schedule G G 11 Completed meter data schedule G G 11 Meter configuration template G G _ Contractor shall fill in the meter configuration template and submit to the Activity for concurrence Meter configuration report G G I IB The meter configuration report shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electricity Meters and Accessories Data Package 51 611 G 11 Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance vith Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein SD 11 Closeout Submittals System functional verificationl 411 G I 11 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Installation Dravings Dravings shall be provided in hard copy and 1 electronic format and Page 3 shall include but not be limited to the folloving a Wiring diagrams with terminals identified of kilowatt advanced meter current transformers potential transformers protocol modules communication
490. twork there exists only one message path between devices 25 BACnet Netvork One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers 2226 BACnet Segment One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network connected at the physical layer by repeaters 5577 BBMD BACnet Broadcast Management Device BBMD A communications device typically combined vith a BACnet router A BBMD forvards BACnet broadcast messages to BACnet IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same BACnet IP network Every IP subnetwork that is part of a BACnet IP network must have only one BBMD See also BACnet IP 2228 Building Automation Systems including DDC Direct Digital Controls used for facility automation and energy management 7 BIBBs BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks A collection of BACnet services used to describe supported tasks BIBBs are often described in terms of A client and B server devices The A device uses data provided by the B device or requests an action from the B device s20 BI BACnet International formerly two organizations the BACnet Manufacturers Association BMA and the BACnet Interest Group North America BIG NA 2 L1 BI BTL BACnet International BACnet Testing Laboratories Formerly BMA BTL The orga
491. u C 2 7 Has recommendations 12 thru 17 been considered 12 Internal Circulation 13 Visitor Control 14 Asset Location 15 Room Layout 16 External Hallways 17 VVindovvs O Mechanical and Electrical 20 Standard 16 Air Intakes Appendix B 4 1 Are all air intakes a minimum of 10 feet above the ground 21 Standard 17 Mailroom Ventilation Appendix B 4 2 amp DOD Security Engineering Design Manual e Does mailroom have separate dedicated air ventilation system ls dedicated exhaust system to maintain slight negative air pressure provided e Has outside air intakes and exhausts With low leakage isolation dampers been provided e Has separate switches or methods of control to isolate mailroom been provided 22 Standard 18 Emergency Air Distribution Shutoff Appendix B 4 3 e Has Emergency shutoff switch in HVAC control system been provided s switch es easily accessible to building occupants 23 Standard 19 Utility Distribution and Installation Appendix B 4 4 e Are critical or fragile utilities routed so they are not located on exterior walls or on walls shared with mailrooms If redundant utilities are required are they routed so they are not collocated or are not run in same chases f emergency backup systems are required are they located away from the system components for which they provide backup 24 Standard 20 Equipme
492. ucts laboratory accreditation program One of the qualified labs listed on the DOE SSL web site http wwwl eere energy gov buildings ssl test labs html A manufacturer s in house lab that meets the following criteria a Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires and the manufacturer s lab has been successfully certifying these fixtures for a minimum of 15 years b Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology Pressure treated wood pole quality Tests for fiberglass poles G 1 Operating test Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled Field Quality Control SD 07 Certificates Fixture Useful Life Certificate G Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided The useful life shall be directly correlated to the IESNA LM 80 test data adjusted for the thermal properties of manufacturer s luminaire and adjusted for local average ambient operating conditions SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Concrete poles Submit instructions prior to installation Fiberglass poles Submit instructions prior to installation SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operational Service Submit documentation that includes contact information summary of procedures and the limitations and con
493. uilding Envelopes For new construction or renovation involving roofs and or exterior walls design and construction at all Navy locations in humid areas must comply with the following 6 1 3 1 Continuous Air Barrier Provide a continuous air barrier vapor retarder the least permeable material on the exterior side of the building insulation and place only more permeable materials on the interior side of the building insulation For double wythe walls 2 of 14 Enclosure 1 place the continuous air barrier on the exterior side of the inner wythe Provide drainage from the continuous air barrier to the exterior i e weep holes in the base of the exterior brick veneer wythe protected from accumulation of mortar droppings 6 1 3 2 Moisture Seal Seal all seams in the continuous air barrier and seal all openings around doors and windows lintels utility penetrations and at intersections of walls roofs floors and foundation walls Install non permeable sill gaskets between floors and the bottom plate of exterior walls Flash all windows and exterior doors with corrosion resistant flashing to prevent water intrusion into the wall cavity Provide design details in design drawings for these requirements Provide details to minimize thermal bridging especially at door and window frames and the intersections of walls and roofs Refer to Humidity Control Design Guide for Commercial and Institutional Buildings Chapter 2 Humidity Control Basics
494. um size of 6 VV X 8 X 1 25 D The locking mechanism must utilize the ASME A17 1 FEO key 8 4 Elevator Car and Counterweight Components 8 4 1 Roller Guides Coil spring loaded roller guide assemblies must be installed in adjustable mountings on each side of the elevator car and counterweight frames in accurate alignment at top and bottom of frames Mounting assemblies must include integral seismic retainer plates 8 4 2 Car Door Operator The elevator car door operator equipment and circuitry must be designed and installed as discreet communication Serial communication must not be used for this system 8 4 3 Infra red Car Door Protection An Infra red Curtain Unit ICU with a minimum of 150 beams must be used to protect the full height and width of the car door opening 8 5 Hydraulic Elevator Components and Systems For all projects direct plunger hydraulic elevators must be utilized in Navy Facilities Roped hydraulic elevators must not be installed in Navy facilities without written authorization and exception from the cognizant NAVFAC FEC VTE Program LCO 8 5 1 Hydraulic Cylinder Plunger Assemblies The Hydraulic Cylinder Plunger Assembly design must comply with the following a Telescopic plungers must not be installed in Navy Facilities b Inverted cylinder plunger assemblies must not be installed in Navy Facilities 8 5 2 Hydraulic Elevator Machine Pump Unit 8 5 2 1 Hydraulic Control Valve Every hydraulic elevator must be
495. ump pit on the foundation for the structure 11 CHAPTER 5 MECHANICAL Design and installation of mechanical systems must be in accordance with this ITG and all applicable reference documents and building and safety codes A listing of reference documents is provided as Attachment A The elevator design must comply with the edition in effect at the time of contract award 5 1 Elevator Machine Room 5 1 1 Elevator MR Temperature and Humidity Control An HVAC heating and cooling system must be designed and provided for every elevator MR to maintain MR temperature betvveen 50 and 90 degrees F 10 to 32 degrees C and relative humidity between 35 and 60 at all times and in all weather conditions HVAC system design mustaccommodate the BTU output of the elevator equipment 5 1 1 1 Air conditioning and heating capabilities are required in most conditions gravity ventilation is not acceptable Elevator controller cabinet AC units must not be used for conditioning Coordinate with Electrical Design requirements 5 1 1 2 HVAC conditioning equipment must not be located above elevator equipment AC condensate lines must drain to a location outside of the elevator MR and hoistway 5 1 2 Mechanical Equipment Installation Mechanical equipment and systems must conform to the following a Provide an unobstructed 7 0 2133 mm minimum vertical clearance headroom below all solid items in the elevator machine room The 7 headroom applies to a
496. ungers and inverted cylinder plunger assemblies must not be installed in Navy Facilities 2 5 1 1 There are three main types of hydraulic elevators 1 2 In ground Direct Plunger An elevator cylinder and plunger assembly is installed in the ground below the elevator cab The elevator cab frame is connected to the top of the plunger and moves up as hydraulic fluid is pumped into the cylinder from a reservoir For a travel distance of 15 or less the rated speed shall be 125 fpm For a travel distance between 15 and 44 the rated speed shall be 150 fpm Do not exceed a maximum travel length of 44 13411 mm or a maximum building height of four floors for this type of elevator Hole less Either one or two hydraulic cylinder plunger assemblies are installed vertically in the elevator hoistway with the bottom of the cylinder supported by the hoistway pit floor The cab frame is attached to the top of the plunger and moves up as hydraulic fluid is pumped into the cylinder from a reservoir The rated speed shall be 125 feet per minute for this type of elevator Travel is limited by pit depth and hoistway overhead 3 Roped This type shall not be used for new construction of Navy Facilities NOTE Roped hydraulic elevators may be considered for modernization of existing facilities subject to the approval of the NAVFAC VTE Program Manager Request for design approval shall be submitted to the NAVFAC FEC VTE LCO EXCEPTION I
497. uolsiAoid eads Aov y Sulnssi s ON S A uolsioc dq Jo siseg SDpUER A Uu YOM LIINNAd xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61090 Aov y Sulnssi s ON S A UOISIN9G Jo siseg 6 4 u o O spu d 1900 O P SO O poule qoO aed S IWU9d LINNAd H3 VNV N 1 1 NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM 1111 1 syw d 4 u o xog 9949 q aq noau LINM4d 4044 NOISIOAG 4O G4M0234 SLINYAd xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsio q Jo siseg p solo 120 PSUle qO 9 eq u uu eqV SSION LIINNAd SHUI 19U O xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 61090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg p solo 160 p uleqo 3eq UOHEAH S Ld 210 61 LIN I3d SHUI 19U O xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue suolsiAoicq 61090 Aov y Sulnssi ux ON S8A UOISIN9G Jo siseg p solo 3eq p ule qO a eq Bulssoi9 peouyley 114444 sywl d 19U O xx SJUBWOIINDEY pue SUOISIAOI 1090 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg sooueles y p solO leq p ulelqO leq Ayayes playsry paezey Hodiy LINYAd S UM9q LOALOUd LNAWNNYSAOD xog y5 uo NOLLVOOT q x noau 1138INDN 42113 1247OMd LINMH4d 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd
498. uolsioc q Jo siseg Ayyend sry P SO O 3q poule qoO aed uornonu suo LINYAd Ayyend sy eoeds euonippe 41 uA s ou sn 154FOMdd LN3INN2IdAO S NOLLVOOT HASINRN NYOM 1111 1 xog 49949 aayinoay LINYAd 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd x SJUBWAIINDAY pue SUOISIAOI 61099 Aov y Buinss xx ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg P SO O lEQ p ule qo 9120 1 JEWV IIO Ju ule 1 ud L NM4d xx SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoiq eI0edS Aouaby Buinss ux ON S8A UOISIN9G Jo siseg uonnilod 197eM P SO O lEQ p ule qO ajeq ue d U3WZL I L JBJEMI SEAA LIN I3d SJUBWBJINDAY pue suolsiAoid 61009 Aouaby ulnssi s ON S A uolsioc q Jo siseg uonnilod 197eM p so O 3q p ule qo 9ed uoneys dund d yeM seM LINYAd uonnilod e A s SJUBWAIINDAY pue suolsiAoid 61099 Aov y Buinss s ON S A uolsio dq Jo siseg O P SO O poule qoO aed Wa SAg U01 99 05 LINHAd M45VNVI 154FOMd LNSINNYSAO9D NOLLVOOT HASINRN MYOM 1111 1 uonnilod 4 EM xog 42949 qad nosu LIINYAd 404 NOISIOAG 4O GYODSY SLINYAd xx SJUBUIBJINDAY pue SUOISIAOId 61090
499. urement Stations Air flov measurement stations shall have an array of velocity sensing elements and straightening vanes inside a flanged sheet metal casing The velocity sensing elements shall be the RTD or thermistor type traversing the ducted air in at least tvo directions The air flov pressure drop across the station shall not exceed 0 1 inch vater gage at a velocity of 2 000 fpm The station shall be suitable for air flovs up to 2500 fpm and a temperature range of 0 to 140 degrees F The station s measurement accuracy over the range of 125 to 2 500 fpm shall be plus or minus 3 percent of the measured velocity Station transmitters shall provide a n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 24 T 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB CAMP LEJEUNE NC EPROGECT W O No 80511 linear temperature compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output The output shall be capable of being accurately converted to a corresponding air flow rate in cubic feet per minute Transmitters shall be a 2 wire loop powered device The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed 0 5 percent of the measurement 2 2 8 Air Flow Measurement For Terminal Devices Air flow measurement for terminal devices such as variable air volume boxes with or without fan power shall have an array of pressure sensing elements that sense total pressure and static pressure The flow measurement shall be
500. urpose To promulgate policy for facilitating effective and efficient construction completion contract closeout and turnover of NAVFAC constructed facilities to the Client This NAVFAC Red Zone NRZ initiative focuses on planning and executing the actions required to render facilities complete and usable for timely turnover to the Client NRZ also supplements aspects of facility turnover that are not included in the construction contract e g NMCI collateral equipment etc 2 Background The success of any NAVFAC construction contract is determined by how well the facility supports the Client s mission and operational needs The timely construction completion and turnover of a fully operational facility to the Client are important elements in achieving a high level of Client satisfaction Each member of the project delivery team Client NAVFAC and the contractor has critical responsibilities to ensure timely completion and turnover of the new facility and each member should execute the NRZ process to achieve this end The NAVFAC Project Manager PM Design Manager DM has the lead to coordinate NRZ requirements in the RFP Pre award and the Construction Manager CM has the lead to coordinate Facility Turnover Planning meetings and monitor the entire NRZ Checklist Plan of Action and Milestones POAM NRZ focuses attention to details for a successful contract completion and turnover of the constructed facility 3 Policy The NRZ proce
501. use activation of the solar energy system during daylight hours With system fully charged so that pressure at the high point on the roof or the lowest system pressure set by manufacturer and with fluid and pumps energized flowmeter must indicate flow Calibrated balancing valves with pressure taps shall indicate bank flow rate as shown 3 5 4 6 Control Logic By substituting variable resistors for collector and storage tank temperature sensors demonstrate the differential temperature controller correctly energizes the system pumps when the collector sensor indicates a temperature indicated on the controller display panel The differential temperature controller shall de energize the system pumps when the displayed temperature of the solar collectors reaches the displayed temperature of the storage tank 335 427 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics Demonstrate that the controller will correctly identify open and short circuits on both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit 3 5 4 8 Overall System Operations Demonstrate that the solar energy system will operate properly while unattended for a period of at least 72 hours and that the controller will start pumps after being warmed by the sun and that it will properly shut down during cloudy weather or in the evening over a minimum of three complete cycles Contractor is permitted to manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by the introduction of co
502. used c The ability to interpret thermographs and other data used in air barrier testing m CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES The Contractor is responsible for the construction of an air barrier system that is contiguous and connected across the six surfaces of the building n ECTION 07 25 00 00 22 Page 6 envelope meeting the performance requirements as outlined in this specification The Contractor shall perform a building air tightness test and thermography test to demonstrate that the building envelope is properly sealed and insulated The testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in this specification x Coordination of Sub Contractor s The Contractor shall provide coordination between the Sub Contractors involved in the construction of the air barrier system coordinate the sequence of construction to ensure continuity of the air barrier system joints junctures and transitions between materials and assemblies of materials and products from substructure to walls to roof The Contractor shall provide quality assurance procedures testing and verification as specified herein The Contractor shall facilitate inspections tests and other quality control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by the Contracting Officer These coordination efforts are critical to avoid costly removal and replacement of construction materials to accommodate inspections and tests
503. uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet system 1 2254 Netvork Communication technology for building network data communications BACnet approved network types are Point to Point PTP Ethernet and MS TP BACnet over Internet Protocol is not an approved method for building level controls 1 2 38 Network Number A site specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for routing This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet internetwork L 2 39 Object The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with various associated properties Examples include analog input objects and binary output objects 1 2 40 Object Identifier An object property used to identify the object including object type and instance Object Identifiers must be unique within a device 1 2 41 Object Properties Attributes of an object Examples include present value and high limi properties of an analog input object Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135 some are optional and some are required Objects are controlled by reading from and writing to object properties EH 1 2 42 Peer to Peer Peer to peer refers to devices where any device can initiate and respond to communication with other devices n ECTION 23 09 23 13 22 Page 7 2D COMBAT ENGINEERS OPS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX 12P1253 MCB C
504. ust be listed in the approved DITSCAP or DIACAP equipment list and must be Marine Corps DADMS listed and approved L 3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled Subcontractor Special Requirements in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE R FOUIREMENTS The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor a The controls sub contractor for this project shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of BACnet DDC systems for building HVAC systems similar to the size and scope of this project shall have been a representative of the proposed control system manufacturer for a minimum of two years have a staffed office within a 50 mile radius of the project location and shall have performed design and installation of DDC systems for a minimum of 5 years The controls sub contractor shall ensure that their installing electricians have a copy Of read and understand the mechanical sheets of the contract s design construction drawings in addition to the control drawings prepared by the sub contractor Provide the DDC programming and graphics using Standard English units of measure not metric BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC
505. ust can be damaging to Virtual Trainer components Access to the Training Room should prevent wind blown dust or precipitation from entering the room via poorly sealed doors or windows For existing facilities moisture producing items such as leaking or sweating pipes and damaged roofs must be repaired Please note that air conditioning vents should not be placed near Virtual Trainer projection screens since slight movements or ripples in the screen surface can reduce overall system accuracy Any source of IR light such as Exit signs or heaters should not be place near the screen where it is in the field of view of the hit cameras PLEASE NOTE BLUEFIRE WEAPON INFO If Bluefire weapons are to be used then excessive RF radio frequency from devices not FCC approved should be avoided Bluefire operates using Bluetooth technology in the 2 4 GHz frequency range The training room should be in a location where wireless devices can be used If there are known RF interferences that prevent other devices in the 2 4 GHz spectrums such as cordless phones wireless computer networks or other Bluetooth devices from operating properly then the room must be RF shielded Please contact FATS Inc for more details So far in the many installations trade shows and demonstration locations that have FATS Bluefire weapons there has not been any instances where there is enough RF interference to affect the performance of the Bluefire weapons 2 2 9 Sound Insulation Re
506. utility bills needed to verify the monthly energy consumption of each fuel No Based upon the judgment of the PE a building wide energy tracking tool that fully tracks consumption of all fuels such as an EMCS may be used instead of utility bills Are simulated or calculated values for monthly energy consumption acceptable No Simulated or calculated values for monthly energy consumption are not acceptable when applying for the ENERGY STAR label Should the electrical outputs of on site renewable sources or co generation units be included as part of the building s monthly energy consumption No Full credit is given for the use of on site renewables The energy input required by the co generation unit must be accounted for in Portfolio Manager but not the electricity that is generated What if the facility sells or distributes energy to other buildings that is the benchmarked building makes and distributes hot water steam chilled water or electricity to adjacent buildings Portfolio Manager is able to account for energy consumed by the building and distributed to other entities This is accomplished by creating a meter with negative values for each fuel type that is leaving the building for consumption off site 3 5 Checklist Verification of Energy Consumption NEW REQUIREMENT For more on the verification process of the Data Checklist new PE requirement for purposes of applying for the ENERGY STAR label effective D
507. utral voltage OO 1 0 UT r QO N PF Potential Transformer Requirements Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage phases and magnitude being monitored If the meter is not rated for the service voltage provide suitable potential transformers to send an acceptable voltage to the meter Voltage input shall be optically isolated to 2500 volts DC from signal and communications outputs Components shall meet or exceed IEEE C3790 1 Provide a pull out type fuse block containing one fuse per phase Class RK type to protect the voltage input to the meter Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer Fusing shall either be inside the secondary compartment of the transformer or inside the same enclosure as the CT shorting device Potential transformers will be used to convert 480 volt inputs to 120 volts for the locations shown on the metering schedule Potential transformers shall be rated indoor or outdoor as required for the specific application Voltage rating shall provide 120 volts wye connected 3 phase 4 wire 60 Hz insulation class 600 volts Potential transformers BIL shall be 10 kV and shall have an accuracy class of 0 3 at burdens w x and y Thermal rating shall be 500 VA The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the actual voltage ratio of each potential transformer for medium voltage applications Transformer shall conform to IEEE C57 13 and the following requirements Page 6
508. ve Tests a Provide vritten test reports of all tests performed vith a copy to the Contracting Officer b Determine the bond strength of coatings to substrate in accordance vith ASTM D 4541 5 BUILDING AIR TIGHTNESS TEST Test the building for air tightness following the Building Air Tightness Test Procedures This test is intended to demonstrate that the building construction has produced an effective air barrier so that air infiltration and exfiltration are minimized An adequate air barrier demands close attention to construction and installation of the building envelope components For example close attention must be paid to all seals to sealant around window door and louver frames to sealing of joints between panels to sealing the wall to floor interface and especially to sealing the wall to roof interface a The test shall be performed when the building envelope is enclosed and prior to the installation of the finished ceilings b The contractor shall notify the Government at least 48 hours prior to the Building Air Tightness Test A Government representative will witness the test and record test readings d The measuring instruments used in the tests shall be digital meters not analog gages e The following conditions will be observed in the building during the testing 1 All exterior doors and windows shall be closed 2 All interior doorways including stairw
509. ve at least 75 average annual occupancy o Hotels cannot have greater than 45 average annual vacancy o Schools must operate for at least 8 months of the year If the facility is a hospital it must include o Atleast 16 licensed beds but no more than 1 510 beds and more than 40 floors If the facility is a supermarket it must include o Atleast one worker on the main shift o Atleast one walk in refrigerator freezer unit Residence halls Dormitories must contain at least 5 rooms If the facility is a hotel it must include at least one room 2 4 Hints amp Tips For office buildings it can be useful to contact the building s local area network LAN manager or the equivalent to find out the average number of workers and number of PCs throughout the year and the typical weekly operating hours s Because HVAC systems are often scheduled to operate for a period of time before and after the typical period of occupancy using data from an automated environmental management system can substantially overstate the weekly operating hours as defined in Portfolio Manager Weekly operating hours is defined by the number of hours during the week the building is 75 occupied 2 5 Operating Characteristics Q amp A Are the weekly operating hours the same as the hours that the HVAC system is operating including start up and shut down periods No Weekly operating hours are defined as the number of hours per week in which the major
510. ve zone labels at the existing fire alarm panel indicating which new air handling unit detectors they serve and their location Label zones modified in order to accomplish the work Provide smoke control systems with a provision for manual operation by means of a key operated switch to override the duct smoke detector shutdowns Locate the override switch adjacent to the building s fire alarm system control panelas indicated 6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR DRIVES Provide variable frequency drives VFDs as indicated VFDs shall convert 240 or 460 volt plus or minus 10 percent three phase 60 hertz plus or minus 2Hz utility grade power to adjustable voltage frequency three phase AC power for stepless motor control from 5 percent to 105 percent of base speed VFDs shall be UL listed as delivered to the end user The VFD shall meet the requirements specified in the most current National Electrical Code Each VFD shall also meet the following a The VFD shall use sine coded Pulse Width Modulation PWM technology PWM calculations shall be performed by the VFD microprocessor b The VFD shall be capable of automatic control by a remote 4 20 mA 0 to 10 VDC signal BACnet interface or manually by the VFD control panel Oud VFD Quality Assurance VFDs shall be the manufacturer s current standard production unit with at least 10 identical units successfully operating in the field 6 2 VFD Service Sup
511. vents shall be capable of having programmed time delays and high low limits All alarms events shall report to the EMCS server Alarms events shall be stored within the Site Building Controller SBC Provide alarms events in agreement with the point schedule sequence of operation and the BAS Owner At a minimum provide programming to initiate alarms events any time a piece of equipment fails to operate a control point is outside normal range or condition shown on schedules communication to a device is lost a device has failed or a controller has lost its memory 2 1 4 11 Trending Provide BACnet trend services capable of trending all object present values set points and other parameters indicated for trending on project schedules Trends may be associated into groups and a trend report may be set up for each group Trends are stored within a device on the BACnet network with operator selectable trend intervals from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable When trend memory is full the most recent data shall overurite the oldest data The SBC shall upload trends automatically upon reaching 3 4 of the device buffer limit via Notification Threshold property by operator request or by time schedule for archiving Archived and real time trend data shall be available for vieving numerically and graphically for at the vorkstation and c
512. ving a professional opinion about whether the building can provide acceptable thermal environmental conditions It is highly recommended that the PE as part of the evaluation of the occupied spaces observe and record such signs of possible occupant thermal discomfort as Oscillating table fans vvindovv fans or other personal fans Personal space heaters Open vvindovvs unless it is an occupant controlled naturally conditioned space VVindovv or through the vvall style room air conditioners Covered or otherwise occupant modified supply air diffusers Altered or broken thermostats In addition to observing the conditions the PE should take temperature and humidity measurements in occupied areas that have the highest concentration of the items listed above This is a good way to check the most problematic occupied areas in the building Again it is up to the PE s professional judgment as to whether the building as a whole provides a suitable work environment for those subject to the respective working conditions The outlined standards for acceptable conditions are meant to provide general guidance For hotels having individual room units for comfort air and a separate system for outdoor air make sure that the systems can simultaneously provide comfort AND proper ventilation 4 6 Thermal Comfort Q amp A Must the building be assessed as it operates in both heating and cooling modes No The capability of the building to meet ASHRAE S
513. way 7 1 1 1 Elevator Controller Interface with Fire Alarm System The design of the fire detection and alarm system must include an effective interface with the elevator controller for actuation of Fire Fighter s Emergency Operation FEO Indicate detectors and connections on fire protection drawings or on electrical drawings if fire protection drawings are not provided Coordinate with Electrical Engineer 7 1 1 2 For current code compliance the smoke detector fire alarm initiating device system typically requires 3 to 4 relay modules for Firefighters Emergency Operation Mount FEO operation modules on the wall inside the elevator MR 7 1 2 FEO Visual Indicator Intermittent Flashing Firefighters Emergency Operation must include intermittent flashing of all of the FEO Phase I and Phase II visual indicators when a smoke detector has actuated in the elevator MR or hoistway 7 2 Fire Protection System Automatic sprinkle protection is determined by the NAVFAC Fire Protection Program In buildings protected with an automatic sprinkler system design sprinkler system in accordance with NAVFAC FIRE Protection UFC 3 600 01 and the following 7 2 1 Elevator Machine Room Provide sprinkler protection in all elevator machine rooms except in Italy Provide a dedicated sprinkler line for the elevator MR 18 7 2 1 1 A supervised shut off valve check valve flovv svvitch and test valve must be provided in the sprinkler line feeding the elevat
514. weapon Note More safety concerns are also covered in the System O amp M Manual 2 7 BLUEFIRE WEAPONS Bluefire weapons with recoil require the use of a magazine refill station This station occupies about 1 cubic feet of space and should be set on a sturdy table and nearby the firing line in order for students to easily refill their magazines to minimize down time This station requires a Nitrogen canister that needs to be provided by the customer FATS recommends our customers rent this canister and have a service that fills the canister on a regular basis depending on usage The canister is the tall kind that weighs over 200 Ibs and requires it to be strapped down or in a rolling rack to prevent it from falling over and causing a potential hazard The specifications of the canister should be as follows Canister tank pressure 5000 6000 PSI Fitting CGA 677 Gas High Pressure Nitrogen Training Facility Design Document Bluefire weapons have a range of about 33 feet from the weapon s dongle transceiver unit that allows the wireless communication between the weapon and the system which plugs into the FATS simulation computer The dongle currently has a cable length of about 25 feet with a connector that plugs into the weapon port of the FATS computer For optimal performance it is recommended that each dongle be placed in the center of the projected area in front of the firing line closer to the screen than the firing line If there is go
515. when the hydraulic fluid as close as possible to ambient temperature b Perform a minimum 104 kPag 15 psig pressure test of sealed system For elevators with a travel greater than 30 perform pressure test at 138 kPag 20 psig c Perform test from a remote location outside of the elevator hoistway d Utilize an air pressure admission throttle and shut off valve e Utilize additional pump unit safety relief valve set to relieve at 138 kPag 20 psig f Utilize pressure gauge scaled for identification of 1 pound increments and calibrated at 0 5 percent accuracy g Perform test in the presence of and witnessed by a NAVFAC Certified VTE Inspector 8 5 7 Roped Hydraulic Elevator Systems For all projects direct plunger hydraulic elevators must be utilized in Navy Facilities Roped hydraulic elevators must not be installed in Navy facilities EXCEPTION In the event of compelling design conditions the use of a roped hydraulic elevator may be appropriate Approval for use of a roped hydraulic elevator design may be requested on an individual project by submission of a written Request for Approval to the NAVFAC VTE Program FEC Lead Certifying Official LCO The LCO is authorized to grant an exception to this restriction 8 5 7 1 All roped hydraulic plungers must be equipped with an over travel limit switch Limit switch must remove power from the hydraulic pumping unit and prevent the plunger stop ring from striking the head of the h
516. will provide crane wheel loads electrical power requirements and clearances for crane installation NAVCRANECEN will participate in the facility design process by reviewing facility submittals relating to the WHE and attending coordination meetings as required 2 Prepare an Acquisition Agreement for supported command and NAVCRANECEN signatures 3 Prepare the design build contract documents for the WHE 4 Issue the Request for proposal 5 Award the WHE contract 6 Review the WHE submittals for compliance with the contract requirements 7 Witness the contractor performed WHE shop tests 8 Provide on site quality assurance during the removal installation and acceptance testing of the WHE 9 Accept the WHE NAVCRANECEN coordinates with the local certifying official so the certifying official can use the NAVCRANECEN acceptance test to certify the WHE 10 Provide warranty support for one year following crane acceptance c To initiate a NAVCRANECEN procurement contact NAVCRANECEN Project Manager amp Business Director at 757 967 3810 Crane information forms for bridge cranes are available on the NAVCRANECEN website https portal navfac navy mil ncc to facilitate communication of required characteristics These same forms may be used to identify the salient characteristics of other types of WHE e g mobile boat hoists rubber tired gantry cranes etc to assist in the technical specification development process
517. xcept Low Rise Residential Buildings 2 UFC 3 400 01 dated 5 July 2002 Including Change 4 August 2008 ENERGY CONSERVATION 3 COMNAVREGMIDLANTINST 4100 1 REGIONAL ENERGY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM Dated 28 Sept 2009 4 ECB 2008 03 Acceptance Testing of Critical Systems 5 NAVFAC Engineering and Construction Bulletin ECB 2008 01 Energy Policy Act of 2005 Implementation and USGBC LEED Certification NAVFAC tools Utilize the NAVFAC tools from the NAVFAC web site See NAVFAC Sustainable Development Program Tools at http vvvvv vvbdg org references pa dod sust tools php This site covers 6 tools Here are the two most important tools Navy 1391 Sustainable Design Cost Tool http vvvvvv vvbdg org docs navy 1391 leed xls The primary use of this tool is to identify sustainable features and their costs to achieve the requirements of the Energy Policy Act 2005 Executive Order 13423 implements Federal Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings MOU Energy Independence and Security Act 2007 EISA and a minimum LEED Silver level rating certified by USGBC to include in the Budget Estimate Summary Sheet of the DD Form 1391 The total cost of these items will be carried over to the EPAct2005 LEED Silver line item in Block 9 of DD Form 1391 Energy Conservation tool http vvvvvv vvbdg org docs energy conserve measure _toolkit xls This tool is intended to be a companion tool to the Navy 1391 Sustainable Desig
518. y This ECB applies to 1 new construction and major renovation projects beginning with the POM 2012 MILCON program and 2 Facility Sustainment Restoration and Modernization FSRM projects beginning in FY10 where design requirements do not substantially impact project execution Marine Corps Community Service MCCS is enjoined to comply with this guidance where feasible The policy established in references a and b cannot be used to solely justify a roof replacement For Host Nation funded construction similar technology shall be pursued within established agreements and where feasible 1 of 2 Issue No 2010 05 8 July 2010 Type Policy 4 Policy Similar to safety security and building access requirements solar energy generation shall be considered a design scope requirement for new construction and complete roof replacement projects Meeting the provisions of the policy established by references a and b must be in accordance with applicable Building Codes and Unified Facility Criteria UFCs for structural mechanical electrical and roofing The following provisions shall be incorporated into the planning and design of Marine Corps buildings e All new construction and major renovation projects requiring complete roof replacements will incorporate roof top solar thermal and or photovoltaic systems o For FSRM projects solar thermal and photovoltaic technologies shall be classified as construction and are subject t
519. y the user The PE is expected to verify the accuracy of the building s recorded physical characteristics which include building floor area in square feet ft building name location etc A checklist of these items to be verified is provided at the end this module These items must be verified to be true and accurately displayed on the Statement of Energy Performance 1 3 Building Designation Requirement The information needed to complete a Statement of Energy Performance and or to apply for the ENERGY STAR label varies by building type and is given below Currently there are eleven eligible building space types Definitions of all building and space types are provided in Appendix D More than 50 of your building s gross floor area excluding parking lots and garages must be defined by one of the following space types Bank Financial Institution Courthouse Dormitory Hospital acute and children s Hotel K 12 School Medical Office Office Retail Store Supermarket Grocery Store Warehouse refrigerated and non refrigerated 1 4 Physical Characteristics Requirements All buildings must meet the following requirements pertaining to gross square foot location parking structures and pools The gross floor area of the building excluding garage and parking lot must be at least 5 000 square feet with two exceptions a Bank Financial Institutions must be at least 1 000 square feet b Hospitals must be at least 20 0
520. ydraulic cylinder 8 5 7 2 All roped hydraulic elevators must have the following sign installed in the elevator MR NOTICE This is a Roped Hydraulic Elevator Emergency personnel shall not actuate the manual lowering valve If movement of the elevator cab is necessary for extrication of passengers contact the elevator service provider 8 6 Elevator performance Testing and Commissioning 8 6 1 Performance Requirements During the commissioning process elevators must be inspected and tested for conformance to speed and pressure requirements and for performance and reliability 8 6 1 1 Elevator speeds must be tested and recorded with the elevator running with no load in both directions and with rated load in both directions For each test to be considered successful the elevator must run at a minimum of rated speed and at a maximum of 110 of rated speed 8 6 1 2 Working pressure 28 8 6 1 2 Elevator performance and reliability must be tested by running the elevator vvith rated load for a continuous one hour period The elevator must run in both directions of travel stop at each floor and allow automatic door open and close operation The requirements for Automatic Operation Rated Speed Leveling Temperature Rise and Motor Amperes must be met throughout the duration of the Endurance Test The one hour test period must be restarted from the beginning following any shutdown or failure 8 7 Elevator Supporting Documentation
521. ystems still need to run continuously However with no occupancy it may be possible to slow down the VAS and EA system fan speeds so as to deliver less airflow to the building without losing control of the space dew point BUILDING AIR LEAKAGE From UFC 4 721 10 Design Navy and Marine Corps Bachelor Housing Chapter 4 Para 4 3 the Gross Building Area per Apartment 710 sq ft Assuming a minimum height of 9 feet from top of floor to top of floor and a three floor building the volume of the building may be approximated by the following Bldg Volume Area x Height 710 sq ft x 100 units x 9 ft high 639 000 cubic feet The design VAS outside air volume to be delivered is 60 cubic feet per minute CFM per unit Therefore the total VAS is as follows VAS vol 60 CFM x 100 units x 60 min per hour 360 000 cubic feet per hour CFH The design Exhaust Air EA volume to be removed by the toilet exhaust is 20 CFM per unit Therefore the total EA is as follows EA vol 20 CFM x 100 units x 60 minutes per hour 120 000 CFH Therefore the design air change rate available to offset building air leakage is the VAS volume minus EA volume divided by the building volume as follows VAS EA Bldg Vol 360 000 120 000 CFH 639 000 cubic feet 0 38 Air Changes hour Page 13 of 14 Enclosure 2 Per the ASHRAE Humidity Control Design Guide for Commercial and Institutional Buildings Chapter 16 Building Pr

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Cromoterapia 1.34.529 Luz Azul 1.34.930  DKTCOMEGA Freja T0B  User Manual  ※ To avoid users without access right through  PDFファイル  全体版 - やまぐちの環境    Emerson 300 Switch User Manual  WeWeb Manuale Utente 3373KB May 01 2014 04:05:10  Instalación - LiftMaster  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file